diff options
| author | Norbert Preining <preining@logic.at> | 2021-04-05 01:48:02 +0000 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Norbert Preining <preining@logic.at> | 2021-04-05 01:48:02 +0000 |
| commit | 52abb81b4d93856336a4ff98da16e8de4cb048db (patch) | |
| tree | cef075c3981f88a48400038d9cbe74c3b54eb53c | |
| parent | 678c84747dc180471d08fcd720cd478e46eeb64b (diff) | |
biblatex-gb7714-2015 (5apr21)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@58753 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
13 files changed, 16343 insertions, 15700 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/README.md b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/README.md index 0a013369fb7..38080851ab2 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/README.md +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/README.md @@ -1,4 +1,4 @@ -<b>Date of last change: 2021-01-19 to version v1.0w</b> +<b>Date of last change: 2021-04-03 to version v1.0x</b> # biblatex-gb7714-2015: a biblatex style package @@ -44,36 +44,39 @@ biblatex-gb7714-2015 宏包是中文参考文献著录/标注标准 `GB/T 7714-2 ## Applications - -* [SJTUThesis(上海交通大学学位论文模板)](https://github.com/sjtug/SJTUThesis)(母校的论文模板，不得不说缘分真的很神奇) -* [fduthesis(复旦大学论文模板)](https://github.com/Stone-Zeng/fduthesis) -* [Zhejiang University thesis(浙江大学毕业设计/论文模板)](https://github.com/TheNetAdmin/zjuthesis) -* [UCASthesis(中国科学院大学学位论文模板**国科大新版标准**)](https://github.com/xiaoyao9933/UCASthesis) -* [UCASthesis(ucasthesis 国科大学位论文 LaTeX 模板 [最新样式])](https://github.com/mohuangrui/ucasthesis) -* [TongjiThesis(同济大学硕博士论文LaTeX模板)](https://github.com/marquistj13/TongjiThesis) -* [neuthesis(东北大学博士学位论文Latex模板)](https://github.com/mervin0502/neuthesis) -* [nwafuthesis(西北农林科技大学学位论文LaTeX文档类)](https://github.com/registor/nwafuthesis) -* [nudtpaper(nudt学位论文模板)](https://github.com/liubenyuan/nudtpaper) -* [ECNU-Undergraduate-LaTeX(华东师范大学本科毕业论文模板)](https://github.com/YijunYuan/ECNU-Undergraduate-LaTeX) -* [fjnu-bathesis (福建师范大学本科毕业论文LaTeX 模板)](https://github.com/fjnuer/fjnu-bathesis) -* [Thesis-Template-for-XJTU (西安交大毕业设计模板)](https://github.com/DXie123/Thesis-Template-for-XJTU) +* [BIThesis（bachelor graduation thesis for Dept. of Undergraduate Academic Affairs of Beijing Institute of Technology.）](https://github.com/BITNP/BIThesis) * [CAUTemplate(中国农业大学课程论文模板)](https://github.com/Cdmium/CAUTemplate) -* [Yet anoter BUPT Thesis LaTeX class (北邮研究生学位设计的LaTeX文档类)](https://github.com/qcts33/BUPTthesis-ctex) -* [Study-LaTeX(LaTeX学习笔记)](https://github.com/Zousiyu/Study-LaTeX) +* [CSUThesis(中南大学论文 Latex 模板 )](https://github.com/disc0ver-csu/csu-thesis) * [ElegantBook](https://github.com/ElegantLaTeX/ElegantBook) -* [《经济研究》杂志 LaTeX 论文模板)](https://github.com/EthanDeng/Chinese-ERJ) -* [WUTthesis（武汉理工大学研究生学位论文的 LaTeX 模板）](https://github.com/Jiayin-Gu/WUTthesis) -* [shtthesis (ShangHaiTech university THESIS)](https://github.com/lirundong/shtthesis) +* [ECNU-Undergraduate-LaTeX(华东师范大学本科毕业论文模板)](https://github.com/YijunYuan/ECNU-Undergraduate-LaTeX) +* [fduthesis(复旦大学论文模板)](https://github.com/Stone-Zeng/fduthesis) +* [fjnu-bathesis (福建师范大学本科毕业论文LaTeX 模板)](https://github.com/fjnuer/fjnu-bathesis) * [LaTeX-SWUFE-Bachelor-Thesis （西南财经大学本科毕业论文 LaTeX 模板）](https://github.com/sukanka/LaTeX-SWUFE-Bachelor-Thesis) +* [LZUthesis（兰州大学本科毕业论文LaTeX模板）](https://github.com/szsdk/LZUthesis) +* [neuthesis(东北大学博士学位论文Latex模板)](https://github.com/mervin0502/neuthesis) * [NJU-thesis-esz（南京大学学位论文-微调整后适用于人文社科）](https://github.com/EdwardSaidZhou/NJU-thesis-esz) * [NKThesis（南开大学硕士毕业论文(博士论文)Latex模板）](https://github.com/procuteboy/NKThesis) * [NKUBachelorThesis（南开大学本科生毕业论文(毕业设计)LaTeX模板）](https://github.com/NKcqx/NKUBachelorThesis) -* [BIThesis（bachelor graduation thesis for Dept. of Undergraduate Academic Affairs of Beijing Institute of Technology.）](https://github.com/BITNP/BIThesis) * [nputhesis（NPU 博士、硕士学位论文 \LaTeX 模板）](https://github.com/NPUSCG/nputhesis) -* [sustechthesis（Southern University of Science and Technology Thesis Template LaTeX Template）](https://github.com/Iydon/sustechthesis) -* [SHMTUThesis（上海海事大学 LaTeX 学位论文模板）](https://github.com/hellckt/SHMTUThesis) -* [LZUthesis（兰州大学本科毕业论文LaTeX模板）](https://github.com/szsdk/LZUthesis) * [nuaa-thesis（南京航空航天大学本科、硕士和博士学位论文的样式模板）](https://github.com/nuaa803/nuaa-thesis) +* [nudtpaper(nudt学位论文模板)](https://github.com/liubenyuan/nudtpaper) +* [nwafuthesis(西北农林科技大学学位论文LaTeX文档类)](https://github.com/registor/nwafuthesis) +* [shtthesis (ShangHaiTech university THESIS)](https://github.com/lirundong/shtthesis) +* [SHMTUThesis（上海海事大学 LaTeX 学位论文模板）](https://github.com/hellckt/SHMTUThesis) +* [SJTUThesis(上海交通大学学位论文模板)](https://github.com/sjtug/SJTUThesis) (母校的论文模板，不得不说缘分真的很神奇，16年一出来就用上) +* [sustechthesis（Southern University of Science and Technology Thesis Template LaTeX Template）](https://github.com/Iydon/sustechthesis) +* [SwufeTeX（西南财经大学学位论文LaTeX模板）](https://github.com/OopsYao/swufethesis) +* [Thesis-Template-for-XJTU (西安交大毕业设计模板)](https://github.com/DXie123/Thesis-Template-for-XJTU) +* [ThuThesis（LaTeX Thesis Template for Tsinghua University ）](https://github.com/tuna/thuthesis) +* [TongjiThesis(同济大学硕博士论文LaTeX模板)](https://github.com/marquistj13/TongjiThesis) +* [UCASthesis(中国科学院大学学位论文模板**国科大新版标准**)](https://github.com/xiaoyao9933/UCASthesis) +* [UCASthesis(ucasthesis 国科大学位论文 LaTeX 模板 [最新样式])](https://github.com/mohuangrui/ucasthesis) +* [ustcthesis（中国科学技术大学学位论文 LaTeX 模板）](https://github.com/ustctug/ustcthesis) +* [WUTthesis（武汉理工大学研究生学位论文的 LaTeX 模板）](https://github.com/Jiayin-Gu/WUTthesis) +* [Yet anoter BUPT Thesis LaTeX class (北邮研究生学位设计的LaTeX文档类)](https://github.com/qcts33/BUPTthesis-ctex) +* [Zhejiang University thesis(浙江大学毕业设计/论文模板)](https://github.com/TheNetAdmin/zjuthesis) +* [《经济研究》杂志 LaTeX 论文模板)](https://github.com/EthanDeng/Chinese-ERJ) +* [LaTeX学习笔记（Study-LaTeX)](https://github.com/Zousiyu/Study-LaTeX) * [...] @@ -170,7 +173,7 @@ citestyle=gb7714-2015%,backref=true%%其中后端backend使用biber } @Book{蔡敏2006--, - Title = {UML基础和Rose建模教程},27 + Title = {UML基础和Rose建模教程}, Address = {北京}, Author = {蔡敏 and 徐慧慧 and 黄柄强}, Publisher = {人民邮电出版社}, @@ -201,7 +204,7 @@ citestyle=gb7714-2015%,backref=true%%其中后端backend使用biber 4. 顺序编码制中同时输出作者和顺序编码标签，比如：\\ 见\citeauthor{蔡敏2006--}\cite{蔡敏2006--}\\ - 见\authornu*mcite{蔡敏2006--}\\ + 见\authornumcite{蔡敏2006--}\\ 见\textcite{蔡敏2006--} (顺序编码标签不上标) 5. 作者年制文中已有作者还需要年份和页码(顺序编码制与pagescite作用相同，作者年制年份行内页码上标):\\ @@ -314,6 +317,50 @@ biber jobname xelatex jobname.tex ``` +* <b>使用biblatex时运行简单示例也出现错误，查看biber输出结果似乎不正常，这种情况怎么解决？</b> + +由于biber在第一次运行时会在缓存文件夹下创建一些二进制运行文件，如果这些文件被破坏，那么biber运行结果会出现莫名其妙的错误。比如： +biber运行一半就结束了，log信息如下所示： + +``` + INFO - This is Biber 2.16 + INFO - Logfile is 'thuthesis-example.blg' + INFO - Reading 'thuthesis-example.bcf' + INFO - Found 34 citekeys in bib section 0 + INFO - Processing section 0 + INFO - Looking for bibtex format file 'ref/refs.bib' for section 0 + INFO - LaTeX decoding ... + INFO - Found BibTeX data source 'ref/refs.bib' +``` +这次运行中只是找到了bib文件，并没有下一步的处理，显然是存在问题的。 + +因此如果出现这种情况，可以手动删除缓存文件夹，让biber重新创建。这些缓存文件夹名字通常为： + +``` + par-<hex_encoded_username>/cache-* + par-<hex_encoded_username>\cache-* +``` + +在不同的系统下面，缓存文件夹的位置是不同的，可能的位置包括： + +``` + /var/folders/*/*/*/ (OSX, local GUI login shell) + /var/tmp/ (OSX (remote ssh login shell), Unix) + /tmp/ (Linux) + C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Temp (Windows XP/Cyg- win) + C:\Windows\Temp (Windows) + C:\Users\<username>\AppData\Local\Temp (Windows 7/8) +``` + +也可以从运行得到的.blg文件或者命令`biber --cache`来找到缓存文件夹。 + +删除缓存文件夹操作，在Linux和Mac下可以使用如下命令操作： +``` +rm -rf `biber --cache` +``` + +在windows下，那么其实随便用个清理软件把临时文件夹清理一下就行。直接点就是找到`par-<hex_encoded_username>/cache-*`缓存文件夹然后删除它。 + * <b>为什么利用 ctex2.9 套装进行编译时，出现错误？</b> @@ -334,6 +381,24 @@ utf-8编码的文档，采用xelatex编译没有任何注意事项，但使用pd 当文档使用其他编码时，xelatex编译通常需要指定一个文档编码，比如windows环境下的GB2312编码的文档需要指定`\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK"`， 否则显示乱码。使用pdflatex进行编译，如果biblatex不能正确的处理编码问题，那么需要为其明确的指定texencoding和bibencoding选项。比如windows环境下的GB2312编码的文档，需要指定`\usepackge[texencoding=GBK]{biblatex}`。 +* <b>请问要给biblatex-gb7714-2015设置一些选项，但模板已经将biblatex调用写死且不方便修改，该如何处理？</b> + +可以使用PassOptionsToPackage命令来实现。，比如将gbnamefmt=lowercase选项传递给biblatex，那么可以使用如下命令： +``` +\PassOptionsToPackage{gbnamefmt=lowercase}{biblatex} +``` +需要注意的是要使该命令生效，这条命令需要在调用biblatex之前出现，可以放到导言区调用biblatex之前，也可以放到文档类调用之前(即documentclass命令之前)，比如： + +``` +\PassOptionsToPackage{gbpub=false}{biblatex} + +\documentclass[twoside]{article} +\usepackage{ctex} +\usepackage[backend=biber,style=gb7714-2015,gbalign=center]{biblatex} +``` + + + * <b>请问使用backref=true选项后，某个反向超链接总是链接到封面页是怎么回事？</b> @@ -535,7 +600,7 @@ gbyntd 以语言、年份、作者、标题、降序排列 \hspace{\biblabelsep}} ``` -示例见：https://github.com/hushidong/biblatex-gb7714-2015/issues/62 +示例见：[issue](https://github.com/hushidong/biblatex-gb7714-2015/issues/62) @@ -642,9 +707,25 @@ biblatex-7714-2015的顺序编码制样式特别设计了这样的环境，以 \setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100}%大于0允许在数字后面断行 \setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100}%大于0允许在大写字母后面断行 \setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100}%大于0允许在小写字母后面断行 +``` + +* <b>中英文混排，有些英文断行不佳，导致行溢出，怎么解决？</b> + +biblatex的参考文献表的换行是由tex的断行机制决定的，处理行（盒子）溢出就要用tex的方式处理： + +``` + { + %\hyphenation{Proce-edings} + \hyphenpenalty=5000 %断词阈值， 值越大越不容易出现断词 + \tolerance=500 %丑度， 10000为最大无溢出盒子， 参考the texbook 第6章 + \hbadness=100 %如果丑度超过hbadness这一阀值， 那么就会发出警告 + \printbibliography[heading=subbibintoc,title=【参考文献】] +} ``` +当然如果不想这么设置，可以手动的修改参考文献条目的内容，在需要换行的内容前加上-符号。 +见：https://github.com/hushidong/biblatex-gb7714-2015/issues/89 * <b>当参考文献没有作者时，希望用佚名或Anon代替作者时，请问该怎么处理？</b> @@ -760,6 +841,20 @@ biblatex-gb7714-2015设计了两种多语言对照参考文献的实现方式， 使用命令`\yearcite{bibtexkey}`给出仅包含年份的标签。 +* <b>中文文档中，引用标注标签在一个句子中时，标签的`]`后面与中文字符之间存在一个空格，怎么消除？</b> + + +在引用命令后面加一个没有长度的空白即可，比如： +``` +中文字符\cite{sally_history_1985}\mbox{}中文字符 + +中文字符\cite{sally_history_1985}\hbox{}中文字符 + +中文字符\cite{sally_history_1985}\makebox{}中文字符 + +中文字符\cite{sally_history_1985}\hspace{0pt}中文字符 +``` + * <b>在使用作者年制时，我希望文献表是按作者年份标题排序，而正文某处一个cite命令引用多个参考文献，且这些文献的标签是按年份作者标题排序，该怎么操作？</b> @@ -906,16 +1001,45 @@ biblatex中处理顺序数字编码压缩的代码默认从3个连续编码开 ### 5. Examples/著录和标注结果示例 -* 顺序编码制 ++ 标注样式示例 + + * 顺序编码制 + +  + + 代码见：， + + * 作者年制 + +  + + 代码见：， + ， - + 具体代码见：egfigure 文件夹下的各个文件。 -* 作者年制 + 命令说明见：biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf文档。 + ++ 著录样式示例 - + 国标文档的完整复现： + + * 顺序编码制 + + 代码见： + + * 作者年制 + + 代码见： + + * 国标附录 + + 代码见： + ++ 姓名的格式更改示例 -* 姓名的格式更改 +代码见： ， 对于bib文件中的如下条目，有: @@ -958,6 +1082,126 @@ biblatex中处理顺序数字编码压缩的代码默认从3个连续编码开 +### 6. 测试文件说明 + ++ egfigure + -  测试gb7714-2015ay的标注样式，是否满足GB要求 + -  测试gb7714-2015ay的标注样式，绘制成表用于biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf + -  测试gb7714-2015ay使用natbib的常用标注命令 + -  测试gb7714-2015的标注样式，是否满足GB要求 + -  测试gb7714-2015使用natbib的常用标注命令 + -  测试gb7714-2015的标注样式，绘制成表用于biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf + -  测试gb7714-2015ay使用复数形式的命令 + -  测试gb7714-2015使用复数形式的命令 + -  测试gb7714-2015样式选项gbnamefmt=givenahead,gbbiblabel=dot,gbtitlelink=true + -  测试gb7714-2015ms样式选项gbnamefmt=lowercase,gbstyle=false,sorting=nyt + -  测试gb7714-2015ay样式选项maxcitenames=2,mincitenames=1,sorting=gbynta（UCAS-资环类） + -  测试gb7714-2015样式实现的双语对照文献表，关联条目方法 + -  测试gb7714-2015样式实现的双语对照文献表，关联条目方法，（gbnamefmt=pinyin 国内某期刊） + -  测试gb7714-2015样式实现国标要求的脚注文献表 + -  测试gb7714-2015样式一般的脚注文献表 + -  测试gb7714-2015ms样式在一篇文档中使用两种格式设置，中文：GB，英文：biblatex标准样式 + -  测试gb7714-2015mx样式在不同的参考文献分节中使用顺序编码和作者年制两种不同样式 + -  测试gb7714-2015样式实现的多语言混合的文献表 + -  测试gb7714-2015样式最小示例，用于biblatex-gb7714-2015.PDF + -  测试gb7714-2015样式文献表段落格式设置，包括缩进，颜色，字体，间距等 + -  实现GB/T 7714-2015 标准的附录的文献表示例（gb7714-2015样式） + -  实现GB/T 7714-2015 标准的附录的文献表示例（gb7714-2015ms样式） + -  实现GB/T 7714-2015 标准2-10节给出的顺序编码制示例（gb7714-2015样式） + -  实现GB/T 7714-2015 标准2-10节给出的顺序编码制示例（gb7714-2015ms样式） + -  实现GB/T 7714-2015 标准2-10节给出的著者年份制示例（gb7714-2015ay样式） + -  实现GB/T 7714-2015 标准2-10节给出的著者年份制示例（gb7714-2015ay样式，nohashothers=true） ++ egphoto + -  测试citexref=false选项 + -  测试citexref=true选项 + -  测试gbalign=center选项 + -  测试gbalign=gb7714-2015选项 + -  测试gbalign=left选项 + -  测试gbalign=right选项 + -  测试gbannote=false选项 + -  测试gbannote=true选项 + -  测试gbannote=true选项 + -  测试gbbiblabel=box选项 + -  测试gbbiblabel=bracket选项 + -  测试gbbiblabel=parens选项 + -  测试gbbiblabel=dot选项 + -  测试gbbiblabel=plain选项 + -  测试gbbiblabel=circle选项 + -  测试gbnoauthor=false选项 + -  测试gbnoauthor=true选项 + -  测试gbpub=false选项 + -  测试gbpub=true选项 + -  测试gbpunctin=false选项 + -  测试gbpunctin=true选项 + -  测试gbtitlelink=false选项 + -  测试gbtitlelink=true选项 + -  测试gbtype=false选项 + -  测试gbtype=true选项 + -  测试mergedate默认选项（gb7714-2015ay） + -  测试mergedate=true选项（gb7714-2015ay） + -  测试mergedate=false选项（gb7714-2015ay） + -  测试mergedate=none选项（gb7714-2015ay） ++ egthesis + -  + -  + -  + -  + -  测试西北农林科技大学（可以参考：特殊的ay样式调整） + -  测试东南大学（可以参考：gb7714-2015样式调整） + -  + -  + -  + -  + -  测试中科院大学（可以参考：ay样式调整） + -  + -  测试对外经贸大学（可以参考：中文标点、卷期格式；中英文不同） + -  测试中科大（可以参考：一文中使用两种样式） + -  + -  + -  + -  + -  ++ example + -  测试beamer中的使用（gb7714-2015样式） + -  测试beamer中的使用（gb7714-2015ay样式） + -  测试gb7714-2015、ay样式，对于GBK编码文档的兼容性 + -  测试gb7714-2015ms样式一篇文档中中英文两种格式设置，多语言对照，多语言混合文献表 + -  测试全面的类型、格式 + -  测试示例 + -  测试多语言混合的文献表，各语言不同的本地化字符串 + -  测试多语言混合的文献表 + -  测试ay样式 + -  测试双语对照文献-两种方法（条目集、关联条目） + -  测试gbalign选项 + -  测试gbalign选项 + -  测试gbalign选项 + -  测试gbannote选项，在文献表中加上附加信息用以说明三大索引情况 + -  测试gbbiblabel选项 + -  测试gbctexset选项，使可以利用ctex的设置对文献表的标题进行修改 + -  测试gbfiledstd选项，著录格式还原为biblatex标准样式的格式 + -  测试实现国标要求的脚注文献表 + -  测试文献表排序，中文在前 + -  测试文献表排序，英文在前 + -  测试文献表排序，自定义顺序 + -  测试多语言混合文献表排序 + -  测试本地化字符串设置（引用标注标签、文献表） + -  测试本地化字符串设置（多种方法局部调整） + -  测试本地化字符串设置（多种语言的局部调整） + -  测试gbnamefmt对于作者姓名格式的控制 + -  测试gbnamefmt对于作者姓名格式的控制 + -  测试gbnamefmt对于作者姓名格式的控制 + -  测试gbnoauthor选项 + -  测试gbnoauthor选项 + -  测试gbpub选项 + -  测试gbpunctin选项 + -  测试gbtitlelink选项 + -  测试gbtype选项 + -  测试backrref选项，反向超链接 + -  测试chinese-erj样式 + -  测试译著的其它语言的译者格式 + -  测试删除标注后因为xeCJK加入的空格 + + --------------------------------------------------------- @@ -1183,6 +1427,7 @@ please see the file 'biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf' for further information! * 2020/03/30 v1.0u * 2020/07/21 v1.0v,ctan * 2021/01/19 v1.0w,ctan +* 2021/04/03 v1.0x,ctan diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf Binary files differindex 9d22accbe0e..a60f9e6783c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.pdf diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.tex index 767ffbbd1e2..b817eb6b52e 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.tex +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/biblatex-gb7714-2015.tex @@ -1,3 +1,8 @@ + +%!Mode:: "TeX:UTF-8" +%!TEX program = xelatex +%!BIB program = biber + \documentclass[11pt]{article} %用draft选项找到badbox的位置 twoside, \input{biblatex-gb7714-2015-preamble} %宏包和一些格式设置 \usepackage{microtype} @@ -496,6 +501,7 @@ leftrule=0pt,rightrule=0pt,toprule=0.4pt,bottomrule=0.4pt] \item gbnamefmt=givenahead，姓名的格式与biblatex标准样式的given-family格式一致，即名在前姓在后，类似于ieee的样式； \item gbnamefmt=familyahead时，姓名的格式与biblatex 标准样式的family-given格式一致，即姓在前名在后，类似于APA 的样式； \item gbnamefmt=pinyin 时，姓名的格式采用一种常见的中文拼音方式，比如对于 Zhao, Yu Xin 或 Yu Xin Zhao 这个姓名拼音格式化为ZHAO Yu-xin。 + \item gbnamefmt=quanpin 时，姓名的格式采用另一种常见的中文拼音方式，比如对于 Zhao, Yu Xin 或 Yu Xin Zhao 这个姓名拼音格式化为Zhao Yuxin。 \item gbnamefmt=reverseorder 时，姓名的格式与biblatex 标准样式的family-given/ given-family格式一致，常用于经济学类的文献。 \end{itemize} \bc{注意：还可以利用 nameformat 域为某一具体条目设置该条目的姓名格式，比如：要在一个文献表中实现英文文献是givenahead 格式，而拼音的文献是pinyin风格，那么可以设置拼音文献的 nameformat 域为pinyin，而gbnamefmt设置为givenahead。条目中nameformat 域的局部设置优先于gbnamefmt的全局设置。}\par @@ -739,6 +745,29 @@ leftrule=0pt,rightrule=0pt,toprule=0.4pt,bottomrule=0.4pt] \caption{多语言文献表语言排序控制选项}\label{fig:eg:optgblanorder} \end{figure} + \pdfbookmark[4]{citexref}{citexref} + \item[citexref]=\textbf{true}，false. \hfill default is true + + 为顺序编码制样式控制是否使用传统的crossref功能而增加的选项。 + \begin{itemize} + \item citexref=true，默认启用传统的crossref功能，即一个析出文献中给出crossref或xref 域来指定其析出来源文献，则在著录表中该析出文献的源用其来源文献在著录表中的序号如[1]等来代替。 + \item citexref=false，则使用biblatex的默认方式，当存在crossref域时自动将来源文献的信息引入到当前析出文献中，而使用xref域时，则不引入来源文献的信息。 + \end{itemize} + + 测试文档见：\href{run:./egphoto/opt-citexref-true.tex}{opt-citexref-true.tex}、 + \href{run:./egphoto/opt-citexref-false.tex}{opt-citexref-false.tex}。 + 效果示例如图\ref{fig:eg:optcitexref}所示。 + +\begin{figure}[!htb] +\centering +\begin{tcolorbox}[left skip=0pt,right skip=0pt,% +width=\linewidth,colframe=gblabelcolor,colback=white,arc=0pt,% +leftrule=0pt,rightrule=0pt,toprule=0.4pt,bottomrule=0.4pt] +\subfigure[\heiti citexref=true] {\parbox{7.5cm}{\includegraphics*[page=1,viewport=0.2cm 0.2cm 7.5cm 8cm,clip=true]{egphoto/opt-citexref-true.pdf}}} +\subfigure[\heiti citexref=false] {\parbox{7.5cm}{\includegraphics*[page=1,viewport=0.5cm 0.2cm 8cm 8cm,clip=true]{egphoto/opt-citexref-false.pdf}}} +\end{tcolorbox} +\caption{控制传统crossref功能的citexref选项}\label{fig:eg:optcitexref} +\end{figure} \pdfbookmark[4]{gbannote}{gbannote} \item[gbannote]=true，\textbf{false}. \hfill default is false diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx index 161dcacd8ba..dbb03b854a6 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.bbx @@ -1,237 +1,237 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% erj.bbx --- A bibliography style of Economic Research Journal in china
-%% modified from gb7714-2015ay at the request of ddswhu
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%%用法：类似于标准的样式在biblatex加载时设置样式
-%%文献表正常处理，标注命令主要用cite和textcite
-\ProvidesFile{chinese-erj.bbx}[2019/03/28 v1.0 a biblatex bibliography style for ERJ]
-
-
-%==================================================
-%加载gb样式
-%==================================================
-\RequireBibliographyStyle{gb7714-2015ay}
-\RequirePackage{mfirstuc}%单词首字母大写的问题
-\MFUnocap{in}%
-\MFUnocap{the}%
-\MFUnocap{of}%
-\MFUnocap{on}%
-\MFUnocap{and}%
-\MFUnocap{for}%
-
-
-%==================================================
-%考虑多音字增加multipinyin排序，是其可以根据key域添加拼音来排序
-%==================================================
-\DeclareSortingTemplate{multipinyin}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%[direction=descending]
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
-%==================================================
-%选项设置
-%==================================================
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- maxbibnames=99,
- gbtype=false,
- gbpub=false,
- gbnamefmt=reverseorder,
- sorting=multipinyin,
- doi=false,
- url=false,
- }
-
-%==================================================
-%为标注和文献表中标点格式，重设and本地化字符串
-%==================================================
-\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
- and = { and},%and后面的空格在finalnamedelim已经加过了，所以这里去掉20191009
- andcn = {、},
- andincitecn = {和},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andincite = {\&},
- %andotherscn={等},
- %mathesiscn={[硕士学位论文]},
- %phdthesiscn={[博士学位论文]},
-}
-
-
-%==================================================
-%设置一些标点格式为中文的标点
-%==================================================
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{#1}{\capitalisewords{#1}}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat*{title}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{#1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{\mkbibquote{#1}\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat*{journaltitle}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{\textit{#1}}}%
-%\DeclareFieldFormat*{booktitle}{《#1》}
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{，}%%来源biblatex.def
-\DeclareDelimFormat*{multinamedelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{、}{，}}%\addcomma\addspace
-\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
- %\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
- %\addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-%\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andincitecn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andincite}\space%
- \fi}
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{%
-% \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-% \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andcn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{and}\space%
- \fi}
-\DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{，}%\addcomma\addspace
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{，}%\addcomma\addspace
-\DeclareDelimFormat{bibpagespunct}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}{，}}%\addcomma\addspace
-\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{，}%\addcomma\space %，
-\renewcommand*{\finentrypunct}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{。}{\adddot}}
-
-%==================================================
-%调整部分域的输出格式
-%==================================================
-%
-% 修改number和volume的格式
-%
-\newcounter{numberwithoutzero}
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{number}%
- {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{%
- \iffieldint{number}{\setcounter{numberwithoutzero}{#1}\printtext{\bibstring{serialcn}\addthinspace\arabic{numberwithoutzero}\addthinspace 期}}
- {\printtext{\bibstring{serialcn}\addthinspace#1\addthinspace 期}}%
- }%
- {\printtext{(}#1\printtext{)}}}% %
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}%
- {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}%
- {#1}}% volume of a book
-
-%
-% 调整期刊名的格式
-%
-% 原理方法:因为作者年制年份提到前面，因此涉及到期刊名与后面的卷期的关系。
-% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{journal}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
- \iffieldundef{series}%
- {}%
- {\newunit%
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- %\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
- %换成逗号和空格
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
- %\newunit
- }
-
-% 调整期刊卷和期的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
-\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{%\printfield{volume}%
- \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield{number}}%区别于顺序编码制
- }
- {\newunit\printfield{volume}%
- %\setunit*{\adddot\space}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}}
-
-%
-% 重设title的输出
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
-% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
-\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\setunit{：}\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令%增加了标点：
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}% 判断是否为报纸
- {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}% 其它
- }}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
- }%
-}}
-
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}{#1}}%页码引用格式的修改%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符
-
-\setlength{\bibitemindent}{1.5\ccwd} % bibitemindent表示一条文献中第一行相对后面各行的缩进
-\setlength{\bibhang}{0pt} % 作者年制中 bibhang 表示的各行起始位置到页
- % 边的距离,顺序编码制中
- % bibhang+labelnumberwidth 表示各行起始位置
- % 到页边的距离
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% erj.bbx --- A bibliography style of Economic Research Journal in china +%% modified from gb7714-2015ay at the request of ddswhu +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%%用法：类似于标准的样式在biblatex加载时设置样式 +%%文献表正常处理，标注命令主要用cite和textcite +\ProvidesFile{chinese-erj.bbx}[2019/03/28 v1.0 a biblatex bibliography style for ERJ] + + +%================================================== +%加载gb样式 +%================================================== +\RequireBibliographyStyle{gb7714-2015ay} +\RequirePackage{mfirstuc}%单词首字母大写的问题 +\MFUnocap{in}% +\MFUnocap{the}% +\MFUnocap{of}% +\MFUnocap{on}% +\MFUnocap{and}% +\MFUnocap{for}% + + +%================================================== +%考虑多音字增加multipinyin排序，是其可以根据key域添加拼音来排序 +%================================================== +\DeclareSortingTemplate{multipinyin}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{%[direction=descending] + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + +%================================================== +%选项设置 +%================================================== + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + maxbibnames=99, + gbtype=false, + gbpub=false, + gbnamefmt=reverseorder, + sorting=multipinyin, + doi=false, + url=false, + } + +%================================================== +%为标注和文献表中标点格式，重设and本地化字符串 +%================================================== +\DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{ + and = { and},%and后面的空格在finalnamedelim已经加过了，所以这里去掉20191009 + andcn = {、}, + andincitecn = {和},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andincite = {\&}, + %andotherscn={等}, + %mathesiscn={[硕士学位论文]}, + %phdthesiscn={[博士学位论文]}, +} + + +%================================================== +%设置一些标点格式为中文的标点 +%================================================== +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{#1}{\capitalisewords{#1}}} +\DeclareFieldFormat*{title}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{#1\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat[article]{title}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{\mkbibquote{#1}\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat*{journaltitle}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{《#1》}{\textit{#1}}}% +%\DeclareFieldFormat*{booktitle}{《#1》} +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{，}%%来源biblatex.def +\DeclareDelimFormat*{multinamedelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{、}{，}}%\addcomma\addspace +\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{% + %\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% + %\addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +%\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andincitecn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andincite}\space% + \fi} +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{% +% \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% +% \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andcn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{and}\space% + \fi} +\DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{，}%\addcomma\addspace +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{，}%\addcomma\addspace +\DeclareDelimFormat{bibpagespunct}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}{，}}%\addcomma\addspace +\renewcommand*{\newunitpunct}{，}%\addcomma\space %， +\renewcommand*{\finentrypunct}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{。}{\adddot}} + +%================================================== +%调整部分域的输出格式 +%================================================== +% +% 修改number和volume的格式 +% +\newcounter{numberwithoutzero} +\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{number}% + {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{% + \iffieldint{number}{\setcounter{numberwithoutzero}{#1}\printtext{\bibstring{serialcn}\addthinspace\arabic{numberwithoutzero}\addthinspace 期}} + {\printtext{\bibstring{serialcn}\addthinspace#1\addthinspace 期}}% + }% + {\printtext{(}#1\printtext{)}}}% % +\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}% + {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}% + {#1}}% volume of a book + +% +% 调整期刊名的格式 +% +% 原理方法:因为作者年制年份提到前面，因此涉及到期刊名与后面的卷期的关系。 +% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz +\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{journal}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + %\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号 + \iffieldundef{series}% + {}% + {\newunit% + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}% + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + %\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + %换成逗号和空格 + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面 + %\newunit + } + +% 调整期刊卷和期的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx +\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{%\printfield{volume}% + \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield{number}}%区别于顺序编码制 + } + {\newunit\printfield{volume}% + %\setunit*{\adddot\space}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}} + +% +% 重设title的输出 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件 +% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断 +\renewbibmacro*{title}{% + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\setunit{：}\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令%增加了标点： + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}% 判断是否为报纸 + {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}% 其它 + }}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit + }% +}} + +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}{}{#1}}%页码引用格式的修改%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符 + +\setlength{\bibitemindent}{1.5\ccwd} % bibitemindent表示一条文献中第一行相对后面各行的缩进 +\setlength{\bibhang}{0pt} % 作者年制中 bibhang 表示的各行起始位置到页 + % 边的距离,顺序编码制中 + % bibhang+labelnumberwidth 表示各行起始位置 + % 到页边的距离 diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx index 53bb2e1177a..7fd829a0eed 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/chinese-erj.cbx @@ -1,151 +1,151 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% erj.cbx --- A citation style of Economic Research Journal in china
-%% modified from gb7714-2015ay for the request by ddswhu
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%%用法：类似于标准的样式在biblatex加载时设置样式
-%%文献表正常处理，标注命令主要用cite和textcite
-
-\ProvidesFile{chinese-erj.cbx}[2019/03/28 v1.0 a biblatex citation style for ERJ]
-
-%==================================================
-%加载gb样式
-%==================================================
-\RequireCitationStyle{gb7714-2015ay} %
-
-
-
-%==================================================
-%选项设置
-%==================================================
-\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- maxcitenames=2,
- mincitenames=1,
-}
-
-%==================================================
-%引用命令设置，主要用cite和textcite
-%包括标点设置
-%==================================================
-\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{；}%\addsemicolon\addspace；
-\renewcommand*{\textcitedelim}{%
- \iffinalcitedelim
- {\ifnumgreater{\value{textcitetotal}}{2}
- {}{}%\iftextcitepunct{\finalandsemicolon}{\finalandcomma}
- \addspace 、}%\addspace\bibstring{andincitecn}
- {\iftextcitepunct{\addsemicolon\space}{\addspace 、}}%\addcomma
-}%\space
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{\addspace}%\addcomma\space
-\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{}{\addspace}}%
-
-%之所以不用\DeclareDelimFormat{andothersdelim}{}这样的设置是因为gb7714-2015中为兼容老版本的biblatex做的处理就是这样的
-%所以用相同的方式
-\AtEveryCitekey{%
-\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
-}
-
-%标注压缩时，直接用date+extradate代替extradate实现2006a，2006b的效果
-%\DeclareDelimFormat*{compcitedelim}{、}%\addcomma\addspace
-\newbibmacro*{cite:extradate}{%
- \iffieldundef{extradate}
- {}
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\addspace\printlabeldateextra}}}%\printfield{extradate}\printlabeldateextra \printfield{labelyear}\printfield{extradate}
-
-%\AtEveryCite{%
-%\let\parentext=\parentexttrack%
-%\let\bibopenparen=（%
-%\let\bibcloseparen=）}
-
-%添加前后空格
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}%[\mkbibparens]
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \printtext{（}\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)\addspace
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{postnote}%(
- ）}%\addspace
-
-%原版
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{cite}}
-% {}
-% {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
-%
-%添加后面空格
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite}
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}}
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{textcite}}
-% {}
-% {\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}\addspace}
-
-\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
- \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}
- {\ifnameundef{labelname}
- {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}（}%\bibopenparen
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
- {\printnames{labelname}%
- \setunit{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \printdelim{nameyeardelim}（}%\bibopenparen
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {}%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}%
- \stepcounter{textcitecount}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}%
- \setunit{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen
- {}%
- \textcitedelim}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{textcite:postnote}{%
- \usebibmacro{postnote}%
- \ifthenelse{\value{multicitecount}=\value{multicitetotal}}
- {\setunit{}%
- \printtext{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen
- {}}}
- {\setunit{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen
- {}%
- \textcitedelim}}}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% erj.cbx --- A citation style of Economic Research Journal in china +%% modified from gb7714-2015ay for the request by ddswhu +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +%%用法：类似于标准的样式在biblatex加载时设置样式 +%%文献表正常处理，标注命令主要用cite和textcite + +\ProvidesFile{chinese-erj.cbx}[2019/03/28 v1.0 a biblatex citation style for ERJ] + +%================================================== +%加载gb样式 +%================================================== +\RequireCitationStyle{gb7714-2015ay} % + + + +%================================================== +%选项设置 +%================================================== +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + maxcitenames=2, + mincitenames=1, +} + +%================================================== +%引用命令设置，主要用cite和textcite +%包括标点设置 +%================================================== +\renewcommand*{\multicitedelim}{；}%\addsemicolon\addspace； +\renewcommand*{\textcitedelim}{% + \iffinalcitedelim + {\ifnumgreater{\value{textcitetotal}}{2} + {}{}%\iftextcitepunct{\finalandsemicolon}{\finalandcomma} + \addspace 、}%\addspace\bibstring{andincitecn} + {\iftextcitepunct{\addsemicolon\space}{\addspace 、}}%\addcomma +}%\space + +\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{\addspace}%\addcomma\space +\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{}{\addspace}}% + +%之所以不用\DeclareDelimFormat{andothersdelim}{}这样的设置是因为gb7714-2015中为兼容老版本的biblatex做的处理就是这样的 +%所以用相同的方式 +\AtEveryCitekey{% +\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% +} + +%标注压缩时，直接用date+extradate代替extradate实现2006a，2006b的效果 +%\DeclareDelimFormat*{compcitedelim}{、}%\addcomma\addspace +\newbibmacro*{cite:extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{extradate} + {} + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\addspace\printlabeldateextra}}}%\printfield{extradate}\printlabeldateextra \printfield{labelyear}\printfield{extradate} + +%\AtEveryCite{% +%\let\parentext=\parentexttrack% +%\let\bibopenparen=（% +%\let\bibcloseparen=）} + +%添加前后空格 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}%[\mkbibparens] + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \printtext{（}\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)\addspace + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}%( + ）}%\addspace + +%原版 +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens] +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \usebibmacro{prenote}}%) +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{cite}} +% {} +% {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + +% +%添加后面空格 +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite} +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}} +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{textcite}} +% {} +% {\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}\addspace} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite}{% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}（}%\bibopenparen + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + {\printnames{labelname}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \printdelim{nameyeardelim}（}%\bibopenparen + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\iffieldundef{labelyear} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}% + \stepcounter{textcitecount}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}% + \setunit{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen + {}% + \textcitedelim}} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite:postnote}{% + \usebibmacro{postnote}% + \ifthenelse{\value{multicitecount}=\value{multicitetotal}} + {\setunit{}% + \printtext{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen + {}}} + {\setunit{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {）\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%\bibcloseparen + {}% + \textcitedelim}}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx index 0da0841ee9a..40065b5686a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.bbx @@ -1,3900 +1,4034 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,numerical sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-
-%
-% 版本和时间信息
-%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 加载标准样式
-%=====================================================================
-\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp}
-\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 功能函数
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % biblatex版本判断
- % 20180405，v1.0k，为兼容biblatexv3.11增加toggle:iftlnine，HU zhenzhen
- % 20181020，v1.0n，为不再使用xstring宏包做的修改，hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:当版本继续更新时，增加一个新的toggle用以处理新的旧版，最新版和未判断出来的版本永远用iftlatest
- \providetoggle{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlfive} %处理biblatex3.2之前版本，时间2016-03-01前
- \providetoggle{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlsix} %处理biblatex3.3开始改变姓名机制后版本，时间2016-03-01及以后
- \providetoggle{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlseven}%处理biblatex3.7的兼容性，时间2016-12-01后
- \providetoggle{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftleight}%处理biblatex3.8到3.9的兼容性，时间2017-11-01后到2017-12-01前
- \providetoggle{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlnine} %处理biblatex10的兼容性，时间2017-12-01后
- \providetoggle{iftlatest}\toggletrue{iftlatest} %假设是最新版biblatex
-
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2014/04/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/12/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/11/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2018/02/19}{}
- {\toggletrue{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\PackageError{biblatex}{Outdated 'biblatex' package}
- {Please update biblatex, This is a fatal error.}}
-
- \newcommand\defversion[2]{\csdef{codeversion#1#2}}%定义不同版本的命令
- \newcommand\switchversion[2]{\csuse{codeversion#1#2}}%使用不同版本的命令
-
- %
- % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成
- % v1.0k,20180509,hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏
- % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8
- % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。
- %
- % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中，
- % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断
- \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt}
- \def\testCJKfirst#1{%
- \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}}
-
- %
- % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号
- \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}%
- {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}%
- }
-
-
- %
- % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}%
- {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}%
- }
-
- % 对没有分隔符环境命令的低版本biblatex做增补，避免报错
- %
- \iftoggle{iftlfive}{
-
- \def\blx@inf@delimdeclare#1#2{%
- \blx@info{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' already defined, overwriting}}
-
- \def\blx@warn@delimuse#1#2{%
- \blx@warning{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' undefined}}
- % Delimiter interface
-
- % [<contextname, ...>]{<name, ...>}{<code>}
- \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimFormat}{%
- \@ifstar
- {\blx@declaredelimclear}
- {\blx@declaredelim}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimclear}[3][]{%
- \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}
- {}
- {\def\do##1{\csundef{blx@printdelim@##1@#2}}%
- \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}%
- \cslet{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}\@empty
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\blx@declaredelim{#2}{#3}}
- {\blx@declaredelim[#1]{#2}{#3}}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelim}[3][]{%
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\blx@declaredelim@i{}{}{#2}{#3}}
- {\def\do##1{%
- \listcsadd{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}{##1}%
- \blx@declaredelim@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{##1}{#2}{#3}}%
- \docsvlist{#1}}}%
-
- \def\blx@declaredelim@i#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\do@i##1{%
- \ifcsdef{#1##1}
- {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{##1}{#2}}
- {}%
- \csdef{#1##1}{#4}}%
- \forcsvlist{\do@i}{#3}}
-
- % *[<contextname, ...>]{<alias>}{<delim>}
- \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimAlias}{%
- \@ifstar
- {\blx@declaredelimalias}
- {\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimalias}[3][]{%
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#2}{#3}}
- {\def\do##1{%
- \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#2}{#3}}%
- \docsvlist{#1}}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}[2]{%
- \blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#1}{#2}%
- \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}
- {}
- {\def\do##1{%
- \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#1}{#2}}%
- \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}}
-
- \def\blx@declaredelimalias@i#1#2#3{%
- \ifcsdef{#1#2}
- {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{#2}{#1}}
- {}%
- \csdef{#1#2}{\csuse{#1#3}}}
-
- \def\blx@delimcontext{none}
- \newcommand*{\printdelim}[2][]{%
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2}
- {\csuse{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2}}
- {\ifcsdef{#2}% fall back on legacy macros
- {\csuse{#2}}
- {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{*}}}}
- {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@#1@#2}
- {\csuse{blx@printdelim@#1@#2}}
- {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{#1}}}}
-
- \newcommand*{\delimcontext}[1]{%
- \edef\blx@delimcontext{\blx@delimcontextalias{#1}}}
-
- \def\blx@delimcontextalias#1{%
- \ifcsdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}
- {\csuse{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}}
- {#1}}
-
- \newcommand*{\DeclareDelimcontextAlias}[2]{%
- \csgdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}{#2}}
- }{}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 数据模型定义
-%=====================================================================
- %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。
- %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
- %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
- %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
- %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
-
- %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型
- %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时
- %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式
- %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14
- \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}%
- }{}
-
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置宏包选项
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项
- % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息
- % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote}
- %
- %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏
- %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式
- \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
- \printtext{\addspace(#1)}%
- }
- \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}%
- {\iffieldundef{annotation}%
- {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}%
- {\printfield{annotation}}}%
- {}%
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
- % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项
- % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage}
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
- % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz
- % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
- % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式
- % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
-
- %%
- \newlength{\footbibmargin}
- \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
- \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
- \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
- \def\execgbfootbib%
- {%
- %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true}
- %
- %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐
- \AtEndPreamble{
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{
- %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
- %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
- %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
- %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
- %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
-
- %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
- %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
- %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
- %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}%
- {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器
-
-\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }
-
- \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
- \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
-
- }
-
- %
- %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
- \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}}
- %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标
- \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{%
- \def\@makefnmark{%
- \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}%
- }%
- }{}{}
- }
-
- %
- %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
- %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
- %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
- \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
- \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
- {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
- {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
- \@makefnmark%
- }}%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- }}%
- }%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
- }}%
- }
-
- %
- %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求
- \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]%
- {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器
- \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{postnote}}}%与ay样式不同，由于已修改postnote域格式，直接用printfield
- }%
- {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}%
- \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%
- {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%\nopunct
- {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}%
- }%
- {\multicitedelim}%
- {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式
- % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz
- % 原理方法:
- % 只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的
- % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype}
- %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档
- % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def
- % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用
- % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。
- % 另外注意：
- % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码
- % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常
- % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。
- \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk}
-
- \def\str@bibliography{参考文献}
- \def\str@references{参考文献}
- \def\str@bytranslator{译}
- \def\str@andotherscn{等}
- \def\str@andcn{和}
- \def\str@backrefpage{引用页}
- \def\str@backrefpages{引用页}
- \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详}
- \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详}
- \def\str@edition{版}
- \def\str@volumecn{卷}
- \def\str@numbercn{册}
- \def\str@serialcn{第}
- \def\str@sameentry{同}
- \def\str@incn{见}
- \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
- \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
- \def\str@editorcn{主编}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK}
- \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def}
- }{}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息
- % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式
- % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。
- % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接
- \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项
- % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置
- \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{%
- \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{%
- \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}%
- \abx@dostrings
- \csuse{abx@strings@#1}%
- \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}%
- \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i
- \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}%
- }
- }{}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项
- %
- % 原理方法:在顺序编码制中不需要使用,为与作者年制的兼容性考虑,这里也增加避免报错
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{}%
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域
- % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd}
-
- %
- % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。
- %
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{%
- %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub}
-
- %
- % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin}
-
-
-
-
-
- %
- % 选项设置
- %
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- sorting=none,
- useprefix=true, %名字的信息包括前缀
- date = year, %日期仅写到年
- maxbibnames = 3,%设置名字最大数量
- minbibnames = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量
- maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量
- minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量
- isbn=false,
- }
-
- %
- %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015
- %
- \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{%
- \begingroup
- \blx@metadateinfo{#1}%
- \iffieldundef{#1year}
- {}
- {\printtext[#1date]{%
- \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}%
- \endgroup}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{%
- \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}%
- \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}}
-
-
- %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器
- \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase}
- \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase}
- %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}}
- %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbalignlabel}
- \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel}
- %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase}
- \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase}
- \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase}
- \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase}
-
-\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}
- { % 针对biblatex>=3.3版本的选项设置
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项
- % numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项
- % gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru
- % gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr
- % gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序
- {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}%
- \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}%
- {%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}%
- {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}%
- {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}%
- }%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder}
-
- \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序
- \gdef\lancnorder{4}
- \gdef\lanjporder{5}
- \gdef\lankrorder{6}
- \gdef\lanenorder{1}
- \gdef\lanfrorder{2}
- \gdef\lanruorder{3}}
-
- \newcounter{lanordernum}
- \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr
- \setcounter{lanordernum}{0}
- \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;}
- \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}}
- \parsinglanorder{#1}
- }
-
- %
- % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
- % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
- % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串
- % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串
- % v1.0o，20190103，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal}
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal}
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}%
- }
- %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置
-
- %
- % 增加序号标签格式处理选项
- % v1.0l，20180623，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{%
- \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1}
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel}
-
- %
- % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
- \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
- \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
-
- %
- % 增加标签对齐选项
- %
- % right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{}
- }
- }
- {% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项
- % numeric样式， biblatex 3.4及以下版本不能使用多个stylesourcemap，所以不使用该选项
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
-
- %
- % 增加序号标签格式处理选项
- % v1.0l，20180623，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{%
- \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1}
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel}
-
- %
- % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
- \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
- \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
-
- %
- % 增加标签对齐选项
- %
- % 原理方法:right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015无效，仍然为右对齐模式，
- % 因为在这种biblatex低版本中，舍弃了list类环境后，会出错。
- % 注意:texlive2015中的3.0版中的DeclareBibliographyOption选项没有类型说明
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbalign}[right]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{}{}
- }
- }
-
-
-%
-% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置，比如texlive2015中的3.0版
-%
-\defversion{3.0}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- firstinits=true, %名字有缩写，参考3.1.2.3 Internal
- }
-}
-%
-% 针对3.3<=biblatex<3.5版本的选项设置，比如texlive2016中的3.4版
-%
-\defversion{3.4}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits=true, %名字有缩写，参考3.1.2.3 Internal
- }
-}
-%
-% 针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版
-%
-\defversion{3.7}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits=true,
- urldate =edtf, %iso8601
- eventdate =edtf,
- }
-}
-%
-% 针对3.10<=biblatex版本的选项设置，比如texlive2018中的3.11版
-%
-\defversion{3.10}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits=true,
- urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，iso8601，edtf
- eventdate =gb7714-2015,
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 根据biblatex版本信息，选择选项设置
-%
-% 原理方法:如下这种选择机制能自动兼容更新的版本，但对于老版本
-% 必须要把情况列全。
-\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{opt}}{}%biblatex<=3.2
-\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{opt}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.7
-\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9
-\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.10
-\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex最新3.11
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置本地化字符串
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符
- %
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{andcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andkr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
- \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{incn}
- \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
-
-
-
- %
- % 修改一些当地化字符串
- %
- % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件
- % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn
- % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别
-
- \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
- bibliography = {\str@bibliography},
- references = {\str@references},
- bytranslator= {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译\addcomma\
- and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节
- andcn = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词
- andincitecn = {\str@andcn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andincite = {\addcomma},
- %andothers = {et al.},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andothersincite={et al\adddot},
- backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:},
- backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:},
- in={in\intitlepunct},
- volumecn={\str@volumecn},
- numbercn={\str@numbercn},
- serialcn={\str@serialcn},
- andothersjp={他},
- andotherskr={외},
- andjp={和},
- andkr={和},
- incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
- mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
- phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
- editorscn={\str@editorcn},
- editorcn={\str@editorcn},
-}
-
- %
- % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串
- % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串
- % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内
- % v1.0t，hzz，20190525
- \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}}
- \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 动态数据修改
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中
-% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性
-% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个
-% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次
-% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。
-% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符，
-% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息
-%
-% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法：
-% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名
-% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射
-% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。
-%
-% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下：
-% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换
-% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动
-% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名
-% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type
-% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换
-% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射
-%
-% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下：
-% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article
-% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook
-% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理
-% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理
-% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型
-% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型
-% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期
-% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型
-% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略，
-% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型
-% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时，
-% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。
-% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述
-% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式
-% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理：
-% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物
-% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report
-% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型
-% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。
-% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献
-% 10. 日期以如下方式处理：
-% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year
-% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate
-% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date
-% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate
-
-
-\DeclareSourcemap{
-\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
- \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除
- %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor
- }
- \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名
- %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。
- %\step[notfield=address,final]
- \step[fieldsource=location,final]
- \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步
- %\step[notfield=location,final]
- \step[fieldsource=address,final]
- \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况
- \step[fieldsource=mark,final]
- \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}]
- }
- \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{article}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- }
- \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{periodical}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor
- \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{newspaper}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{database}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{dataset}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{software}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{map}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{archive}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以
- %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]
- \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]%
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{book}
- \pertype{inbook}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}]
- \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
- \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{standard}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{patent}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{inproceedings}
- \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{proceedings}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{incollection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{collection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{report}
- \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{thesis}
- \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型
- \pertype{phdthesis}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{online}
- \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型
- \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{manual}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version
- \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{unpublished}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况
- %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。
- %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息
- \step[fieldsource=year]
- \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题
- \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%
- \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=title,final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%作者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=author,final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%译者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=translator,final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=editor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]
- }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。
- \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。
- \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断，
- %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况，
- %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd
- \step[fieldsource=language]
- \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分
- %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
- }
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
- }
-}
-}
-
-
-%
-% 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作
-%
-% 原理方法:因为biblatex3.0版的map不使用foreach选项，所以需要一个一个写，以处理特殊字符
-\defversion{3.0}{map}{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
- %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
- %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断
- \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final]
- }
- \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
- }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-% }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-% }
- \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
- \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
- %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{report}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online]
- \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{thesis}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{manual}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{unpublished}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{database}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{dataset}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{software}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{map}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{archive}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确)
- \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸
- \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization
- \step[fieldsource={title}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={journaltitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={journal}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={publisher}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={address}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={location}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={institution}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作
-%
-% 原理方法:biblatex3.4以上版本
-\defversion{3.4}{map}{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
- %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
- %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断
- \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final]
- }
- \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
- }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-% }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-% }
- \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
- \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
- %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{report}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online]
- \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{thesis}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{manual}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{unpublished}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{database}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{dataset}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{software}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{map}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{archive}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确)
- \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸
- \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,%
- address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-\iftoggle{iftlfive}%
- {\switchversion{3.0}{map}}%%当采用biblatex<=3.2版本时
- {\switchversion{3.4}{map}}%%当采用3.3<=biblatex版本时
-
-
-%
-% 不同语言分集调整的实现方式
-%
-% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序
-\def\dealsortlan{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-%
-%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置排序格式
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.7及以下版本
-%
-\defversion{3.7}{sort}{%这是3.4版的，3.7版略有差异，但不大，后面有注释
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gb7714-2015}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%[direction=descending]
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的nyt
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gbnytd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gbyntd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %升序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gbynta}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-%
-% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本
-%
-\defversion{3.8}{sort}{
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%[direction=descending]
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的nyt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %升序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{%[direction=ascending]
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-\ifboolexpr{
-test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}}
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}}
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
-}{\switchversion{3.7}{sort}}{\switchversion{3.8}{sort}}%3.8<=biblatex
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 参考文献表环境
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 列表格式
-%
-% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent
-% v1.0l，20180615，hzz
-% v1.0t,20200319,hzz,增加尺寸\biblabelextend使某些字体下标签宽度不足时可增加标签宽度
-\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}%
-\newlength{\bibitemindent}
-\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt}
-\newlength{\biblabelextend}
-\setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt}
-
-
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
- {\list
- {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printfield{labelnumber}}}
- {\addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}%
- \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}%
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}%
- \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}}
- {\endlist}
- {\item}
-
-%
-% 顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理
-%
-% 原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择
-% 左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度
-% 项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。
-% 左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变
-% 右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变
-% 项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等
-% 修改序号标签格式为:
-% \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX
-% \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{%
-\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐
- \mkgbnumlabel{#1}%
-\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐
- \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill%
-\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间
- \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil%
-\fi}
-
-%
-% 修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。
-\def\setaligngbstyle{%
-\def\blx@bibitem##1{%
- \blx@ifdata{##1}
- {\begingroup
- \blx@getdata{##1}%
- \blx@bibcheck
- \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{%
- \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}%
- \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty
- \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype
- \blx@setoptions@entry
- \blx@thelabelnumber
- \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne
- \blx@initsep
- \blx@namesep
- \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax
-% \blx@initsep %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制
-% \blx@namesep
- \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}%
- \blx@execute
- \blx@initunit
- \blx@anchor
- \blx@beglangbib
- \bibsentence
- \blx@pagetracker
- \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype
- \blx@postpunct
- \blx@endlangbib}%
- \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par
- {}}
-\newlength{\lengthid}
-\newlength{\lengthlw}
-\newcommand{\itemcmd}{%
-\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}}
-\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep}
-\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth}
-\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid}
-\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用
-%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw
-\hangindent\lengthid
-\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}%
-\hspace{\biblabelsep}}
-%
-% 简单的段落环境
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
-{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}}
-{\endgroup}
-{\itemcmd}}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置单元或块等的标点
-%=====================================================================
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin
-\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def，
-%
-% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符
-% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进
-%
-% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets
-% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def
-\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
-\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号
-%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 新增文献类型标识符的格式
-% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉
-% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上
-% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- }%
- {\ifentrytype{online}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- }}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式
-\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{}
-
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [article,patent,thesis,unpublished]
- {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [inbook,incollection,inproceedings]
- {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def
-\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily
-%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样
-\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行
-\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行
-\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行
-\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{%
- \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space
- \ifhyperref
- {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
- {\nolinkurl{#1}}}
-%
-% 标题的字母大小写格式修改
-%
-% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase
-% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not
-%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{%
-\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{%
-\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{#1}
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{russian}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线
-
-\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat
- [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished]
- {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat
- [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical]
- {title}{##1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}}
-}
-
-%
-% 文献标题后的标点问题
-% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen
-%
-% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况:
-% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于
-% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响
-% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct
-\ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iftoggle{iftlfive}}
- or
- test{\iftoggle{iftlsix}}
- }{}%
- {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}%
- \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{}
- }
-
-
-%
-% 修改译者位置格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式
-\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{\bibauthorfont%
- \ifnameundef{translator}
- {}
- {%\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}%
- \clearname{translator}%
- %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理
- %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \newunit}%
- \usebibmacro{withothers}}
-
-
-%
-% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式
-% v1.0,20160701,hzz
-% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim
-%
-% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。
-\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{\bibauthorfont%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}}
- and
- test \ifmorenames
- }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%
- {\finalandcomma}%
- {}%
-\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
-}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
-%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
-%胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
-%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
-}}
-
-
-% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothersincitecn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothersincite}%
- \fi}
-
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andotherscn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothers}%
- \fi}
-
-%
-% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-% \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}%
-%\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andincitecn}%\space%
- \or%
-\space\bibstring{andincite}\space%
- \fi}
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
- \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andcn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{and}\space%
- \fi}
-
-
-%
-% 重设title的输出
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
-% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
-\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它
- }}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
-}%
-}}
-
-%
-% 作者信息的输出格式
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式
-\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
-\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
-{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
-\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
-\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}%
-\or
- \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}}%
-\fi
- \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
-
-\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式
-\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family
-\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace}
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%
- \ifuseprefix%
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
-}
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
-\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
-}
-
-%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}
- {\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
-}
-
-
-\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}%biblatex<3.2版的情况
- {}{
- %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
- \renewbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase
- %注意上一句\MakeCapital后面如果再跟一个{}包含#1，则没有效果，可能是包在里面少了一层展开
- %因为机构名通常包括在{}内，所以要多展开一次才行，所以这里去掉#1外面的{}
- %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot
- %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot %3.9.1 Generic Commands and Hooks，对姓重新处理，如下句: %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase
- %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot
- %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面
- \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \addcomma\addspace%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%%后缀前加逗号
- }%
- }
-
- %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
- \renewbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \addcomma\addspace%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%%后缀前加逗号
- }%
- }
-
- %中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
- \renewbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamefirst{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \addcomma\addspace%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%
- }%
- }
-
- %%biblatex<3.2版的情况，姓名的处理格式带参数
- \DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
- \iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
- {\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
- \ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \or
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \or
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \ifblank{#3#5}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}%
- \or
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \or
- \usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
- \or
- \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
- {\iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \ifblank{#3#5}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
- {\iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}%
- \fi
- \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
-}
-
-%
-% url和url日期格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{%
- %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面
- \iffieldundef{urlyear}%
- {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{urldate}}%
- \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{url}}
-\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}}
-
-
-
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex<3.7版本
-%
-\defversion{3.4}{date}{
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printfield{urlyear}%
- \iffieldundef{urlmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlmonth}}%
- \iffieldundef{urlday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlday}}\printtext{]}}
-
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%新增加一个公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期
- \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printfield{year}%
- \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\printtext{\thefield{month}}%
- \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}%
- }
-
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%替换\iffieldundef{year}，因为year总是存在，但为空
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{%
- \iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{eventyear}}%
- \iffieldundef{eventmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{eventmonth}}%
- \iffieldundef{eventday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{eventday}}}}%
- }%
- }{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{endyear}}%
- \iffieldundef{endmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{endmonth}}%
- \iffieldundef{endday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{endday}}}}%
- }%
- }%
- }%
- {%
- \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{year}}%
- \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{month}}%
- \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}%
- }%
- }%
- }}%
-}
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本
-%
-\defversion{3.7}{date}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1}
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
-
- %
- % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
- % 20160701，v1.0，新增加
- % 20180405，v1.0k，为biblatexv3.7-3.9版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
- %
- % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
- %
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%
- \printtext{\blx@edtfdate{}{}}%
- }
-
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldundef{year}{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
- {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
- }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
- }{\printtext{(}\blx@edtfdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
- }%
- }}%
-}
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本
-%
-\defversion{3.10}{date}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1}
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
-
- %
- % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
- % 20160701，v1.0，新增加
- % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
- %
- % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
- % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份
- % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令
- % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%
- \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}%
- }
-
- %
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldundef{year}{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
- {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
- }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
- }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
- }%
- }}%
-}
-
-%
-% biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理
-%
-\defversion{3.8}{dblang}{
- %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了，
- %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息
- %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中
- \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{%
- \edef\entrykeya{##1}
- \edef\entrykeyb{##2}
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final]
- \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb]
- }
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 关联文献间的分隔符
-%
-\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题
-
-%
-% 关联文献的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本
-%
-% 原理方法:因为related宏中带有##了，所以无法封装到defversion中了。所以直接做判断
-% 下面这一段主要针对v3.8-3.10，因为我提问后，biblatex作者为3.11版增加了一个钩子控制relatedblock前的分隔符。
-\ifboolexpr{
-test{\iftoggle{iftleight}}
-or
-test{\iftoggle{iftlnine}}
-}{\renewbibmacro*{related}{%standard.bbx
- \ifboolexpr{ test {\iffieldundef{related}} or test {\ifrelatedloop} }
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{begrelated}%
- \def\bbx@tempa{}%
- \setcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}{0}%
- \def\do##1{%
- \entrydata{##1}{%
- \ifrelatedloop
- {}
- {\stepcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}%
- \gappto{\bbx@tempa}{##1,}}}}%
- \docsvfield{related}%
- \restorefield{related}{\bbx@tempa}%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{0}
- {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{entrykey}}%
- \iffieldundef{clonesourcekey}
- {}
- {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{clonesourcekey}}}%
- \setcounter{bbx:relatedcount}{0}%
- \def\do{%
- \stepcounter{bbx:relatedcount}%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedcount}}{0}%这里从1改为0
- {\ifcsundef{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\printtext{\relateddelim}}
- {\printtext{\csuse{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}}}}}
- {}}%
- \ifbibmacroundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro{related:default}}}
- {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro*{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}}%
- \iffieldformatundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\def\bbx@tempa{related}}
- {\def\bbx@tempa{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}%
- \iffieldformatundef{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:default}}
- {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}}}%
- \printtext[\bbx@tempa]{%
- \usebibmacro{begrelatedloop}%
- \iffieldundef{relatedstring}
- {\ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{1}}
- and
- test {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{relatedtype}s}}
- }
- {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{%
- \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}s}}}
- {\iffieldbibstring{relatedtype}
- {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{%
- \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}}}}
- {}}}
- {\iffieldbibstring{relatedstring}
- {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{%
- \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedstring}}}}
- {\printfield[\bbx@tempb]{relatedstring}}}%
- \docsvfield{related}%
- \usebibmacro{endrelatedloop}}}%
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{endrelated}}}
-}{}
-
-%
-% 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>3.11
-%
-% 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏
-\defversion{3.11}{related}{
-\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
-}
-
-\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%biblatex<=3.2
-\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}}{}%biblatex=3.7
-\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}\switchversion{3.8}{dblang}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9
-\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}\switchversion{3.8}{dblang}}{}%biblatex=3.10
-\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}\switchversion{3.8}{dblang}\switchversion{3.11}{related}}{}%biblatex最新3.11
-
-%
-% 调整doi+eprint+url格式
-% 2016.07.01 byhzz
-% 2019.05.01 byhzz 在eprint前增加一个空格
-% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。
-\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{%
-% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面
-% {\printfield{doi}}
-% {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}}
- {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}
- {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
- {}
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:doi}
- {\printfield{doi}}
- {}}
-
-%
-% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printfield{chapter}}%
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit %这里的标点去掉
-}
-
-%
-% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal
-%
-\DeclareListFormat{location}{%
- \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}%
- #1\isdot}
-\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location}
-\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location}
-
-% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间，
-% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz
-% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}
-\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}%
-}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}%
-{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}%
-}{%
-\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}%
- {\printlist{location}}%
-\addcolon\addspace%
-\iflistundef{institution}{%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}%
-{\printlist{institution}}}%
-\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}%
- \newunit}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{institution}%
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- \newunit}%
-}
-%
-% 通用的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。
-% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。
-% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理
-\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
- \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }%
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}%
- {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress}
- {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace%
- \iflistundef{publisher}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}%
- {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}%
- {\printlist{publisher}}}%
-\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace%
-\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点
-}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{publisher}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{publisher}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
-\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。
-{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
- \iflistundef{institution}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- %\newunit
- }}
-
-%
-% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}%
-{\bibstring{volume}~#1}%
-}% volume of a book
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
-
-%
-% 对number册信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,%
-incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}%
-{#1}%
-}%
-
-%
-% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
-{#1\isdot}}%
-{\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}%
-{#1\isdot}}}
-
-%
-% 对version的版本信息做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
-{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}%
-{#1\isdot}}
-
-%
-% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}}
- and
- test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}}
- }
- {}
- {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
- \newunit%标点换成下一句
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}%
- \printfield{booktitleaddon}}
-
-
-%
-% 调整期刊名的格式
-%
-% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{journal}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
- %换成逗号和空格
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
- %\newunit
- }
-
-
-
-%
-% 调整期刊卷和期的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- \setunit*{\adddot}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
- %\printfield{number}%
- \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号
- \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}}}
-
-%
-% 调整期刊年份的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}%
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%
-% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx
- %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-
-%
-% 编者的符号修改一下
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseeditor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
- }
- {\printnames{editor}%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况
- {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点
- {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}%
- %\clearname{editor}
- }%
- {}}
-
-%
-% 编者类型做一修改
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \printtext[editortype]{%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}
- {%
-% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理
-% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
-% or
-% test {\ifandothers{editor}}
-% }
-% {\bibstring{editors}}
-% {\bibstring{editor}}
- }
- {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
- {\ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
- or
- test {\ifandothers{editor}}
- }
- {\printdelim{streditortypes}}
- {\printdelim{streditortype}}}
- {\thefield{editortype}}}%
- }}
-
-%
-% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
-% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
-% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
- \fi}
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
- \fi}
-
-
-%
-% bookauthor域的输出，
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
-% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
-\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
- {\ifnameundef{editor}%
- {}%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
- {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
- }%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
- {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改期刊的标题
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \iffieldundef{title}
- {}
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- %}%把编组结束移到后面去
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母
- \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{}
- }}
- }
-
-%
-% 期刊的标题做修改
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{periodical}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字
- \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}%
- {\printfield{year}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolfirst}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{%
- \printfield{endyear}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolsecond}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}%
- \setunit{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \newunit}
-
-%
-% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份
-%
-\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{%
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- {\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- }%
- %\newunit
-}
-
-%
-% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去
-%
-\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and%
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
- }%
-}%
-}
-
-
-
-%
-% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
-% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
-% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
-\renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
- {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
- \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
- }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
-
-%
-% 修改type域的输出格式
-% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
-% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
-\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
-{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}%
- {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改series域的输出格式
-% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz
-\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
- \printfield{series}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%=====================================================================
-%设置驱动格式
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% book条目类的驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\newunit
-\printlist{language}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
-\newunit\newblock}%
-\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-\newunit
-\printfield{edition}%
-\newunit\newblock%%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\iffieldundef{maintitle}%
-{\printfield{volume}%
-\printfield{part}}%
-{}%
-\newunit%
-\printfield{volumes}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-%\printfield{note}%
-%\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
-%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉
-\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
-\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。
- \newunit\newblock%
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物
- \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
- %\newunit
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit
- \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 连续出版物的驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{editor}%
- %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock
- \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行
- \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间
- \newunit\newblock%添加这一行
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock}
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 专利文献驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- %\usebibmacro{title}%
- \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理
- \iflistundef{location}
- {}
- {\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printtext{%[parens]
- \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byholder}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{newsdate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 在线文献驱动
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\printlist{organization}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \newunit\newblock
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
-}{\usebibmacro{date}}%
-{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 报告类型驱动
-% 当有网址无出版项时，用online输出
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 论文、手册类型驱动
-% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}{}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 备选类型驱动
-%
-% 利用biblatex的misc驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{howpublished}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{title}%
-\usebibmacro{in:}%
-%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
- \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
- }{\newunit}%替换下一句
- %\newunit\newblock
-\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加
- \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
-\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}%
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息
- \newunit\newblock%
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-% \iffieldundef{maintitle}
-% {\printfield{volume}%
-% \printfield{part}}
-% {}%
-% \newunit
-% \printfield{volumes}%
-% \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{series+number}
- }%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\printfield{note}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,numerical sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% + +% +% 版本和时间信息 +% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style] +%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求 + +%===================================================================== +% 加载标准样式 +%===================================================================== +\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp} +\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题 + + +%===================================================================== +% 功能函数 +%===================================================================== + % + % biblatex版本判断 + % 20180405，v1.0k，为兼容biblatexv3.11增加toggle:iftlnine，HU zhenzhen + % 20181020，v1.0n，为不再使用xstring宏包做的修改，hzz + % + % 原理方法:当版本继续更新时，增加一个新的toggle用以处理新的旧版，最新版和未判断出来的版本永远用iftlatest + \providetoggle{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlfive} %处理biblatex3.2之前版本，时间2016-03-01前 + \providetoggle{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlsix} %处理biblatex3.3开始改变姓名机制后版本，时间2016-03-01及以后 + \providetoggle{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlseven}%处理biblatex3.7的兼容性，时间2016-12-01后 + \providetoggle{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftleight}%处理biblatex3.8到3.9的兼容性，时间2017-11-01后到2017-12-01前 + \providetoggle{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlnine} %处理biblatex10的兼容性，时间2017-12-01后 + \providetoggle{iftlatest}\toggletrue{iftlatest} %假设是最新版biblatex + + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2014/04/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/12/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/11/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2018/02/19}{} + {\toggletrue{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\PackageError{biblatex}{Outdated 'biblatex' package} + {Please update biblatex, This is a fatal error.}} + + \newcommand\defversion[2]{\csdef{codeversion#1#2}}%定义不同版本的命令 + \newcommand\switchversion[2]{\csuse{codeversion#1#2}}%使用不同版本的命令 + + % + % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成 + % v1.0k,20180509,hzz + % + % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏 + % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8 + % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。 + % + % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中， + % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断 + \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt} + \def\testCJKfirst#1{% + \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{% + \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}} + + % + % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号 + \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}% + {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}% + } + + + % + % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}% + {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}% + } + + % 对没有分隔符环境命令的低版本biblatex做增补，避免报错 + % + \iftoggle{iftlfive}{ + + \def\blx@inf@delimdeclare#1#2{% + \blx@info{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' already defined, overwriting}} + + \def\blx@warn@delimuse#1#2{% + \blx@warning{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' undefined}} + % Delimiter interface + + % [<contextname, ...>]{<name, ...>}{<code>} + \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimFormat}{% + \@ifstar + {\blx@declaredelimclear} + {\blx@declaredelim}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimclear}[3][]{% + \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2} + {} + {\def\do##1{\csundef{blx@printdelim@##1@#2}}% + \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}% + \cslet{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}\@empty + \ifblank{#1} + {\blx@declaredelim{#2}{#3}} + {\blx@declaredelim[#1]{#2}{#3}}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelim}[3][]{% + \ifblank{#1} + {\blx@declaredelim@i{}{}{#2}{#3}} + {\def\do##1{% + \listcsadd{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}{##1}% + \blx@declaredelim@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{##1}{#2}{#3}}% + \docsvlist{#1}}}% + + \def\blx@declaredelim@i#1#2#3#4{% + \def\do@i##1{% + \ifcsdef{#1##1} + {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{##1}{#2}} + {}% + \csdef{#1##1}{#4}}% + \forcsvlist{\do@i}{#3}} + + % *[<contextname, ...>]{<alias>}{<delim>} + \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimAlias}{% + \@ifstar + {\blx@declaredelimalias} + {\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimalias}[3][]{% + \ifblank{#1} + {\blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#2}{#3}} + {\def\do##1{% + \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#2}{#3}}% + \docsvlist{#1}}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}[2]{% + \blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#1}{#2}% + \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2} + {} + {\def\do##1{% + \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#1}{#2}}% + \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}} + + \def\blx@declaredelimalias@i#1#2#3{% + \ifcsdef{#1#2} + {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{#2}{#1}} + {}% + \csdef{#1#2}{\csuse{#1#3}}} + + \def\blx@delimcontext{none} + \newcommand*{\printdelim}[2][]{% + \ifblank{#1} + {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2} + {\csuse{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2}} + {\ifcsdef{#2}% fall back on legacy macros + {\csuse{#2}} + {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{*}}}} + {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@#1@#2} + {\csuse{blx@printdelim@#1@#2}} + {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{#1}}}} + + \newcommand*{\delimcontext}[1]{% + \edef\blx@delimcontext{\blx@delimcontextalias{#1}}} + + \def\blx@delimcontextalias#1{% + \ifcsdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1} + {\csuse{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}} + {#1}} + + \newcommand*{\DeclareDelimcontextAlias}[2]{% + \csgdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}{#2}} + }{} + + +%===================================================================== +% 数据模型定义 +%===================================================================== + %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。 + %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名 + %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域 + %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域 + %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域 + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder} + + %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型 + %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时 + %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式 + %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。 + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14 + \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}% + }{} + + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置宏包选项 +%===================================================================== + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出恢复传统crossref作用的选项 + % 20210216,v1.0w,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:citexref} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{citexref}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:citexref}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citexref} + + \newbibmacro*{citexref}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}% + \ifbool{bbx:subentry} + {\printfield{entrysetcount}} + {}}} + + \DeclareCiteCommand{\bbx@xrefcite}[\mkbibbrackets]% + {\boolfalse{citetracker}% + \boolfalse{pagetracker}% + \boolfalse{backtracker}} + {\usebibmacro{citexref}} + {} + {} + + \newbibmacro*{crosscite}[1]{% + \iftoggle{bbx:citexref} + {\iffieldundef{crossref} + {\iffieldundef{xref} + {\usebibmacro{#1}} + {\printtext{\bbx@xrefcite{\thefield{xref}}}}} + {\printtext{\bbx@xrefcite{\thefield{crossref}}}}} + {\usebibmacro{#1}}} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项 + % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息 + % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote} + % + %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏 + %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式 + \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{% + \printtext{\addspace(#1)}% + } + \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}% + {\iffieldundef{annotation}% + {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}% + {\printfield{annotation}}}% + {}% + } + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项 + % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项 + % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage} + + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表 + % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz + % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签 + % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式 + % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib} + + %% + \newlength{\footbibmargin} + \newlength{\footbiblabelsep} + \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离 + \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距 + \def\execgbfootbib% + {% + %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令 + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true} + % + %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐 + \AtEndPreamble{ + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{ + %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。 + %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接 + %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。 + %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}% + %\RequirePackage{footmisc}% + + %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码 + %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改 + %v1.0q 20190317 hzz + %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}% + {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器 + +\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + } + + \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔 + \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1} + + } + + % + %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式 + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}} + %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标 + \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{% + \def\@makefnmark{% + \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}% + }% + }{}{} + } + + % + %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容) + %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。 + %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况 + \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{% + \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true + {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息 + {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}% + \@makefnmark% + }}% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + }}% + }% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断 + }}% + } + + % + %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求 + \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]% + {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器 + \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{postnote}}}%与ay样式不同，由于已修改postnote域格式，直接用printfield + }% + {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}% + \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}% + {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%\nopunct + {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}% + }% + {\multicitedelim}% + {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + + } + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式 + % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz + % 原理方法: + % 只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + } + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项 + % + % 原理方法: + % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的 + % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype} + %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype} + + % + % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档 + % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def + % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用 + % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。 + % 另外注意： + % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码 + % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常 + % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。 + \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk} + + \def\str@bibliography{参考文献} + \def\str@references{参考文献} + \def\str@bytranslator{译} + \def\str@andotherscn{等} + \def\str@andcn{和} + \def\str@backrefpage{引用页} + \def\str@backrefpages{引用页} + \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详} + \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详} + \def\str@edition{版} + \def\str@volumecn{卷} + \def\str@numbercn{册} + \def\str@serialcn{第} + \def\str@sameentry{同} + \def\str@incn{见} + \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文} + \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文} + \def\str@editorcn{主编} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK} + \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def} + }{}} + + % + % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息 + % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式 + % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict} + + % + % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。 + % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接 + \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink} + + % + % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项 + % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置 + \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{% + \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{% + \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}% + \abx@dostrings + \csuse{abx@strings@#1}% + \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}% + \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i + \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}% + } + }{}} + + % + % 增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项 + % + % 原理方法:在顺序编码制中不需要使用,为与作者年制的兼容性考虑,这里也增加避免报错 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{}% + + + % + % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域 + % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd} + + % + % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。 + % + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{% + %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句 + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub} + + % + % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin} + + + + + + % + % 选项设置 + % + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + sorting=none, + useprefix=true, %名字的信息包括前缀 + date = year, %日期仅写到年 + maxbibnames = 3,%设置名字最大数量 + minbibnames = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量 + maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量 + minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量 + isbn=false, + } + + % + %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015 + % + \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@metadateinfo{#1}% + \iffieldundef{#1year} + {} + {\printtext[#1date]{% + \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}% + \endgroup} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{% + \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}% + \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}} + + + %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器 + \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase} + \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase} + %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}} + %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbalignlabel} + \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel} + %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase} + \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase} + \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase} + \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase} + +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27} + { % 针对biblatex>=3.3版本的选项设置 + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项 + % numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项 + % gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru + % gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr + % gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序 + {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}% + \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}% + {% + \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}% + {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}% + {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}% + }% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder} + + \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序 + \gdef\lancnorder{4} + \gdef\lanjporder{5} + \gdef\lankrorder{6} + \gdef\lanenorder{1} + \gdef\lanfrorder{2} + \gdef\lanruorder{3}} + + \newcounter{lanordernum} + \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr + \setcounter{lanordernum}{0} + \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;} + \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}} + \parsinglanorder{#1} + } + + % + % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项 + % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串 + % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串 + % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串 + % v1.0o，20190103，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal} + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal} + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}% + } + %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置 + + % + % 增加序号标签格式处理选项 + % v1.0l，20180623，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{% + \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1} + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel} + + % + % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项 + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given + \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{quanpin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{6}}{}%family-given + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt} + + % + % 增加标签对齐选项 + % + % right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式 + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{} + } + } + {% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置 + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项 + % numeric样式， biblatex 3.4及以下版本不能使用多个stylesourcemap，所以不使用该选项 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{} + + % + % 增加序号标签格式处理选项 + % v1.0l，20180623，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{% + \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1} + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel} + + % + % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项 + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given + \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{quanpin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{6}}{}%family-given + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt} + + % + % 增加标签对齐选项 + % + % 原理方法:right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015无效，仍然为右对齐模式， + % 因为在这种biblatex低版本中，舍弃了list类环境后，会出错。 + % 注意:texlive2015中的3.0版中的DeclareBibliographyOption选项没有类型说明 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbalign}[right]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{}{} + } + } + + +% +% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置，比如texlive2015中的3.0版 +% +\defversion{3.0}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + firstinits=true, %名字有缩写，参考3.1.2.3 Internal + } +} +% +% 针对3.3<=biblatex<3.5版本的选项设置，比如texlive2016中的3.4版 +% +\defversion{3.4}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits=true, %名字有缩写，参考3.1.2.3 Internal + } +} +% +% 针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版 +% +\defversion{3.7}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits=true, + urldate =edtf, %iso8601 + eventdate =edtf, + } +} +% +% 针对3.10<=biblatex版本的选项设置，比如texlive2018中的3.11版 +% +\defversion{3.10}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits=true, + urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，iso8601，edtf + eventdate =gb7714-2015, + } +} + +% +% 根据biblatex版本信息，选择选项设置 +% +% 原理方法:如下这种选择机制能自动兼容更新的版本，但对于老版本 +% 必须要把情况列全。 +\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{opt}}{}%biblatex<=3.2 +\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{opt}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.7 +\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9 +\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.10 +\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex最新3.11 + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置本地化字符串 +%===================================================================== + % + % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符 + % + \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite} + \NewBibliographyString{andcn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr} + \NewBibliographyString{andjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andkr} + \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andincite} + \NewBibliographyString{volumecn} + \NewBibliographyString{numbercn} + \NewBibliographyString{serialcn} + \NewBibliographyString{incn} + \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorcn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorscn} + \NewBibliographyString{bytranslatorcn} + + + + % + % 修改一些当地化字符串 + % + % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件 + % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn + % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别 + + \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{ + bibliography = {\str@bibliography}, + references = {\str@references}, + bytranslatorcn = {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译\addcomma\ + and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节 + andcn = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词 + andincitecn = {\str@andcn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andincite = {\addcomma}, + %andothers = {et al.},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andothersincite={et al\adddot}, + backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:}, + backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:}, + in={in\intitlepunct}, + volumecn={\str@volumecn}, + numbercn={\str@numbercn}, + serialcn={\str@serialcn}, + andothersjp={他}, + andotherskr={외}, + andjp={和}, + andkr={和}, + incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace}, + mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn}, + phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn}, + editorscn={\str@editorcn}, + editorcn={\str@editorcn}, +} + + % + % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串 + % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串 + % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内 + % v1.0t，hzz，20190525 + \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}} + \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}} + +%===================================================================== +% 动态数据修改 +%===================================================================== +% +% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中 +% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性 +% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个 +% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次 +% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。 +% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符， +% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息 +% +% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法： +% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名 +% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射 +% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。 +% +% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下： +% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换 +% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动 +% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名 +% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type +% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换 +% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射 +% +% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下： +% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article +% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook +% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理 +% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理 +% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型 +% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型 +% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期 +% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型 +% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略， +% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型 +% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时， +% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。 +% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述 +% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式 +% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理： +% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物 +% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report +% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型 +% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。 +% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献 +% 10. 日期以如下方式处理： +% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year +% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate +% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date +% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate + + +\DeclareSourcemap{ +\maps[datatype=bibtex]{% + \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author + \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除 + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除 + %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有 + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author + \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor + } + \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author + \pernottype{inbook} + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author + \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator + } + \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名 + %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。 + %\step[notfield=address,final] + \step[fieldsource=location,final] + \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval] + } + \map{%让address和location同步 + %\step[notfield=location,final] + \step[fieldsource=address,final] + \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况 + \step[fieldsource=mark,final] + \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=quanpin,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={6}] + } + \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{article} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + } + \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{periodical} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor + \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{newspaper} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断 + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{database} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{dataset} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{software} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{map} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{archive} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以 + %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldsource=url,final] + \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]% + } + \map{ + \pertype{book} + \pertype{inbook} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}] + \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition + \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval] + } + \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{standard} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断 + } + \map{ + \pertype{patent} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}] + } + \map{ + \pertype{inproceedings} + \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{proceedings} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{incollection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{collection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{report} + \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{thesis} + \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型 + \pertype{phdthesis} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{online} + \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型 + \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册 + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{manual} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version + \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{unpublished} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}] + } + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况 + %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。 + %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息 + \step[fieldsource=year] + \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval] + } + \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用 + \step[fieldsource=entrykey] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题 + \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]% + \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=title,final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%作者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=author,final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%译者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=translator,final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=editor,final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定 + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval] + }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。 + \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。 + \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断， + %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况， + %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd + \step[fieldsource=language] + \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval] + } + \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分 + %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder] + } + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder] + } +} +} + + +% +% 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作 +% +% 原理方法:因为biblatex3.0版的map不使用foreach选项，所以需要一个一个写，以处理特殊字符 +\defversion{3.0}{map}{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook， + %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义 + %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断 + \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final] + } + \map{%剩下的全部映射为book + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final] + } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis] +% } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis] +% } + \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 + \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final] + %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport] + } + \map{% + \pertype{report} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online] + \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}] + } + \map{% + \pertype{thesis} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{manual} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{unpublished} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{database} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{dataset} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{software} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{map} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{archive} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online] + } + \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确) + \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸 + \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append] + } + \map[overwrite]{%title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization + \step[fieldsource={title}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={journaltitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={journal}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={publisher}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={address}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={location}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={institution}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}] + } + } + } +} + +% +% 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作 +% +% 原理方法:biblatex3.4以上版本 +\defversion{3.4}{map}{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook， + %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义 + %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断 + \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final] + } + \map{%剩下的全部映射为book + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final] + } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis] +% } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis] +% } + \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 + \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final] + %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport] + } + \map{% + \pertype{report} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online] + \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}] + } + \map{% + \pertype{thesis} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{manual} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{unpublished} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{database} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{dataset} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{software} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{map} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{archive} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online] + } + \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确) + \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸 + \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,% + address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + } + } +} + +\iftoggle{iftlfive}% + {\switchversion{3.0}{map}}%%当采用biblatex<=3.2版本时 + {\switchversion{3.4}{map}}%%当采用3.3<=biblatex版本时 + + +% +% 不同语言分集调整的实现方式 +% +% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序 +\def\dealsortlan{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder] + } + } + } +} + +% +%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射 +% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual} + +%===================================================================== +% 设置排序格式 +%===================================================================== +% +% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.7及以下版本 +% +\defversion{3.7}{sort}{%这是3.4版的，3.7版略有差异，但不大，后面有注释 + \DeclareSortingScheme{gb7714-2015}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{%[direction=descending] + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的nyt + \DeclareSortingScheme{gbnytd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的ynt + \DeclareSortingScheme{gbyntd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } + + %升序的ynt + \DeclareSortingScheme{gbynta}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } +} + + +% +% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本 +% +\defversion{3.8}{sort}{ + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{%[direction=descending] + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的nyt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort[direction=descending]{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的ynt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %升序的ynt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{%[direction=ascending] + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } +} + + +\ifboolexpr{ +test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}} +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}} +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7 +}{\switchversion{3.7}{sort}}{\switchversion{3.8}{sort}}%3.8<=biblatex + +%===================================================================== +% 参考文献表环境 +%===================================================================== +% +% 列表格式 +% +% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent +% v1.0l，20180615，hzz +% v1.0t,20200319,hzz,增加尺寸\biblabelextend使某些字体下标签宽度不足时可增加标签宽度 +\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}% +\newlength{\bibitemindent} +\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt} +\newlength{\biblabelextend} +\setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt} + + +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}}} + {\addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}% + \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +% +% 顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理 +% +% 原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择 +% 左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度 +% 项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。 +% 左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变 +% 右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变 +% 项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等 +% 修改序号标签格式为: +% \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX +% \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill} +\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{% +\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐 + \mkgbnumlabel{#1}% +\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐 + \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill% +\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间 + \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil% +\fi} + +% +% 修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。 +\def\setaligngbstyle{% +\def\blx@bibitem##1{% + \blx@ifdata{##1} + {\begingroup + \blx@getdata{##1}% + \blx@bibcheck + \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{% + \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}% + \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty + \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype + \blx@setoptions@entry + \blx@thelabelnumber + \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne + \blx@initsep + \blx@namesep + \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax +% \blx@initsep %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制 +% \blx@namesep + \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}% + \blx@execute + \blx@initunit + \blx@anchor + \blx@beglangbib + \bibsentence + \blx@pagetracker + \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype + \blx@postpunct + \blx@endlangbib}% + \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par + {}} +\newlength{\lengthid} +\newlength{\lengthlw} +\newcommand{\itemcmd}{% +\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}} +\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep} +\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth} +\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid} +\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用 +%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw +\hangindent\lengthid +\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}% +\hspace{\biblabelsep}} +% +% 简单的段落环境 +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} +{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}} +{\endgroup} +{\itemcmd}} + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置单元或块等的标点 +%===================================================================== +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin +\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def， +% +% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符 +% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进 +% +% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets +% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def +\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak} +\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号 +%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par + +%===================================================================== +% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏 +%===================================================================== +% +% 新增文献类型标识符的格式 +% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉 +% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上 +% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + }% + {\ifentrytype{online}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + }}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}% +} + +% +% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式 +\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{} +\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{} +\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{} + +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪 +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [article,patent,thesis,unpublished] + {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{#1\isdot} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [inbook,incollection,inproceedings] + {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def +\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily +%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样 +\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行 +\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行 +\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行 +\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{% + \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space + \ifhyperref + {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}} + {\nolinkurl{#1}}} +% +% 标题的字母大小写格式修改 +% +% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase +% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not +%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{% +\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{% +\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{#1} +\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线 +\DefineBibliographyExtras{russian}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线 + +\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置 +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat + [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished] + {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat + [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical] + {title}{##1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}} +} + +% +% 文献标题后的标点问题 +% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen +% +% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况: +% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于 +% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响 +% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct +\ifboolexpr{% + test{\iftoggle{iftlfive}} + or + test{\iftoggle{iftlsix}} + }{}% + {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本 + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}% + \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{} + } + + +% +% 修改译者位置格式 +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,增加对英文等其它语言译者的处理 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式 +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifnameundef{translator} + {} + {\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}} + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}% + \clearname{translator}% + %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理 + %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串 + \iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}}{}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。 + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \newunit}% + \usebibmacro{withothers}} + +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}{% + \def\abx@tempa{bytranslator}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{co}% + \clearname{commentator}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{an}% + \clearname{annotator}} + {}}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction} + {\appto\abx@tempa{in}% + \clearname{introduction}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}% + \clearname{foreword}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{af}% + \clearname{afterword}} + {}}}% +\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\bibstring{bytranslatorcn}} + {\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}} + + +% +% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式 +% v1.0,20160701,hzz +% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,针对其它语言的译者后的标点与中文不同做处理 +% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。 +% \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames +\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}} + and + test \ifmorenames + }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma + {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。 + {}% +\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}% +}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如： +%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等. +%胡泳, 范海燕, 译. +%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译. +\ifcurrentname{translator}{\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理 +}} + + + +% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al. +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效 + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义 + \or% + \bibstring{andothersincitecn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothersincite}% + \fi} + + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{andotherscn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothers}% + \fi} + +% +% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% +% \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}% +%\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andincitecn}%\space% + \or% +\space\bibstring{andincite}\space% + \fi} + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% + \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andcn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{and}\space% + \fi} + + +% +% 重设title的输出 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件 +% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断 +\renewbibmacro*{title}{% + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令 + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它 + }}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit +}% +}} + +% +% 作者信息的输出格式 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式 +\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{% +\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}% +{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}% +\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}% + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or +\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}% +\or + \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven} + and + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}}% +\or +\usebibmacro{name:gbquanpin} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}% +\fi + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}} + +\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式 +\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family +\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace} +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}% + \ifuseprefix% + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital% + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}% + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号 +} + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出 +\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号 +} + +%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {} + {\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} +%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbquanpin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {} + {\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} + + +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}%biblatex<3.2版的情况 + {}{ + %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + %注意上一句\MakeCapital后面如果再跟一个{}包含#1，则没有效果，可能是包在里面少了一层展开 + %因为机构名通常包括在{}内，所以要多展开一次才行，所以这里去掉#1外面的{} + %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot + %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面 + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot %3.9.1 Generic Commands and Hooks，对姓重新处理，如下句: %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot + %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面 + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%%后缀前加逗号 + }% + } + + %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%%后缀前加逗号 + }% + } + + %中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamefirst{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}% + }% + } + %中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gbquanpin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamefirst{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}% + }% + } + + %%biblatex<3.2版的情况，姓名的处理格式带参数 + \DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{% + \iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}% + {\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}% + \ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}% + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \or + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \or + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \ifblank{#3#5} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}% + \or + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \or + \usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}% + \or + \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} + {\iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \ifblank{#3#5} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}} + {\iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}% + \or + \usebibmacro{name:gbquanpin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}% + \fi + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}} +} + +% +% url和url日期格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{% + %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面 + \iffieldundef{urlyear}% + {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{urldate}}% + \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{url}} +\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}} + + + + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex<3.7版本 +% +\defversion{3.4}{date}{ + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printfield{urlyear}% + \iffieldundef{urlmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlmonth}}% + \iffieldundef{urlday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlday}}\printtext{]}} + + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%新增加一个公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期 + \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printfield{year}% + \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\printtext{\thefield{month}}% + \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}% + } + + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%替换\iffieldundef{year}，因为year总是存在，但为空 + \iffieldundef{endyear}{% + \iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{eventyear}}% + \iffieldundef{eventmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{eventmonth}}% + \iffieldundef{eventday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{eventday}}}}% + }% + }{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{endyear}}% + \iffieldundef{endmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{endmonth}}% + \iffieldundef{endday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{endday}}}}% + }% + }% + }% + {% + \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{year}}% + \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{month}}% + \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}% + }% + }% + }}% +} + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本 +% +\defversion{3.7}{date}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1} + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令 + + % + % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏 + % 20160701，v1.0，新增加 + % 20180405，v1.0k，为biblatexv3.7-3.9版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen + % + % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制 + % + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{% + \printtext{\blx@edtfdate{}{}}% + } + + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldundef{year}{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}% + {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}% + }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空 + }{\printtext{(}\blx@edtfdate{}{}\printtext{)}}% + }% + }}% +} + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本 +% +\defversion{3.10}{date}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1} + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令 + + % + % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏 + % 20160701，v1.0，新增加 + % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen + % + % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制 + % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份 + % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令 + % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断 + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%% + \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}% + } + + % + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldundef{year}{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}% + {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}% + }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空 + }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}% + }% + }}% +} + +% +% biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理 +% +\defversion{3.8}{dblang}{ + %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了， + %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息 + %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中 + \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{% + \edef\entrykeya{##1} + \edef\entrykeyb{##2} + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final] + \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb] + } + } + } + } +} + +% +% 关联文献间的分隔符 +% +\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题 + +% +% 关联文献的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本 +% +% 原理方法:因为related宏中带有##了，所以无法封装到defversion中了。所以直接做判断 +% 下面这一段主要针对v3.8-3.10，因为我提问后，biblatex作者为3.11版增加了一个钩子控制relatedblock前的分隔符。 +\ifboolexpr{ +test{\iftoggle{iftleight}} +or +test{\iftoggle{iftlnine}} +}{\renewbibmacro*{related}{%standard.bbx + \ifboolexpr{ test {\iffieldundef{related}} or test {\ifrelatedloop} } + {} + {\usebibmacro{begrelated}% + \def\bbx@tempa{}% + \setcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}{0}% + \def\do##1{% + \entrydata{##1}{% + \ifrelatedloop + {} + {\stepcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}% + \gappto{\bbx@tempa}{##1,}}}}% + \docsvfield{related}% + \restorefield{related}{\bbx@tempa}% + \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{0} + {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{entrykey}}% + \iffieldundef{clonesourcekey} + {} + {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{clonesourcekey}}}% + \setcounter{bbx:relatedcount}{0}% + \def\do{% + \stepcounter{bbx:relatedcount}% + \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedcount}}{0}%这里从1改为0 + {\ifcsundef{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\printtext{\relateddelim}} + {\printtext{\csuse{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}}}}} + {}}% + \ifbibmacroundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro{related:default}}} + {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro*{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}}% + \iffieldformatundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\def\bbx@tempa{related}} + {\def\bbx@tempa{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}% + \iffieldformatundef{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:default}} + {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}}}% + \printtext[\bbx@tempa]{% + \usebibmacro{begrelatedloop}% + \iffieldundef{relatedstring} + {\ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{1}} + and + test {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{relatedtype}s}} + } + {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{% + \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}s}}} + {\iffieldbibstring{relatedtype} + {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{% + \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}}}} + {}}} + {\iffieldbibstring{relatedstring} + {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{% + \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedstring}}}} + {\printfield[\bbx@tempb]{relatedstring}}}% + \docsvfield{related}% + \usebibmacro{endrelatedloop}}}% + {}% + \usebibmacro{endrelated}}} +}{} + +% +% 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>3.11 +% +% 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏 +\defversion{3.11}{related}{ +\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak} +} + +\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%biblatex<=3.2 +\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}}{}%biblatex=3.7 +\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}\switchversion{3.8}{dblang}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9 +\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}\switchversion{3.8}{dblang}}{}%biblatex=3.10 +\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}\switchversion{3.8}{dblang}\switchversion{3.11}{related}}{}%biblatex最新3.11 + +% +% 调整doi+eprint+url格式 +% 2016.07.01 byhzz +% 2019.05.01 byhzz 在eprint前增加一个空格 +% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。 +\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{% +% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面 +% {\printfield{doi}} +% {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}} + {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:url} + {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}} + {} + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:doi} + {\printfield{doi}} + {}} + +% +% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printfield{chapter}}% + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出 + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit %这里的标点去掉 +} + +% +% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal +% +\DeclareListFormat{location}{% + \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}% + #1\isdot} +\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location} +\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location} + +% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间， +% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz +% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date} +\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifboolexpr{% +test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}% +}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}% +{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}% +}{% +\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}% + {\printlist{location}}% +\addcolon\addspace% +\iflistundef{institution}{% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}% +{\printlist{institution}}}% +\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}% + \printfield{year}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}% + \newunit}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{institution}% + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit}% +} +% +% 通用的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。 +% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。 +% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理 +\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% + \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }% + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}% + {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。 + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress} + {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace% + \iflistundef{publisher}{% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}% + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}% + {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}% + {\printlist{publisher}}}% +\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace% +\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点 +}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{publisher} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{publisher}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit + }% +} + +% +% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz +% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 +\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。 +{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 + \iflistundef{institution} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + %\newunit + }} + +% +% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}% +{\bibstring{volume}~#1}% +}% volume of a book +\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal + +% +% 对number册信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,% +incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}% +{#1}% +}% + +% +% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\ifinteger{#1}% +{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}% +{#1\isdot}}% +{\ifinteger{#1}% +{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}% +{#1\isdot}}} + +% +% 对version的版本信息做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifinteger{#1}% +{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}% +{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}% +{#1\isdot}} + +% +% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号 +% +\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}} + and + test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}} + } + {} + {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}% + \newunit%标点换成下一句 + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}% + \printfield{booktitleaddon}} + + +% +% 调整期刊名的格式 +% +% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz +\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{journal}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号 + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}% + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + %换成逗号和空格 + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面 + %\newunit + } + + + +% +% 调整期刊卷和期的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx +\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{% + \printfield{volume}% + \setunit*{\adddot}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}{% + \printfield{volume}% + %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号 + %\printfield{number}% + \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号 + \iffieldundef{eid}{}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}}} + +% +% 调整期刊年份的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号 + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}% + {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}}% + %\newunit + } + +% +% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx + %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{ + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit + } + + +% +% 编者的符号修改一下 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\printnames{editor}% + \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况 + {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点 + {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}% + %\clearname{editor} + }% + {}} + +% +% 编者类型做一修改 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \printtext[editortype]{% + \iffieldundef{editortype} + {% +% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理 +% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} +% or +% test {\ifandothers{editor}} +% } +% {\bibstring{editors}} +% {\bibstring{editor}} + } + {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改 + {\ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} + or + test {\ifandothers{editor}} + } + {\printdelim{streditortypes}} + {\printdelim{streditortype}}} + {\thefield{editortype}}}% + }} + +% +% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符 +% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等 +% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串 +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}% + \fi} +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}% + \fi} + + +% +% bookauthor域的输出， +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替， +% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype +\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}% + {\ifnameundef{editor}% + {}% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}% + {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}% + }% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}% + {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}% + }% +} + +% +% 修改期刊的标题 +% +\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \iffieldundef{title} + {} + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct} + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + %}%把编组结束移到后面去 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母 + \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{} + }} + } + +% +% 期刊的标题做修改 +% +\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{periodical}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点 + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改 +\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字 + \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}% + \iffieldundef{volume}% + {\printfield{year}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}% + \printfield{year}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolfirst}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{% + \printfield{endyear}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolsecond}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit} + +% +% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份 +% +\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{% + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + {\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + }% + %\newunit +} + +% +% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去 +% +\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and% + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit + }% +}% +} + + + +% +% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型 +% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz +% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz +% +% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。 +\renewbibmacro*{in:}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace + {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}% + \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}% + }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct + +% +% 修改type域的输出格式 +% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz +% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文 +\DeclareFieldFormat{type}% +{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}% + {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}% +} + +% +% 修改series域的输出格式 +% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz +\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{% + \printfield{series}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}% + %\newunit + } + +%===================================================================== +%设置驱动格式 +%===================================================================== +% +% book条目类的驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件 + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% +\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\newunit +\printlist{language}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{byauthor}% +\newunit\newblock}% +\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +\newunit +\printfield{edition}% +\newunit\newblock%% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\iffieldundef{maintitle}% +{\printfield{volume}% +\printfield{part}}% +{}% +\newunit% +\printfield{volumes}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{series+number}}% +\newunit\newblock% +%\printfield{note}% +%\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% +%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉 +\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， +\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。 + \newunit\newblock% + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物 + \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}% + %\newunit +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit + \usebibmacro{note+pages}% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期 + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + + +% +% 连续出版物的驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{editor}% + %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock + \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行 + \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}% + \newunit\newblock% + \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间 + \newunit\newblock%添加这一行 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock} + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 专利文献驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + %\usebibmacro{title}% + \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理 + \iflistundef{location} + {} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext{%[parens] + \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byholder}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{newsdate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 在线文献驱动 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit\newblock + %\printlist{organization}% + \printlist{institution}% + \newunit\newblock +\ifboolexpr{% +test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% +}{\usebibmacro{date}}% +{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\usebibmacro{eprint}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 报告类型驱动 +% 当有网址无出版项时，用online输出 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 论文、手册类型驱动 +% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{% + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}{}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 备选类型驱动 +% +% 利用biblatex的misc驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 增加inbook:parent用于辅助crossref传统功能的实现 +% 用在{crosscite}宏中 +% 20210216,v1.0w,hzz +\newbibmacro*{inbook:parent}{% +\usebibmacro{bybookauthor}% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}% + }{\newunit}%替换下一句 + %\newunit\newblock +\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加 + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% +\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}% +\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息 + \newunit\newblock% +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit\newblock + \printfield{edition}% + \newunit + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +% \iffieldundef{maintitle} +% {\printfield{volume}% +% \printfield{part}} +% {}% +% \newunit +% \printfield{volumes}% +% \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{series+number} + }% + \newunit\newblock + %\printfield{note}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}} + +% +% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{title}% +\usebibmacro{in:}% +%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}% +\usebibmacro{crosscite}{inbook:parent}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx index 9a44c7462eb..9ce600b2bfa 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015.cbx @@ -1,376 +1,428 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
-
-%
-% 加载标准样式
-%
-\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric
-
-
-%
-% 选项设置
-%
-\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- autocite = superscript ,
- autopunct = true ,
- %sorting = none ,
- maxcitenames=1,
- mincitenames=1,
-}
-
-%textcite标注命令中的标点设置
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%
-%将连续3篇文献压缩改为连续2篇文献压缩
-%
-%该宏的目的是抛弃压缩内部的编号，而仅输出最后一个编号，主要通过cbx@tempcnta来控制
-%一般情况下cbx@tempcnta为0，所以该宏不输出任何内容。当cbx@tempcnta在cite:comp:comp宏中更改变大后
-%说明开始进入需要压缩的范围，当到压缩终点时，cbx@tempcnta必然大于1，则输出内容。
-%修改第二行的数字1为0即可将默认的3个开始压缩变为2个开始压缩。
-\renewbibmacro*{cite:dump}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{0}%
- {\ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{0}%1改为0，可以将压缩起始3个编号改为2个编号
- {\bibrangedash}%
- {\multicitedelim}%
- \bibhyperref[\cbx@lastkey]{%
- \ifdef\cbx@lastprefix%
- {\printtext[labelprefix]{\cbx@lastprefix}}%
- {}%
- \printtext[labelnumber]{\cbx@lastnumber}}}%
- {}%
- \setcounter{cbx@tempcnta}{0}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastprefix}
-
-%
-% 定义一个上标方括号wrapper
-%
-\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}%
-}
-
-% 修改postnote的输出格式
-\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1}
-
-%
-% 重定义cite命令
-%
-% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
-% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \printfield{postnote}}
-% v1.0p 以前用的方式
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \usebibmacro{prenote}}
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
-% {}
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}%
-% \usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
-%
-% 定义upcite命令
-% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:对supercite增加[]
-\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{%
- \cite}
-
-%
-% 重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets]
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {%[
- \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-%
-% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1.新增页码输出宏
-\newbibmacro*{postpages}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}
- {\printfield[postnote]{pages}}
- {\printfield{postnote}}}
-% 2.新增\pagescite引用命令
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \usebibmacro{postpages}}
-
-%
-% 定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite
-%
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \usebibmacro{postpages}}
-
-%
-% 定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式，
-%
-% 原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]}
-
-%
-% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码
-% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz
-% gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite
-% 区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。
-%见numeric.CBX
-\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
- \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printfield{labelnumber}%
- \ifbool{bbx:subentry}
- {\printfield{entrysetcount}}
- {}}}
-%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite},
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript]
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
- \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
- {\multicitedelim}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-
-%
-% 增加如下多个命令
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义
-% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}%
-% {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
-% {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
-% {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
-% \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
-% {\multicitedelim}
-% {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-%
-% 重定义citet，因为前面与\authornumcite同定义的命令无法正确处理多个bibtexkey同时给出的压缩情况
-% 20200721，v1.0v，hzz
-% 方法:利用textcite命令进行定义
-% 基本利用textcite命令来写citet，仅利用bool{cbx:incitet}做判断，进而处理不同的上标和页码形式
-\newbool{cbx:incitet}
-\global\booltrue{cbx:incitet}
-
-\newbibmacro*{citet}{%
- \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:comp}}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}%
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\printtext{\bibclosebracket}}\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%
- {}%
- \iffirstcitekey
- {}
- {\textcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \ifnameundef{labelname}
- {\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}
- {\printnames{labelname}}%
- \setunit*{\printdelim{namelabeldelim}}%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\printtext{\bibopenbracket}\global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}%
- \stepcounter{textcitecount}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}}}
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\usebibmacro{citet}}{\usebibmacro{textcite}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{cite:dump}\usebibmacro{postnote}}}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}\usebibmacro{postnote}}%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}%
- {\ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\mkbibsuperscript{\bibclosebracket}}{\bibclosebracket}%
- \global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}%
- {}}
-
- \newrobustcmd{\cbx@citet@init}[2]{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:incitet}%
- \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}%
- \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}%
- \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty}
-
- \renewrobustcmd{\cbx@textcite@init}[2]{%
- \global\boolfalse{cbx:incitet}%
- \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}%
- \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}%
- \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty}
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}[\cbx@citet@init\cbx@textcite]
- {\gdef\cbx@savedkeys{}%
- \citetrackerfalse%
- \pagetrackerfalse%
- \DeferNextCitekeyHook%
- \usebibmacro{cite:init}}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffirstcitekey\AND\value{multicitetotal}>0}
- {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{()(\thefield{multipostnote})}%
- \global\clearfield{multipostnote}}
- {}%
- \xappto\cbx@savedkeys{\thefield{entrykey},}%
- \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {}
- {\stepcounter{textcitetotal}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}}
- {}
- {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{%
- [\thefield{prenote}][\thefield{postnote}]{\cbx@savedkeys}}}
-
-
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \printfield{postnote}}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}%
- {\textcite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}%
- {\parencite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}%
- {\parencite}
-
-%
-% 增加如下复数的命令，以符合biblatex的复数命令习惯
-% 20190430，v1.0r，hzz
-% citec和citecs命令是实现了[1]-[3]这样的压缩形式。
-% authornumcites是常用命令authornumcite的复数形式
-\DeclareFieldFormat{labelbracket}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{citec:comp:comp}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- ( test {\iffieldundef{labelprefix}} and test {\ifundef\cbx@lastprefix} )
- or
- test {\iffieldequals{labelprefix}{\cbx@lastprefix}}
- }
- {\ifnumequal{\thefield{labelnumber}}{\value{cbx@tempcntb}}
- {\savefield{entrykey}{\cbx@lastkey}%
- \savefield{labelnumber}{\cbx@lastnumber}%
- \addtocounter{cbx@tempcnta}{1}}
- {\ifnumequal{\thefield{labelnumber}}{\value{cbx@tempcntb}-1}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcntb}}{-1}
- {\multicitedelim}
- {}%
- \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printtext[labelbracket]{\printfield{labelnumber}}}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:comp:end}}%
- \setcounter{cbx@tempcntb}{\thefield{labelnumber}}%
- \savefield{labelprefix}{\cbx@lastprefix}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{citec:comp}{%
- \addtocounter{cbx@tempcntb}{1}%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifbool{bbx:subentry}
- {\iffieldundef{entrysetcount}
- {\usebibmacro{citec:comp:comp}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:comp:inset}}}
- {\usebibmacro{citec:comp:comp}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:comp:shand}}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{citec:dump}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{0}
- {\ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{1}
- {\bibrangedash}
- {\multicitedelim}%
- \bibhyperref[\cbx@lastkey]{%
- \ifdef\cbx@lastprefix
- {\printtext[labelprefix]{\cbx@lastprefix}}
- {}%
- \printtext[labelbracket]{\cbx@lastnumber}}}%labelnumber
- {}%
- \setcounter{cbx@tempcnta}{0}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastprefix}
-
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\citec}[\mkbibsuperscript]%[\mkbibbrackets]
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \usebibmacro{prenote}}
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{citec:comp}}
-% {}
-% {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}%
-% \usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
-%上面这个用于非压缩情况，这里考虑了压缩的情况
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citec}[\mkbibsuperscript]%
- {\ifnumless{\value{multicitecount}}{2}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\iffieldundef{prenote}
- {\iffieldundef{postnote}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}}}
- {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{citec:comp}}
- {}
- {\ifboolexpr{ test {\ifnumequal{\value{multicitecount}}{\value{multicitetotal}}}
- or not test {\iffieldundef{postnote}}}
- {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}%
- \usebibmacro{postnote}}
- {}}
-
-\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\citecs}[\mkbibsuperscript]{\citec}{}
-
-\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\authornumcites}[]{\authornumcite}{\multicitedelim}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style] + +% +% 加载标准样式 +% +\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric + +% +% 增加一个控制是否将标准标签中的作者加上超链接的选项 +% 20210121,v1.0w,hzz +\newtoggle{bbx:gblabelref} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{gblabelref}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{#1}} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblabelref} + + +% +% 选项设置 +% +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + autocite = superscript , + autopunct = true , + %sorting = none , + maxcitenames=1, + mincitenames=1, +} + +% +% 修订使可用选项gblabelref来控制是否将标准标签中的作者加上超链接 +% 20210121,v1.0w,hzz +\iftoggle{iftlatest}% +{\renewbibmacro*{textcite}{% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\printtext{\bibclosebracket}\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {}% + \iffirstcitekey + {} + {\setunit{\textcitedelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}} + {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}}% + \setunit*{\printdelim{namelabeldelim}}% + \printtext{\bibopenbracket}\global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}% + \stepcounter{textcitecount}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}}% + } + + +%textcite标注命令中的标点设置 +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +% +%将连续3篇文献压缩改为连续2篇文献压缩 +% +%该宏的目的是抛弃压缩内部的编号，而仅输出最后一个编号，主要通过cbx@tempcnta来控制 +%一般情况下cbx@tempcnta为0，所以该宏不输出任何内容。当cbx@tempcnta在cite:comp:comp宏中更改变大后 +%说明开始进入需要压缩的范围，当到压缩终点时，cbx@tempcnta必然大于1，则输出内容。 +%修改第二行的数字1为0即可将默认的3个开始压缩变为2个开始压缩。 +\renewbibmacro*{cite:dump}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{0}% + {\ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{0}%1改为0，可以将压缩起始3个编号改为2个编号 + {\bibrangedash}% + {\multicitedelim}% + \bibhyperref[\cbx@lastkey]{% + \ifdef\cbx@lastprefix% + {\printtext[labelprefix]{\cbx@lastprefix}}% + {}% + \printtext[labelnumber]{\cbx@lastnumber}}}% + {}% + \setcounter{cbx@tempcnta}{0}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastprefix} + +% +% 定义一个上标方括号wrapper +% +\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{% + \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}% +} + +% 修改postnote的输出格式 +\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1} + + +%修改\mkbibsuperscript宏在最后加上一个空白使得xeCJK不会自动在引用标签后面加上中英文之间的空白 +%hzz,v1.0w,2021-0401 +\renewrobustcmd{\mkbibsuperscript}[1]{% + \unspace\allowhyphens\textsuperscript{% + \begingroup + \protected\long\def\mkbibsuperscript##1{% + \blx@warning{Nested superscript}% + \mkbibbrackets{##1}}% + #1\endgroup}\kern\z@} + +% +% 重定义cite命令 +% +% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode} +% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 \textsuperscript + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%] + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {%[ + \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \printfield{postnote}}%\kern\p@ \kern\z@ + +%\renewcommand{\cite}[1]{\textsuperscript{[\supercite{#1}]}\kern\z@} +% v1.0p 以前用的方式 +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \usebibmacro{prenote}} +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} +% {} +% {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}% +% \usebibmacro{postnote}} + +% +% 定义upcite命令 +% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:对supercite增加[] +\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{% + \cite} + +% +% 重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets] + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%] + \usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {%[ + \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + +% +% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1.新增页码输出宏 +\newbibmacro*{postpages}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote} + {\printfield[postnote]{pages}} + {\printfield{postnote}}} +% 2.新增\pagescite引用命令 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \usebibmacro{postpages}} + +% +% 定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite +% +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \usebibmacro{postpages}} + +% +% 定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式， +% +% 原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]} + +% +% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码 +% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz +% gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite +% 区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。见numeric.CBX +% 20200121，v1.0w，增加超链接，hzz +\newbibmacro*{citeathn}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}% + \ifbool{bbx:subentry} + {\printfield{entrysetcount}} + {}}} +%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}, +\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}% + \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citeathn}}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + + +% +% 增加如下多个命令 +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义 +% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突 +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}% +% {\usebibmacro{prenote}} +% {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace +% {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% +% \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{citeathn}}}} +% {\multicitedelim} +% {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + +% +% 重定义citet，因为前面与\authornumcite同定义的命令无法正确处理多个bibtexkey同时给出的压缩情况 +% 20200721，v1.0v，hzz +% 方法:利用textcite命令进行定义 +% 基本利用textcite命令来写citet，仅利用bool{cbx:incitet}做判断，进而处理不同的上标和页码形式 +\newbool{cbx:incitet} +\global\booltrue{cbx:incitet} + +\newbibmacro*{citet}{% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:comp}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}% + \ifbool{cbx:parens}% + {\mkbibsuperscript{\printtext{\bibclosebracket}}\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}% + {}% + \iffirstcitekey + {} + {\textcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \ifnameundef{labelname} + {\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}} + {\printnames{labelname}}% + \setunit*{\printdelim{namelabeldelim}}% + \mkbibsuperscript{\printtext{\bibopenbracket}\global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}% + \stepcounter{textcitecount}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\usebibmacro{citet}}{\usebibmacro{textcite}}% + }% + {}% + {\ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{cite:dump}\usebibmacro{postnote}}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}\usebibmacro{postnote}}% + \ifbool{cbx:parens}% + {\ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\mkbibsuperscript{\bibclosebracket}}{\bibclosebracket}% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}% + {}} + + \newrobustcmd{\cbx@citet@init}[2]{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:incitet}% + \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}% + \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}% + \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty} + + \renewrobustcmd{\cbx@textcite@init}[2]{% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:incitet}% + \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}% + \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}% + \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}[\cbx@citet@init\cbx@textcite] + {\gdef\cbx@savedkeys{}% + \citetrackerfalse% + \pagetrackerfalse% + \DeferNextCitekeyHook% + \usebibmacro{cite:init}} + {\ifthenelse{\iffirstcitekey\AND\value{multicitetotal}>0} + {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{()(\thefield{multipostnote})}% + \global\clearfield{multipostnote}} + {}% + \xappto\cbx@savedkeys{\thefield{entrykey},}% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {} + {\stepcounter{textcitetotal}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}} + {} + {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{% + [\thefield{prenote}][\thefield{postnote}]{\cbx@savedkeys}}} + + + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \printfield{postnote}} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}% + {\textcite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}% + {\parencite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}% + {\parencite} + +% +% 增加如下复数的命令，以符合biblatex的复数命令习惯 +% 20190430，v1.0r，hzz +% citec和citecs命令是实现了[1]-[3]这样的压缩形式。 +% authornumcites是常用命令authornumcite的复数形式 +\DeclareFieldFormat{labelbracket}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + +\newbibmacro*{citec:comp:comp}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + ( test {\iffieldundef{labelprefix}} and test {\ifundef\cbx@lastprefix} ) + or + test {\iffieldequals{labelprefix}{\cbx@lastprefix}}% + } + {\ifnumequal{\thefield{labelnumber}}{\value{cbx@tempcntb}} + {\savefield{entrykey}{\cbx@lastkey}% + \savefield{labelnumber}{\cbx@lastnumber}% + \addtocounter{cbx@tempcnta}{1}} + {\ifnumequal{\thefield{labelnumber}}{\value{cbx@tempcntb}-1} + {} + {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}% + \ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcntb}}{-1} + {\multicitedelim} + {}% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printtext[labelbracket]{\printfield{labelnumber}}}}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:comp:end}}% + \setcounter{cbx@tempcntb}{\thefield{labelnumber}}% + \savefield{labelprefix}{\cbx@lastprefix}} + +\newbibmacro*{citec:comp}{% + \addtocounter{cbx@tempcntb}{1}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifbool{bbx:subentry} + {\iffieldundef{entrysetcount} + {\usebibmacro{citec:comp:comp}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:comp:inset}}} + {\usebibmacro{citec:comp:comp}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:comp:shand}}} + +\newbibmacro*{citec:dump}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{0} + {\ifnumgreater{\value{cbx@tempcnta}}{1} + {\bibrangedash} + {\multicitedelim}% + \bibhyperref[\cbx@lastkey]{% + \ifdef\cbx@lastprefix + {\printtext[labelprefix]{\cbx@lastprefix}} + {}% + \printtext[labelbracket]{\cbx@lastnumber}}}%labelnumber + {}% + \setcounter{cbx@tempcnta}{0}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastprefix} + +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\citec}[\mkbibsuperscript]%[\mkbibbrackets] +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \usebibmacro{prenote}} +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{citec:comp}} +% {} +% {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}% +% \usebibmacro{postnote}} + +%上面这个用于非压缩情况，这里考虑了压缩的情况 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citec}[\mkbibsuperscript]% + {\ifnumless{\value{multicitecount}}{2} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\iffieldundef{prenote} + {\iffieldundef{postnote} + {} + {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}% + \usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}}} + {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}% + \usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}}}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citec:comp}} + {} + {\ifboolexpr{ test {\ifnumequal{\value{multicitecount}}{\value{multicitetotal}}} + or not test {\iffieldundef{postnote}}} + {\usebibmacro{citec:dump}% + \usebibmacro{postnote}} + {}} + +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\citecs}[\mkbibsuperscript]{\citec}{} + +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\authornumcites}[]{\authornumcite}{\multicitedelim} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx index aca301fc9cb..098e4b9462c 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.bbx @@ -1,3845 +1,3962 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,author year sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%
-% 版本和时间信息
-%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ay.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
-
-%=====================================================================
-%加载标准样式
-%=====================================================================
-\RequireBibliographyStyle{authoryear}
-\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 功能函数
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % biblatex版本判断
- % 20180405，v1.0k，为兼容biblatexv3.11增加toggle:iftlnine，HU zhenzhen
- % 20181020，v1.0n，为不再使用xstring宏包做的修改，hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:当版本继续更新时，增加一个新的toggle用以处理新的旧版，最新版和未判断出来的版本永远用iftlatest
- \providetoggle{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlfive} %处理biblatex3.2之前版本，时间2016-03-01前
- \providetoggle{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlsix} %处理biblatex3.3开始改变姓名机制后版本，时间2016-03-01及以后
- \providetoggle{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlseven}%处理biblatex3.7的兼容性，时间2016-12-01后
- \providetoggle{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftleight}%处理biblatex3.8到3.9的兼容性，时间2017-11-01后到2017-12-01前
- \providetoggle{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlnine} %处理biblatex10的兼容性，时间2017-12-01后
- \providetoggle{iftlatest}\toggletrue{iftlatest} %假设是最新版biblatex
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2014/04/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/12/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/11/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/01}{
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2018/02/19}{}
- {\toggletrue{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\toggletrue{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}}
- {\PackageError{biblatex}{Outdated 'biblatex' package}
- {Please update biblatex, This is a fatal error.}}
-
- \newcommand\defversion[2]{\csdef{codeversion#1#2}}%定义不同版本的命令
- \newcommand\switchversion[2]{\csuse{codeversion#1#2}}%使用不同版本的命令
-
- %
- % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成
- % v1.0k,20180509,hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏
- % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8
- % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。
- %
- % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中，
- % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断
- \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt}
- \def\testCJKfirst#1{%
- \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}}
-
- %
- % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号
- \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}%
- {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}%
- }
-
- %
- % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}%
- {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}%
- }
-
- % 对没有分隔符环境命令的低版本biblatex做增补，避免报错
- %
- \iftoggle{iftlfive}{
-
- \def\blx@inf@delimdeclare#1#2{%
- \blx@info{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' already defined, overwriting}}
-
- \def\blx@warn@delimuse#1#2{%
- \blx@warning{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' undefined}}
- % Delimiter interface
-
- % [<contextname, ...>]{<name, ...>}{<code>}
- \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimFormat}{%
- \@ifstar
- {\blx@declaredelimclear}
- {\blx@declaredelim}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimclear}[3][]{%
- \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}
- {}
- {\def\do##1{\csundef{blx@printdelim@##1@#2}}%
- \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}%
- \cslet{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}\@empty
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\blx@declaredelim{#2}{#3}}
- {\blx@declaredelim[#1]{#2}{#3}}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelim}[3][]{%
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\blx@declaredelim@i{}{}{#2}{#3}}
- {\def\do##1{%
- \listcsadd{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}{##1}%
- \blx@declaredelim@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{##1}{#2}{#3}}%
- \docsvlist{#1}}}%
-
- \def\blx@declaredelim@i#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\do@i##1{%
- \ifcsdef{#1##1}
- {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{##1}{#2}}
- {}%
- \csdef{#1##1}{#4}}%
- \forcsvlist{\do@i}{#3}}
-
- % *[<contextname, ...>]{<alias>}{<delim>}
- \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimAlias}{%
- \@ifstar
- {\blx@declaredelimalias}
- {\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimalias}[3][]{%
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#2}{#3}}
- {\def\do##1{%
- \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#2}{#3}}%
- \docsvlist{#1}}}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}[2]{%
- \blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#1}{#2}%
- \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}
- {}
- {\def\do##1{%
- \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#1}{#2}}%
- \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}}
-
- \def\blx@declaredelimalias@i#1#2#3{%
- \ifcsdef{#1#2}
- {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{#2}{#1}}
- {}%
- \csdef{#1#2}{\csuse{#1#3}}}
-
- \def\blx@delimcontext{none}
- \newcommand*{\printdelim}[2][]{%
- \ifblank{#1}
- {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2}
- {\csuse{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2}}
- {\ifcsdef{#2}% fall back on legacy macros
- {\csuse{#2}}
- {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{*}}}}
- {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@#1@#2}
- {\csuse{blx@printdelim@#1@#2}}
- {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{#1}}}}
-
- \newcommand*{\delimcontext}[1]{%
- \edef\blx@delimcontext{\blx@delimcontextalias{#1}}}
-
- \def\blx@delimcontextalias#1{%
- \ifcsdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}
- {\csuse{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}}
- {#1}}
-
- \newcommand*{\DeclareDelimcontextAlias}[2]{%
- \csgdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}{#2}}
- }{}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 数据模型定义
-%=====================================================================
- %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。
- %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
- %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
- %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
- %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
-
- %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型
- %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时
- %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式
- %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14
- \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}%
- }{}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置宏包选项
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项
- % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息
- % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote}
- %
- %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏
- %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式
- \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
- \printtext{\addspace(#1)}%
- }
- \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}%
- {\iffieldundef{annotation}%
- {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}%
- {\printfield{annotation}}}%
- {}%
- }
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
- % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项
- % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage}
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
- % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz
- % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
- % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式
- % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
-
- %%
- \newlength{\footbibmargin}
- \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
- \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
- \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
- \def\execgbfootbib%
- {%
- %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true}
- %
- %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐
- \AtEndPreamble{
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{
- %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
- %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
- %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
- %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
- %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
-
- %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
- %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
- %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
- %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}%
- {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器
-
-\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
- \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }
-
- \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
- \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
-
- }
-
- %
- %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
- \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}}
- %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标
- \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{%
- \def\@makefnmark{%
- \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}%
- }%
- }{}{}
- }
-
- %
- %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
- %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
- %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
- \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
- \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
- {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
- {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
- \@makefnmark%
- }}%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- }}%
- }%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
- }}%
- }
-
- %
- %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求
- \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]%
- {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器
- \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printtext{\thefield{postnote}}}}%由于ay样式中没有修改postnote域，此处因为格式需要不使用默认域格式
- }%
- {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}%
- \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%
- {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}\nopunct}%
- {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}%
- }%
- {\multicitedelim}%
- {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式
- % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz
- % 原理方法:
- % 只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的
- % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype}
- %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档
- % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def
- % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用
- % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。
- % 另外注意：
- % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码
- % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常
- % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。
- \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk}
-
- \def\str@bibliography{参考文献}
- \def\str@references{参考文献}
- \def\str@bytranslator{译}
- \def\str@andotherscn{等}
- \def\str@andcn{和}
- \def\str@backrefpage{引用页}
- \def\str@backrefpages{引用页}
- \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详}
- \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详}
- \def\str@edition{版}
- \def\str@volumecn{卷}
- \def\str@numbercn{册}
- \def\str@serialcn{第}
- \def\str@sameentry{同}
- \def\str@incn{见}
- \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
- \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
- \def\str@editorcn{主编}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK}
- \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def}
- }{}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息
- % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式
- % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。
- % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接
- \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项
- % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置
- \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{%
- \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{%
- \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}%
- \abx@dostrings
- \csuse{abx@strings@#1}%
- \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}%
- \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i
- \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}%
- }
- }{}}
-
- %
- %增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\dealnoathor}}
- %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnoauthor=true}%对于需要展开较早(展开层级优先)的选项，这一执行无效，只能用宏包加载时给出的选项。
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域
- % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd}
-
- %
- % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。
- %
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{%
- %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub}
-
- %
- % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin}
-
-
- % 选项设置
- %
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- useprefix = true, %名字的信息包括前缀
- date = year, %日期仅写到年
- maxbibnames=3, %将文献列表和引用中最大名字数量区分开
- minbibnames=3,
- maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量
- minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量
- isbn=false,
- sorting=gb7714-2015,
- sortlocale=zh__pinyin,%zh__big5han,%zh__stroke,%zh__gb2312han,%zh__pinyin,
- }
-
- %
- %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015
- %
- \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{%
- \begingroup
- \blx@metadateinfo{#1}%
- \iffieldundef{#1year}
- {}
- {\printtext[#1date]{%
- \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}%
- \endgroup}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{%
- \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}%
- \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}}
-
- %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器
- \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase}
- \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase}
- %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase}
- \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase}
- \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase}
- \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase}
-
-
-\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}
- { % 针对biblatex>=3.3版本的选项设置
-
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项
- % gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru
- % gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr
- % gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序
- {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}%
- \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}%
- {%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}%
- {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}%
- {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}%
- }%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder}
-
- \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序
- \gdef\lancnorder{4}
- \gdef\lanjporder{5}
- \gdef\lankrorder{6}
- \gdef\lanenorder{1}
- \gdef\lanfrorder{2}
- \gdef\lanruorder{3}}
-
- \newcounter{lanordernum}
- \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr
- \setcounter{lanordernum}{0}
- \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;}
- \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}}
- \parsinglanorder{#1}
- }
-
- % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
- % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
- % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串
- % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串
- % v1.0o，20190103，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal}
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal}
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}%
- }
- %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置
-
-
- %
- % 增加序号标签格式处理选项，作者年制不做处理，给出只为兼容选项考虑
- % v1.0l,20180623,hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{}
-
- %
- % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
- \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}%family-given
- \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
-
- %
- % 增加标签对齐选项
- %
- %因为在作者年制中，不需要使用，这里也增加，为了与顺序编码制的兼容性考虑。
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{}%
-
-
-
-
- }
- {
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项
- % biblatex 3.4及以下版本不能使用多个stylesourcemap，所以不使用该选项
- % 这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
-
- %
- % 增加序号标签格式处理选项，作者年制不做处理，给出只为兼容选项考虑
- % v1.0l，20180623，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{}
-
- %
- % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
- \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
- \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
-
- %
- % 增加标签对齐选项
- %
- %因为在作者年制中，不需要使用，这里也增加，为了与顺序年制的兼容性考虑。
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbalign}[right]{}%
-
- }
-
-
-%
-% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置，比如texlive2015中的3.0版
-%
-\defversion{3.0}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- firstinits = true, %名字有缩写，参考3.1.2.3 Internal
- }
-}
-%
-% 针对3.3<=biblatex<3.5版本的选项设置，比如texlive2016中的3.4版
-%
-\defversion{3.4}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits = true,
- }
-}
-%
-% 针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版
-%
-\defversion{3.7}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits = true,
- urldate =edtf,
- eventdate =edtf,
- }
-}
-%
-% 针对3.10<=biblatex版本的选项设置，比如texlive2018中的3.11版
-%
-\defversion{3.10}{opt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits = true,
- urldate =gb7714-2015,%iso
- eventdate =gb7714-2015,%iso
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 针对3.13<=biblatex版本的选项设置，因为内容有限，所以不再增加版本区分，而用时间直接判断
-%
-% 解决国标中“王临慧, 2010a.”和“王临慧, 等, 2010b.”的问题
-% 在没有这个选项之前无法加上a和b
-% v1.0s，20190828
-\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/08/16}{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{%
- nohashothers=true}}{}
-
-%
-% 根据biblatex版本信息，选择选项设置
-%
-% 原理方法:如下这种选择机制能自动兼容更新的版本，但对于老版本
-% 必须要把情况列全。
-\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{opt}}{}%biblatex<=3.2
-\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{opt}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.7
-\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9
-\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.10
-\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex最新3.11
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-%设置本地化字符串
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符
- %
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{andcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andkr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
- \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{incn}
- \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
-
- %
- % 修改一些当地化字符串
- %
- % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件
- % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn
- % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别
- \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
- bibliography = {\str@bibliography},
- references = {\str@references},
- bytranslator= {\str@bytranslator\adddot}, %将trans. by 改成 译
- and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名见的and符号改成 逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节
- andcn = {\addcomma},%\str@andcn\ and本地化字符串的中文对应词
- andincitecn = {\str@andcn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andincite = {\addcomma},
- %andothers = {et al.}, %将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andothersincite={et al\adddot},
- backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:},
- backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:},
- in={in\intitlepunct},
- volumecn={\str@volumecn},
- numbercn={\str@numbercn},
- serialcn={\str@serialcn},
- andothersjp={他},
- andotherskr={외},
- andjp={和},
- andkr={和},
- incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
- mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
- phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
- editorscn={\str@editorcn},
- editorcn={\str@editorcn},
- }
-
- %
- % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串
- % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串
- % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内
- % v1.0t，hzz，20190525
- \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}}
- \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 动态数据修改
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中
-% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性
-% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个
-% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次
-% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。
-% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符，
-% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息
-%
-% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法：
-% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名
-% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射
-% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。
-%
-% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下：
-% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换
-% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动
-% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名
-% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type
-% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换
-% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射
-%
-% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下：
-% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article
-% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook
-% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理
-% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理
-% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型
-% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型
-% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期
-% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型
-% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略，
-% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型
-% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时，
-% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。
-% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述
-% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式
-% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理：
-% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物
-% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report
-% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型
-% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。
-% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献
-% 10. 日期以如下方式处理：
-% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year
-% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate
-% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date
-% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate
-
-\DeclareSourcemap{
-\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
- \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除
- %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor
- }
- \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名
- %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。
- %\step[notfield=address,final]
- \step[fieldsource=location,final]
- \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步
- %\step[notfield=location,final]
- \step[fieldsource=address,final]
- \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况
- \step[fieldsource=mark,final]
- \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}]
- }
- \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{article}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- }
- \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{periodical}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor
- \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{newspaper}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{database}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{dataset}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{software}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{map}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{archive}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以
- %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]
- \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]%
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{book}
- \pertype{inbook}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}]
- \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
- \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{standard}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{patent}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{inproceedings}
- \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{proceedings}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{incollection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{collection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{report}
- \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{thesis}
- \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型
- \pertype{phdthesis}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{online}
- \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型
- \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{manual}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version
- \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{unpublished}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况
- %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。
- %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息
- \step[fieldsource=year]
- \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题
- \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%
- \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=title,final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%作者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=author,final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%译者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=translator,final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=editor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]
- }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。
- \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。
- \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断，
- %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况，
- %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd
- \step[fieldsource=language]
- \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分
- %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
- }
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
- }
- \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
- %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
- %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断
- \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final]
- }
- \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
- }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-% }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-% }
- \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
- \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
- %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{report}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online]
- \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{thesis}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{manual}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{unpublished}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{database}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{dataset}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{software}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{map}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{archive}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确)
- \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸
- \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization
- \step[fieldsource={title}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={journaltitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={journal}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={publisher}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={address}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={location}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={institution}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
- }
- %对于高版本(3.4以上)可以用下面这一段取代前面那一段，为了兼容gbnoauthor选项，这些代码只能在sourcemap中使用，所以只能选择前面那一段
- %\map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
-% \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
-% }
-% \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
-% \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
-% }
-% \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,%
-% address,location,institution,organization}]{
-% \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
-% }
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 佚名/noauthor的处理
-%
-% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改实现
-\def\dealnoathor{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的中文文献设置为佚名
- \step[fieldsource=language,match={chinese},final]
- \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={佚名}]
- }
- \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的英文文献设置为A{non}
- \step[fieldsource=language,match={english},final]
- \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={A{non}}]%noauthor换成Anon，同时为避免大写还加了{}
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 不同语言分集调整的实现方式
-%
-% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序
-\def\dealsortlan{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-%
-%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置排序格式
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.7及以下版本
-%
-\defversion{3.7}{sort}{%这是3.4版的，3.7版略有差异，但不大，后面有注释
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gb7714-2015}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%[direction=descending]
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的nyt
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gbnytd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gbyntd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %升序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingScheme{gbynta}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume}
- \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0}
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-%
-% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本
-%
-\defversion{3.8}{sort}{
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%[direction=descending]
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的nyt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %升序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{%[direction=ascending]
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %
- % 定义命令\defdoublelangentry，用于biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理
- %
- %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了，
- %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息
- %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中
- \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{%
- \edef\entrykeya{##1}
- \edef\entrykeyb{##2}
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final]
- \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb]
- }
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-\ifboolexpr{
-test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}}
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}}
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7
-}{\switchversion{3.7}{sort}}{\switchversion{3.8}{sort}}%3.8<=biblatex
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-%参考文献表环境
-%=====================================================================
-
-%
-% 列表格式
-%
-% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent
-% v1.0l，20180615，hzz
-\setlength{\bibhang}{1em}
-\newlength{\bibitemindent}
-\setlength{\bibitemindent}{-\bibhang}
-\setlength{\bibitemsep}{4.5pt}
- \defbibenvironment{bibliography}
- {\list
- {}
- {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
- {\endlist}
- {\item}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置单元或块等的标点
-%=====================================================================
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin
-\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\space} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点%来源biblatex.def
-%
-% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符
-% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进
-%
-% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets
-% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def
-\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\par\nobreak}%ay样式用par也可以，因为没有悬挂对齐问题
-\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号
-%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 新增文献类型标识符的格式
-% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉
-% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上
-% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- }%
- {\ifentrytype{online}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- }}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式
-\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot，用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [article,patent,thesis,unpublished]
- {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [inbook,incollection,inproceedings]
- {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %url域修改如本行%url相关输出，源来自biblatex.def
-\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily
-%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样
-\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行
-\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行
-\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行
-\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{%
- \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space
- \ifhyperref
- {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
- {\nolinkurl{#1}}}
-%
-% 标题的字母大小写格式修改
-%
-% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase
-% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not
-%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{%
-\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{%
-\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%页码引用格式的修改%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{russian}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}
-
-\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat
- [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished]
- {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat
- [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical]
- {title}{##1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}}
-}
-
-%
-% 文献标题后的标点问题
-% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen
-%
-% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况:
-% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于
-% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响
-% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct
-\ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iftoggle{iftlfive}}
- or
- test{\iftoggle{iftlsix}}
- }{}%
- {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}%
- \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{}
- }
-
-
-%
-% 修改译者位置格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式
-\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{\bibauthorfont%
- \ifnameundef{translator}
- {}
- {%\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}%
- \clearname{translator}%
- %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理
- %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \newunit}%
- \usebibmacro{withothers}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式
-% v1.0,20160701,hzz
-% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim
-%
-% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。
-% \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames
-\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{\bibauthorfont%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}}
- and
- test \ifmorenames
- }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma
- {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。
- {}%
-\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
-}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
-%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
-%胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
-%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
-}}
-
-% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothersincitecn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothersincite}%
- \fi}
-
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andotherscn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothers}%
- \fi}
-
-
-%
-% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
-% \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}%
-%\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andincitecn}%\space%
- \or%
-\space\bibstring{andincite}\space%
- \fi}
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
- \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andcn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{and}\space%
- \fi}
-
-
-
-%
-% 重设title的输出
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
-% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
-\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它
- }}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
- }%
-}}
-
-
-%
-% 作者信息的输出格式
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式
-\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
-\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
-{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
-\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
-\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}%
-\or
- \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}}%
-\fi
- \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
-
-\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式
-\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family
-\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace}
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%
- \ifuseprefix%
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
-}
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
-\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
-}
-
-%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}
- {\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
-}
-
-
-\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}%biblatex<3.2版的情况
- {}{
- %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
- \renewbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase
- %注意上一句\MakeCapital后面如果再跟一个{}包含#1，则没有效果，可能是包在里面少了一层展开
- %因为机构名通常包括在{}内，所以要多展开一次才行，所以这里去掉#1外面的{}
- %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot
- %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot %3.9.1 Generic Commands and Hooks，对姓重新处理，如下句: %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase
- %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot
- %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面
- \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \addcomma\addspace%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%
- }%
- }
-
- %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
- \renewbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \addcomma\addspace%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%
- }%
- }
-
- %中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
- \renewbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamefirst{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase
- \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%
- \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \addcomma\addspace%
- \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%
- }%
- }
-
- %%biblatex<3.2版的情况，姓名的处理格式带参数
- \DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
- \iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
- {\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
- \ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \or
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \or
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \ifblank{#3#5}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}%
- \or
- \iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \or
- \usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}%
- \or
- \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
- {\iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}%
- \ifblank{#3#5}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
- {\iffirstinits
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}%
- \fi
- \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
-}
-
-%
-% url和url日期格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{%
- %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面
- \iffieldundef{urlyear}%
- {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{urldate}}%
- \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{url}}
-\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}}
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex<3.7版本
-%
-\defversion{3.4}{date}{
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printfield{urlyear}%
- \iffieldundef{urlmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlmonth}}%
- \iffieldundef{urlday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlday}}\printtext{]}}
-
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%新增加一个公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期
- \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printfield{year}%
- \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\printtext{\thefield{month}}%
- \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}%
- }
-
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%替换\iffieldundef{year}，因为year总是存在，但为空
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{%
- \iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{eventyear}}%
- \iffieldundef{eventmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{eventmonth}}%
- \iffieldundef{eventday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{eventday}}}}%
- }%
- }{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{endyear}}%
- \iffieldundef{endmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{endmonth}}%
- \iffieldundef{endday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{endday}}}}%
- }%
- }%
- }%
- {%
- \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{year}}%
- \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{month}}%
- \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}%
- }%
- }%
- }}%
-}
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本
-%
-\defversion{3.7}{date}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1}
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
-
- %
- % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
- % 20160701，v1.0，新增加
- % 20180405，v1.0k，为biblatexv3.7-3.9版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
- %
- % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
- %
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%
- \printtext{\blx@edtfdate{}{}}%
- }
-
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldundef{year}{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
- {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
- }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
- }{\printtext{(}\blx@edtfdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
- }%
- }}%
-}
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本
-%
-\defversion{3.10}{date}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1}
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
-
- %
- % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
- % 20160701，v1.0，新增加
- % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
- %
- % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
- % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份
- % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令
- % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%
- \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}%
- }
-
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldundef{year}{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
- {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
- }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
- }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
- }%
- }}%
-}
-
-%
-% 关联文献的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本
-%
-% 原理方法:因为related宏中带有##了，所以无法封装到defversion中了。所以直接做判断
-% 下面这一段主要针对v3.8-3.10，因为我提问后，biblatex作者为3.11版增加了一个钩子控制relatedblock前的分隔符。
-\ifboolexpr{
-test{\iftoggle{iftleight}}
-or
-test{\iftoggle{iftlnine}}
-}{\renewbibmacro*{related}{%standard.bbx
- \ifboolexpr{ test {\iffieldundef{related}} or test {\ifrelatedloop} }
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{begrelated}%
- \def\bbx@tempa{}%
- \setcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}{0}%
- \def\do##1{%
- \entrydata{##1}{%
- \ifrelatedloop
- {}
- {\stepcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}%
- \gappto{\bbx@tempa}{##1,}}}}%
- \docsvfield{related}%
- \restorefield{related}{\bbx@tempa}%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{0}
- {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{entrykey}}%
- \iffieldundef{clonesourcekey}
- {}
- {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{clonesourcekey}}}%
- \setcounter{bbx:relatedcount}{0}%
- \def\do{%
- \stepcounter{bbx:relatedcount}%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedcount}}{0}%这里从1改为0
- {\ifcsundef{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\printtext{\relateddelim}}
- {\printtext{\csuse{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}}}}}
- {}}%
- \ifbibmacroundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro{related:default}}}
- {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro*{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}}%
- \iffieldformatundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\def\bbx@tempa{related}}
- {\def\bbx@tempa{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}%
- \iffieldformatundef{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}}
- {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:default}}
- {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}}}%
- \printtext[\bbx@tempa]{%
- \usebibmacro{begrelatedloop}%
- \iffieldundef{relatedstring}
- {\ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{1}}
- and
- test {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{relatedtype}s}}
- }
- {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{%
- \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}s}}}
- {\iffieldbibstring{relatedtype}
- {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{%
- \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}}}}
- {}}}
- {\iffieldbibstring{relatedstring}
- {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{%
- \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedstring}}}}
- {\printfield[\bbx@tempb]{relatedstring}}}%
- \docsvfield{related}%
- \usebibmacro{endrelatedloop}}}%
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{endrelated}}}
-}{}
-
-%
-% 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex3.11
-%
-% 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏
-\defversion{3.11}{related}{
-\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
-}
-
-\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%biblatex<=3.2
-\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}}{}%biblatex=3.7
-\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9
-\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}}{}%biblatex3.10
-\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}\switchversion{3.11}{related}}{}%biblatex最新
-
-%
-% 调整doi+eprint+url格式
-%
-% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。
-\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{%
-% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面
-% {\printfield{doi}}
-% {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}}%必须要做域判断否则容易产生多余的标点
- {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}
- {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
- {}
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:doi}
- {\printfield{doi}}
- {}}
-
-%
-% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printfield{chapter}}%
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit %这里的标点去掉
- }
-
-%
-% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal
-%
-\DeclareListFormat{location}{%
- \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}%
- #1\isdot}
-\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location}
-\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location}
-
-% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间，
-% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz
-% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}
-\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}%
-}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}%
-{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}%
-}{%
-\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}%
- {\printlist{location}}%
-\addcolon\addspace%
-\iflistundef{institution}{%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}% \bibstring{nopublisher}%[s.n.\adddot]
-{\printlist{institution}}}%
-\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}%
- \newunit}%
-{ \printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{institution}%
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- \newunit}%
-}
-%
-% 通用的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。
-% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。
-% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理
-\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
- \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }%
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}%
- {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress}
- {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace%
- \iflistundef{publisher}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}%
- {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}%
- {\printlist{publisher}}}%
-\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace%
-\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点
-}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{publisher}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{publisher}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
-\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。
-{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
- \iflistundef{institution}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- %\newunit
- }}
-
-%
-% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}%
-{\bibstring{volume}~#1}%
-}% volume of a book
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
-
-%
-% 对number册信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,%
-incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}%
-{#1}%
-}%
-
-%
-% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
-{#1\isdot}}%
-{\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}%
-{#1\isdot}}}
-
-%
-% 对version的版本信息做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
- \ifinteger{#1}%
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
- {\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}%
- {#1\isdot}}
-
-%
-% 作者域的输出控制宏
-%
-% 当两篇文献作者相同且连续时，标准样式是用-代替后面的文献的作者，这里取消这一设置
-\renewbibmacro*{author}{%author for biblatex version <=3.7
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseauthor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{author}}
- }
- {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck}
- {%\bibnamedash
- \printnames{author}%
- }%
- {\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}%
- \printnames{author}%
- \iffieldundef{authortype}
- {\setunit{\addspace}}
- {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}}%
- \iffieldundef{authortype}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}}%
- {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
- \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%增加一个逗号
- \usebibmacro{date+extrayear}
- }
-
-%
-% 设置标注和文献表中作者和年份之间的分隔符
-%
-% 原理方法:注意3.4版已经有\nameyeardelim，上述修改的author宏虽然定义了著录表中的标点，但标注中的未定义
-% 设置因为mergedate默认为true时的情况，来自\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact
-% 去掉作者后面包围年份的圆括号
-% 这里因为biblatex版本的不同，做不同的处理，texlive2017版/2016等低版本分开处理
-\defversion{3.0}{dateextra}{
-\renewcommand*{\nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{%%重设date+extrayear格式，源来自authoryear.BBX
- \iffieldundef{\thefield{datelabelsource}year}
- {}
- {\printtext{%[parens]%这里把括号去掉
- \iffieldsequal{year}{\thefield{datelabelsource}year}
- {\printdateextralabel}%
- {\printfield{labelyear}%
- \printfield{extrayear}}}}}%
- \newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}}
-}
-
-\defversion{3.4}{dateextra}{
- \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{%%重设date+extrayear格式，源来自authoryear.BBX
- \iffieldundef{\thefield{datelabelsource}year}
- {}
- {\printtext{%[parens]%这里把括号去掉
- \iffieldsequal{year}{\thefield{datelabelsource}year}
- {\printdateextralabel}%
- {\printfield{labelyear}%
- \printfield{extrayear}}}}}%
- \newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}}
-}
-\defversion{3.7}{dateextra}{
- \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{%以前的\printdateextralabel宏变为了\printlabeldateextra
- \iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {}
- {\printtext{%[parens]
- \iffieldsequal{year}{labelyear}
- {\printlabeldateextra}%
- {\printfield{labelyear}%
- \printfield{extrayear}}}}}%
-
-\newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}}
-}
-\defversion{3.8}{dateextra}{
- \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
-%注意这里当没有作者只有标题时在年份之前的标点是否需要标准并未涉及，所以未做处理。
-\renewbibmacro*{author}{%以前的date+extrayear变为date+extradate，所以对3.8以上版本重定义一下author
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseauthor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{author}}
- }
- {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck}
- {%\bibnamedash %去掉相同作者用横线代替的处理
- \printnames{author}\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%把标点也带上
- }
- {\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}%
- \printnames{author}%
- \iffieldundef{authortype}
- {\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}
- {\setunit{\printdelim{authortypedelim}}}}%
- \iffieldundef{authortype}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}}%
- {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
- \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
- \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
- \usebibmacro{date+extradate}}
- \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
- \iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {}
- {\printtext{%[parens]%这里去掉括号
- \iflabeldateisdate
- {\printdateextra}
- {\printlabeldateextra}}}}%
-
-}
-
-
-%
-%为mergedate增加选项none，即实现年份不提前到作者后面的标签中
-%也不打印用于区分同作者同年份文献的标识符如(a，b，c)
-%目的是实现一些特殊的文献表样式比如ucas的作者年制
-%v1.0q,20190212,hzz
-\def\bbx@opt@mergedate@none{%
- \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
- \iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {}
- {}}%[parens]\printtext{\printlabeldateextra}
-\renewbibmacro*{bbx:ifmergeddate}{\@secondoftwo}%这一句用于3.12版本
-\renewbibmacro*{date}{\printdate}%这一句用于biblatex3.11以下版本
-\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号
-\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}%
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}}%
- %\newunit
- }%
- }
-
-\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex<=3.2
-\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{dateextra}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex=3.7
-\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.8}{dateextra}}{}%<=3.8biblatex<=3.9
-\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.8}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex3.10
-\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.8}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex最新3.11
-
-%
-% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}}
- and
- test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}}
- }
- {}
- {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
- \newunit%标点换成下一句
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}%
- \printfield{booktitleaddon}}
-
-%
-% 调整期刊名的格式
-%
-% 原理方法:因为作者年制年份提到前面，因此涉及到期刊名与后面的卷期的关系。
-% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{journal}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
- \iffieldundef{series}%
- {}%
- {\newunit%
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
- %换成逗号和空格
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%
-% 增加一个number带括号的格式，避免使用mkbibparens而引入一个不必要的空格
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{addnumflag}{%
-\nobreak\printtext{(}\nobreak #1\nobreak\printtext{)}}
-
-%
-% 调整journal输出
-%
-% 原理方法:首先判断子标题，然后再设置标点。
-% 避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在时需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格
-\renewbibmacro*{journal}{%
- \iffieldundef{journaltitle}%
- {}%
- {\printtext[journaltitle]{%
- \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}%
- \iffieldundef{journalsubtitle}{}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 调整期刊卷和期的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- \setunit*{\adddot}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
- %\printfield{number}%
- \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield[addnumflag]{number}}%区别于顺序编码制
- \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}}}
-
-%
-% 调整期刊年份的格式
-%
-% 原理方法:原在authoryear.BBX中\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact中定义
-% 当issue存在时，才设置newunit。避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在是需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格
- \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
- \iffieldundef{issue}%
- {}%
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}\newunit}}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx
- %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%
-% 编者的符号修改一下
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseeditor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
- }
- {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck}
- {%\bibnamedash
- \printnames{editor}%
- }
- {\printnames{editor}%
- %\setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}%
- %\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}
- }%
- \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
- %\clearname{editor}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}%
- {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
- \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
- \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
- \ifboolexpr{%
-test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}
-or
-test {\ifentrytype{incollection}}
-or
-test {\ifentrytype{inproceedings}}
-or
-test {\ifentrytype{conference}}
-}%
-{}%
-{\usebibmacro{date+extradate}}}
-
-%
-% 编者类型做一修改
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \printtext[editortype]{%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}
- {%
-% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理
-% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
-% or
-% test {\ifandothers{editor}}
-% }
-% {\bibstring{editors}}
-% {\bibstring{editor}}
- }
- {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
- {\ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
- or
- test {\ifandothers{editor}}
- }
- {\printdelim{streditortypes}}
- {\printdelim{streditortype}}}
- {\thefield{editortype}}}%
- }}
-
-%
-% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
-% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
-% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
- \fi}
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
- \fi}
-
-
-%
-% bookauthor域的输出，
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
-% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
-\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
- {\ifnameundef{editor}%
- {}%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
- {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
- }%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
- {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改期刊的标题
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \iffieldundef{title}
- {}
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- %}%把编组结束移到后面去
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母
- \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{}
- }}
- }
-
-%
-% 期刊的标题做修改
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{periodical}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字
- \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}%
- {\printfield{year}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolfirst}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{%
- \printfield{endyear}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolsecond}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}%
- \setunit{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \newunit}
-
-%
-% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份
-%
-\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{%
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- {\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- }%
- %\newunit
-}
-
-%
-% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去
-%
-\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and%
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
- }%
-}%
-}
-
-
-
-%
-% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
-% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
-% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
-\renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
- {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
- \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
- }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
-
-%
-% 修改type域的输出格式
-% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
-% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
-\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
-{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}%
- {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}%
-}
-
-
-%
-% 修改series域的输出格式
-% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz
-\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
- \printfield{series}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%=====================================================================
-%设置驱动格式
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% book条目类的驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\newunit
-\printlist{language}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
-\newunit\newblock}%
-\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-\newunit
-\printfield{edition}%
-\newunit\newblock%%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\iffieldundef{maintitle}%
-{\printfield{volume}%
-\printfield{part}}%
-{}%
-\newunit%
-\printfield{volumes}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-%\printfield{note}%
-%\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
-%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉
-\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
-\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。
- \newunit\newblock%
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-
-
-%
-% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物
- \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
-% \newunit
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit
- \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 连续出版物的驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{editor}%
- %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock
- \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行
- \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间
- \newunit\newblock%添加这一行
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock}
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 专利文献驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- %\usebibmacro{title}%
- \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理
- \iflistundef{location}
- {}
- {\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printtext{%[parens]
- \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byholder}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{newsdate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 在线文献驱动
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \printlist{organization}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \newunit\newblock
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
-}{\usebibmacro{date}}%
-{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-
-
-%
-% 报告类型驱动
-% 当有网址无出版项时，用online输出
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 论文、手册类型驱动
-% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- }{}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 备选类型驱动
-%
-% 利用biblatex的misc驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{howpublished}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-
-
-
-%
-% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{title}%
-\usebibmacro{in:}%
-%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
- \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
- }{\newunit}%替换下一句
- %\newunit\newblock
-\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加
- \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
-\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}%
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息
- \newunit\newblock%
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-% \iffieldundef{maintitle}
-% {\printfield{volume}%
-% \printfield{part}}
-% {}%
-% \newunit
-% \printfield{volumes}%
-% \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{series+number}
- }%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\printfield{note}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,author year sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +% +% 版本和时间信息 +% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ay.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style] +%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求 + +%===================================================================== +%加载标准样式 +%===================================================================== +\RequireBibliographyStyle{authoryear} +\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题 + + +%===================================================================== +% 功能函数 +%===================================================================== + % + % biblatex版本判断 + % 20180405，v1.0k，为兼容biblatexv3.11增加toggle:iftlnine，HU zhenzhen + % 20181020，v1.0n，为不再使用xstring宏包做的修改，hzz + % + % 原理方法:当版本继续更新时，增加一个新的toggle用以处理新的旧版，最新版和未判断出来的版本永远用iftlatest + \providetoggle{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlfive} %处理biblatex3.2之前版本，时间2016-03-01前 + \providetoggle{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlsix} %处理biblatex3.3开始改变姓名机制后版本，时间2016-03-01及以后 + \providetoggle{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlseven}%处理biblatex3.7的兼容性，时间2016-12-01后 + \providetoggle{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftleight}%处理biblatex3.8到3.9的兼容性，时间2017-11-01后到2017-12-01前 + \providetoggle{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlnine} %处理biblatex10的兼容性，时间2017-12-01后 + \providetoggle{iftlatest}\toggletrue{iftlatest} %假设是最新版biblatex + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2014/04/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/12/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/11/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/01}{ + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2018/02/19}{} + {\toggletrue{iftlnine}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftleight}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftlseven}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftlsix}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\toggletrue{iftlfive}\togglefalse{iftlatest}}} + {\PackageError{biblatex}{Outdated 'biblatex' package} + {Please update biblatex, This is a fatal error.}} + + \newcommand\defversion[2]{\csdef{codeversion#1#2}}%定义不同版本的命令 + \newcommand\switchversion[2]{\csuse{codeversion#1#2}}%使用不同版本的命令 + + % + % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成 + % v1.0k,20180509,hzz + % + % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏 + % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8 + % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。 + % + % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中， + % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断 + \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt} + \def\testCJKfirst#1{% + \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{% + \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}} + + % + % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号 + \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}% + {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}% + } + + % + % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}% + {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}% + } + + % 对没有分隔符环境命令的低版本biblatex做增补，避免报错 + % + \iftoggle{iftlfive}{ + + \def\blx@inf@delimdeclare#1#2{% + \blx@info{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' already defined, overwriting}} + + \def\blx@warn@delimuse#1#2{% + \blx@warning{Delimiter '#1' in context '#2' undefined}} + % Delimiter interface + + % [<contextname, ...>]{<name, ...>}{<code>} + \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimFormat}{% + \@ifstar + {\blx@declaredelimclear} + {\blx@declaredelim}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimclear}[3][]{% + \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2} + {} + {\def\do##1{\csundef{blx@printdelim@##1@#2}}% + \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}% + \cslet{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}\@empty + \ifblank{#1} + {\blx@declaredelim{#2}{#3}} + {\blx@declaredelim[#1]{#2}{#3}}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelim}[3][]{% + \ifblank{#1} + {\blx@declaredelim@i{}{}{#2}{#3}} + {\def\do##1{% + \listcsadd{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}{##1}% + \blx@declaredelim@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{##1}{#2}{#3}}% + \docsvlist{#1}}}% + + \def\blx@declaredelim@i#1#2#3#4{% + \def\do@i##1{% + \ifcsdef{#1##1} + {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{##1}{#2}} + {}% + \csdef{#1##1}{#4}}% + \forcsvlist{\do@i}{#3}} + + % *[<contextname, ...>]{<alias>}{<delim>} + \newrobustcmd*{\DeclareDelimAlias}{% + \@ifstar + {\blx@declaredelimalias} + {\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimalias}[3][]{% + \ifblank{#1} + {\blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#2}{#3}} + {\def\do##1{% + \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#2}{#3}}% + \docsvlist{#1}}} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@declaredelimaliasauto}[2]{% + \blx@declaredelimalias@i{}{#1}{#2}% + \ifcsvoid{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2} + {} + {\def\do##1{% + \blx@declaredelimalias@i{blx@printdelim@##1@}{#1}{#2}}% + \dolistcsloop{blx@declaredelimcontexts@#2}}} + + \def\blx@declaredelimalias@i#1#2#3{% + \ifcsdef{#1#2} + {\blx@inf@delimdeclare{#2}{#1}} + {}% + \csdef{#1#2}{\csuse{#1#3}}} + + \def\blx@delimcontext{none} + \newcommand*{\printdelim}[2][]{% + \ifblank{#1} + {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2} + {\csuse{blx@printdelim@\blx@delimcontext @#2}} + {\ifcsdef{#2}% fall back on legacy macros + {\csuse{#2}} + {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{*}}}} + {\ifcsdef{blx@printdelim@#1@#2} + {\csuse{blx@printdelim@#1@#2}} + {\blx@warn@delimuse{#2}{#1}}}} + + \newcommand*{\delimcontext}[1]{% + \edef\blx@delimcontext{\blx@delimcontextalias{#1}}} + + \def\blx@delimcontextalias#1{% + \ifcsdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1} + {\csuse{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}} + {#1}} + + \newcommand*{\DeclareDelimcontextAlias}[2]{% + \csgdef{blx@delimcontextalias@#1}{#2}} + }{} + + +%===================================================================== +% 数据模型定义 +%===================================================================== + %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。 + %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名 + %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域 + %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域 + %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域 + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder} + + %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型 + %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时 + %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式 + %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。 + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14 + \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}% + }{} + +%===================================================================== +% 设置宏包选项 +%===================================================================== + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项 + % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息 + % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote} + % + %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏 + %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式 + \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{% + \printtext{\addspace(#1)}% + } + \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}% + {\iffieldundef{annotation}% + {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}% + {\printfield{annotation}}}% + {}% + } + + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项 + % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项 + % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage} + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表 + % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz + % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签 + % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式 + % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib} + + %% + \newlength{\footbibmargin} + \newlength{\footbiblabelsep} + \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离 + \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距 + \def\execgbfootbib% + {% + %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令 + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true} + % + %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐 + \AtEndPreamble{ + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{ + %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。 + %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接 + %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。 + %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}% + %\RequirePackage{footmisc}% + + %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码 + %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改 + %v1.0q 20190317 hzz + %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}% + {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器 + +\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + } + + \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔 + \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1} + + } + + % + %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式 + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}} + %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标 + \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{% + \def\@makefnmark{% + \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}% + }% + }{}{} + } + + % + %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容) + %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。 + %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况 + \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{% + \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true + {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息 + {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}% + \@makefnmark% + }}% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + }}% + }% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断 + }}% + } + + % + %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求 + \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]% + {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器 + \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printtext{\thefield{postnote}}}}%由于ay样式中没有修改postnote域，此处因为格式需要不使用默认域格式 + }% + {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}% + \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}% + {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}\nopunct}% + {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}% + }% + {\multicitedelim}% + {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + + } + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式 + % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz + % 原理方法: + % 只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + } + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项 + % + % 原理方法: + % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的 + % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype} + %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype} + + % + % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档 + % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def + % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用 + % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。 + % 另外注意： + % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码 + % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常 + % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。 + \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk} + + \def\str@bibliography{参考文献} + \def\str@references{参考文献} + \def\str@bytranslator{译} + \def\str@andotherscn{等} + \def\str@andcn{和} + \def\str@backrefpage{引用页} + \def\str@backrefpages{引用页} + \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详} + \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详} + \def\str@edition{版} + \def\str@volumecn{卷} + \def\str@numbercn{册} + \def\str@serialcn{第} + \def\str@sameentry{同} + \def\str@incn{见} + \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文} + \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文} + \def\str@editorcn{主编} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK} + \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def} + }{}} + + % + % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息 + % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式 + % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict} + + % + % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。 + % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接 + \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink} + + % + % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项 + % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置 + \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{% + \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{% + \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}% + \abx@dostrings + \csuse{abx@strings@#1}% + \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}% + \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i + \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}% + } + }{}} + + % + %增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\dealnoathor}} + %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnoauthor=true}%对于需要展开较早(展开层级优先)的选项，这一执行无效，只能用宏包加载时给出的选项。 + + + % + % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域 + % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd} + + % + % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。 + % + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{% + %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句 + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub} + + % + % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin} + + + % 选项设置 + % + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + useprefix = true, %名字的信息包括前缀 + date = year, %日期仅写到年 + maxbibnames=3, %将文献列表和引用中最大名字数量区分开 + minbibnames=3, + maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量 + minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量 + isbn=false, + sorting=gb7714-2015, + sortlocale=zh__pinyin,%zh__big5han,%zh__stroke,%zh__gb2312han,%zh__pinyin, + } + + % + %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015 + % + \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@metadateinfo{#1}% + \iffieldundef{#1year} + {} + {\printtext[#1date]{% + \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}% + \endgroup} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{% + \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}% + \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}} + + %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器 + \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase} + \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase} + %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase} + \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase} + \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase} + \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase} + + +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27} + { % 针对biblatex>=3.3版本的选项设置 + + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项 + % gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru + % gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr + % gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序 + {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}% + \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}% + {% + \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}% + {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}% + {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}% + }% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder} + + \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序 + \gdef\lancnorder{4} + \gdef\lanjporder{5} + \gdef\lankrorder{6} + \gdef\lanenorder{1} + \gdef\lanfrorder{2} + \gdef\lanruorder{3}} + + \newcounter{lanordernum} + \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr + \setcounter{lanordernum}{0} + \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;} + \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}} + \parsinglanorder{#1} + } + + % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项 + % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串 + % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串 + % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串 + % v1.0o，20190103，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal} + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal} + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}% + } + %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置 + + + % + % 增加序号标签格式处理选项，作者年制不做处理，给出只为兼容选项考虑 + % v1.0l,20180623,hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{} + + % + % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项 + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}%family-given + \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{quanpin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{6}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt} + + % + % 增加标签对齐选项 + % + %因为在作者年制中，不需要使用，这里也增加，为了与顺序编码制的兼容性考虑。 + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{}% + + + + + } + { + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项 + % biblatex 3.4及以下版本不能使用多个stylesourcemap，所以不使用该选项 + % 这里给出仅为兼容性考虑 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{} + + % + % 增加序号标签格式处理选项，作者年制不做处理，给出只为兼容选项考虑 + % v1.0l，20180623，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{} + + % + % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项 + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given + \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{quanpin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt} + + % + % 增加标签对齐选项 + % + %因为在作者年制中，不需要使用，这里也增加，为了与顺序年制的兼容性考虑。 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbalign}[right]{}% + + } + + +% +% 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置，比如texlive2015中的3.0版 +% +\defversion{3.0}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + firstinits = true, %名字有缩写，参考3.1.2.3 Internal + } +} +% +% 针对3.3<=biblatex<3.5版本的选项设置，比如texlive2016中的3.4版 +% +\defversion{3.4}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits = true, + } +} +% +% 针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版 +% +\defversion{3.7}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits = true, + urldate =edtf, + eventdate =edtf, + } +} +% +% 针对3.10<=biblatex版本的选项设置，比如texlive2018中的3.11版 +% +\defversion{3.10}{opt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits = true, + urldate =gb7714-2015,%iso + eventdate =gb7714-2015,%iso + } +} + +% +% 针对3.13<=biblatex版本的选项设置，因为内容有限，所以不再增加版本区分，而用时间直接判断 +% +% 解决国标中“王临慧, 2010a.”和“王临慧, 等, 2010b.”的问题 +% 在没有这个选项之前无法加上a和b +% v1.0s，20190828 +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/08/16}{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{% + nohashothers=true}}{} + +% +% 根据biblatex版本信息，选择选项设置 +% +% 原理方法:如下这种选择机制能自动兼容更新的版本，但对于老版本 +% 必须要把情况列全。 +\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{opt}}{}%biblatex<=3.2 +\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{opt}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.7 +\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{opt}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9 +\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex=3.10 +\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{opt}}{}%biblatex最新3.11 + + +%===================================================================== +%设置本地化字符串 +%===================================================================== + % + % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符 + % + \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite} + \NewBibliographyString{andcn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr} + \NewBibliographyString{andjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andkr} + \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andincite} + \NewBibliographyString{volumecn} + \NewBibliographyString{numbercn} + \NewBibliographyString{serialcn} + \NewBibliographyString{incn} + \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorcn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorscn} + \NewBibliographyString{bytranslatorcn} + + % + % 修改一些当地化字符串 + % + % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件 + % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn + % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别 + \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{ + bibliography = {\str@bibliography}, + references = {\str@references}, + bytranslatorcn= {\str@bytranslator\adddot}, %将trans. by 改成 译 + and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名见的and符号改成 逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节 + andcn = {\addcomma},%\str@andcn\ and本地化字符串的中文对应词 + andincitecn = {\str@andcn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andincite = {\addcomma}, + %andothers = {et al.}, %将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andothersincite={et al\adddot}, + backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:}, + backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:}, + in={in\intitlepunct}, + volumecn={\str@volumecn}, + numbercn={\str@numbercn}, + serialcn={\str@serialcn}, + andothersjp={他}, + andotherskr={외}, + andjp={和}, + andkr={和}, + incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace}, + mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn}, + phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn}, + editorscn={\str@editorcn}, + editorcn={\str@editorcn}, + } + + % + % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串 + % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串 + % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内 + % v1.0t，hzz，20190525 + \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}} + \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}} + +%===================================================================== +% 动态数据修改 +%===================================================================== +% +% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中 +% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性 +% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个 +% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次 +% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。 +% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符， +% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息 +% +% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法： +% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名 +% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射 +% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。 +% +% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下： +% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换 +% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动 +% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名 +% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type +% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换 +% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射 +% +% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下： +% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article +% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook +% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理 +% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理 +% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型 +% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型 +% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期 +% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型 +% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略， +% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型 +% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时， +% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。 +% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述 +% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式 +% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理： +% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物 +% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report +% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型 +% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。 +% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献 +% 10. 日期以如下方式处理： +% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year +% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate +% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date +% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate + +\DeclareSourcemap{ +\maps[datatype=bibtex]{% + \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author + \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除 + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除 + %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有 + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author + \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor + } + \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author + \pernottype{inbook} + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author + \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator + } + \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名 + %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。 + %\step[notfield=address,final] + \step[fieldsource=location,final] + \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval] + } + \map{%让address和location同步 + %\step[notfield=location,final] + \step[fieldsource=address,final] + \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况 + \step[fieldsource=mark,final] + \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=quanpin,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={6}] + } + \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{article} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + } + \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{periodical} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor + \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{newspaper} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断 + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{database} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{dataset} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{software} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{map} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{archive} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以 + %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldsource=url,final] + \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]% + } + \map{ + \pertype{book} + \pertype{inbook} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}] + \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition + \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval] + } + \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{standard} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断 + } + \map{ + \pertype{patent} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}] + } + \map{ + \pertype{inproceedings} + \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{proceedings} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{incollection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{collection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{report} + \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{thesis} + \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型 + \pertype{phdthesis} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{online} + \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型 + \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册 + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{manual} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version + \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{unpublished} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}] + } + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况 + %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。 + %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息 + \step[fieldsource=year] + \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval] + } + \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用 + \step[fieldsource=entrykey] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题 + \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]% + \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=title,final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%作者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=author,final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%译者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=translator,final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=editor,final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定 + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval] + }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。 + \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。 + \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断， + %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况， + %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd + \step[fieldsource=language] + \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval] + } + \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分 + %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder] + } + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder] + } + \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook， + %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义 + %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断 + \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final] + } + \map{%剩下的全部映射为book + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final] + } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis] +% } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis] +% } + \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 + \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final] + %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport] + } + \map{% + \pertype{report} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online] + \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}] + } + \map{% + \pertype{thesis} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{manual} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{unpublished} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{database} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{dataset} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{software} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{map} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{archive} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online] + } + \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确) + \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸 + \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append] + } + \map[overwrite]{%title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization + \step[fieldsource={title}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={journaltitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={journal}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={publisher}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={address}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={location}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={institution}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource={booktitle}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}] + } + %对于高版本(3.4以上)可以用下面这一段取代前面那一段，为了兼容gbnoauthor选项，这些代码只能在sourcemap中使用，所以只能选择前面那一段 + %\map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ +% \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}] +% } +% \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ +% \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}] +% } +% \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,% +% address,location,institution,organization}]{ +% \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] +% } + } +} + +% +% 佚名/noauthor的处理 +% +% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改实现 +\def\dealnoathor{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的中文文献设置为佚名 + \step[fieldsource=language,match={chinese},final] + \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={佚名}] + } + \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的英文文献设置为A{non} + \step[fieldsource=language,match={english},final] + \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={A{non}}]%noauthor换成Anon，同时为避免大写还加了{} + } + } + } +} + +% +% 不同语言分集调整的实现方式 +% +% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序 +\def\dealsortlan{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder] + } + } + } +} + + +% +%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射 +% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual} + +%===================================================================== +% 设置排序格式 +%===================================================================== +% +% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.7及以下版本 +% +\defversion{3.7}{sort}{%这是3.4版的，3.7版略有差异，但不大，后面有注释 + \DeclareSortingScheme{gb7714-2015}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{%[direction=descending] + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的nyt + \DeclareSortingScheme{gbnytd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的ynt + \DeclareSortingScheme{gbyntd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } + + %升序的ynt + \DeclareSortingScheme{gbynta}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field[padside=left,padwidth=4,padchar=0]{volume}%3.7版是\field{volume} + \literal{0000}%3.7版是\literal{0} + } + } +} + + +% +% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本 +% +\defversion{3.8}{sort}{ + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{%[direction=descending] + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的nyt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort[direction=descending]{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的ynt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %升序的ynt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{%[direction=ascending] + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + % + % 定义命令\defdoublelangentry，用于biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理 + % + %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了， + %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息 + %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中 + \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{% + \edef\entrykeya{##1} + \edef\entrykeyb{##2} + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final] + \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb] + } + } + } + } +} + + +\ifboolexpr{ +test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}} +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}} +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%biblatex<=3.7 +}{\switchversion{3.7}{sort}}{\switchversion{3.8}{sort}}%3.8<=biblatex + + +%===================================================================== +%参考文献表环境 +%===================================================================== + +% +% 列表格式 +% +% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent +% v1.0l，20180615，hzz +\setlength{\bibhang}{1em} +\newlength{\bibitemindent} +\setlength{\bibitemindent}{-\bibhang} +\setlength{\bibitemsep}{4.5pt} +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {} + {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}} + {\endlist} + {\item} +% +% 增加一个numerical环境用于自动显示数字 +% v1.0w，20210311，hzz +\newcounter{refnumerical} +\newlength{\biblabelextend} +\defbibenvironment{numerical} + {\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}% + \setlength{\labelnumberwidth}{2em}% + \setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt}% + \setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt}% + \setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt}% + \list + {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{[\arabic{refnumerical}]}} + {\usecounter{refnumerical}% + \addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}% + \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置单元或块等的标点 +%===================================================================== +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin +\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\space} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点%来源biblatex.def +% +% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符 +% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进 +% +% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets +% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def +\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\par\nobreak}%ay样式用par也可以，因为没有悬挂对齐问题 +\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号 +%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par + +%===================================================================== +% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏 +%===================================================================== +% +% 新增文献类型标识符的格式 +% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉 +% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上 +% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + }% + {\ifentrytype{online}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + }}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}% +} + +% +% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式 +\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{} +\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{} +\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{} +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot，用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪 +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [article,patent,thesis,unpublished] + {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [inbook,incollection,inproceedings] + {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %url域修改如本行%url相关输出，源来自biblatex.def +\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily +%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样 +\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行 +\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行 +\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行 +\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{% + \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space + \ifhyperref + {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}} + {\nolinkurl{#1}}} +% +% 标题的字母大小写格式修改 +% +% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase +% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not +%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{% +\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{% +\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%页码引用格式的修改%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符 +\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}} +\DefineBibliographyExtras{russian}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}} + +\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置 +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat + [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished] + {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat + [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical] + {title}{##1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}} +} + +% +% 文献标题后的标点问题 +% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen +% +% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况: +% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于 +% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响 +% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct +\ifboolexpr{% + test{\iftoggle{iftlfive}} + or + test{\iftoggle{iftlsix}} + }{}% + {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本 + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}% + \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{} + } + + +% +% 修改译者位置格式 +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,增加对英文等其它语言译者的处理 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式 +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifnameundef{translator} + {} + {\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}} + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}% + \clearname{translator}% + %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理 + %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串 + \iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}}{}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。 + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \newunit}% + \usebibmacro{withothers}} + +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}{% + \def\abx@tempa{bytranslator}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{co}% + \clearname{commentator}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{an}% + \clearname{annotator}} + {}}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction} + {\appto\abx@tempa{in}% + \clearname{introduction}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}% + \clearname{foreword}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{af}% + \clearname{afterword}} + {}}}% +\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\bibstring{bytranslatorcn}} + {\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}} + +% +% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式 +% v1.0,20160701,hzz +% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,针对其它语言的译者后的标点与中文不同做处理 +% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。 +% \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames +\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}} + and + test \ifmorenames + }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma + {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。 + {}% +\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}% +}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如： +%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等. +%胡泳, 范海燕, 译. +%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译. +\ifcurrentname{translator}{\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理 +}} + +% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al. +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效 + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义 + \or% + \bibstring{andothersincitecn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothersincite}% + \fi} + + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{andotherscn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothers}% + \fi} + + +% +% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% +% \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\space\bibstring{andincite}\space}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\space\bibstring{and}\space}{}% +%\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andincitecn}%\space% + \or% +\space\bibstring{andincite}\space% + \fi} + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% + \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andcn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{and}\space% + \fi} + + + +% +% 重设title的输出 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件 +% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断 +\renewbibmacro*{title}{% + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令 + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它 + }}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit + }% +}} + + +% +% 作者信息的输出格式 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式 +\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{% +\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}% +{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}% +\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}% + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or +\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}% +\or + \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven} + and + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}}% +\or +\usebibmacro{name:gbquanpin} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}% +\fi + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}} + +\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式 +\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family +\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace} +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}% + \ifuseprefix% + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital% + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}% + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出 +\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} + +%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {} + {\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} +%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbquanpin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {} + {\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} + + +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2016/03/27}%biblatex<3.2版的情况 + {}{ + %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + %注意上一句\MakeCapital后面如果再跟一个{}包含#1，则没有效果，可能是包在里面少了一层展开 + %因为机构名通常包括在{}内，所以要多展开一次才行，所以这里去掉#1外面的{} + %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot + %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面 + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + %\mkbibnamelast{#1}\isdot %3.9.1 Generic Commands and Hooks，对姓重新处理，如下句: %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}\isdot + %\ifblank{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}%这句放到后面 + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}% + }% + } + + %GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}% + }% + } + + %中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamefirst{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}% + }% + } + %中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 + \renewbibmacro*{name:gbquanpin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifpunctmark{'}{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot%\MakeUppercase %\mkbibnamelast{\MakeUppercase{#1}} %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamefirst{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifblank{#2}{\MakeCapital#1}{\mkbibnamelast{\MakeCapital{#1}}}\isdot %大写，参考4.6.4 Miscellaneous Commands，\MakeUppercase %\MakeSentenceCase + \ifblank{#2#3}{}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifblank{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamefirst{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}% + \ifblank{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \addcomma\addspace% + \ifblank{#4}{}{\addcomma\addspace\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameaffix{#4}\isdot}% + }% + } + + %%biblatex<3.2版的情况，姓名的处理格式带参数 + \DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{% + \iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}% + {\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}% + \ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}% + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \or + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \or + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \ifblank{#3#5} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}% + \or + \iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \or + \usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}% + \or + \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} + {\iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:last-first}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}% + \ifblank{#3#5} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}} + {\iffirstinits + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#4}{#5}{#7}} + {\usebibmacro{name:first-last}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}}}% + \or + \usebibmacro{name:gbquanpin}{#1}{#3}{#5}{#7}% + \fi + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}} +} + +% +% url和url日期格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{% + %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面 + \iffieldundef{urlyear}% + {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{urldate}}% + \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{url}} +\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}} + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex<3.7版本 +% +\defversion{3.4}{date}{ + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printfield{urlyear}% + \iffieldundef{urlmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlmonth}}% + \iffieldundef{urlday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{urlday}}\printtext{]}} + + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%新增加一个公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期 + \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printfield{year}% + \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\printtext{\thefield{month}}% + \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}% + } + + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%替换\iffieldundef{year}，因为year总是存在，但为空 + \iffieldundef{endyear}{% + \iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{eventyear}}% + \iffieldundef{eventmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{eventmonth}}% + \iffieldundef{eventday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{eventday}}}}% + }% + }{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{endyear}}% + \iffieldundef{endmonth}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{endmonth}}% + \iffieldundef{endday}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{endday}}}}% + }% + }% + }% + {% + \iffieldundef{year}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printtext{\printfield{year}}% + \iffieldundef{month}{}{\bibrangedash\thefield{month}}% + \iffieldundef{day}{}{\bibrangedash\printfield{day}}}}% + }% + }% + }}% +} + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本 +% +\defversion{3.7}{date}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1} + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令 + + % + % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏 + % 20160701，v1.0，新增加 + % 20180405，v1.0k，为biblatexv3.7-3.9版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen + % + % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制 + % + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{% + \printtext{\blx@edtfdate{}{}}% + } + + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldundef{year}{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}% + {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}% + }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空 + }{\printtext{(}\blx@edtfdate{}{}\printtext{)}}% + }% + }}% +} + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本 +% +\defversion{3.10}{date}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1} + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令 + + % + % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏 + % 20160701，v1.0，新增加 + % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen + % + % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制 + % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份 + % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令 + % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断 + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%% + \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}% + } + + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldundef{year}{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}% + {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}% + }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空 + }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}% + }% + }}% +} + +% +% 关联文献的输出格式，针对3.9>=biblatex>=3.7版本 +% +% 原理方法:因为related宏中带有##了，所以无法封装到defversion中了。所以直接做判断 +% 下面这一段主要针对v3.8-3.10，因为我提问后，biblatex作者为3.11版增加了一个钩子控制relatedblock前的分隔符。 +\ifboolexpr{ +test{\iftoggle{iftleight}} +or +test{\iftoggle{iftlnine}} +}{\renewbibmacro*{related}{%standard.bbx + \ifboolexpr{ test {\iffieldundef{related}} or test {\ifrelatedloop} } + {} + {\usebibmacro{begrelated}% + \def\bbx@tempa{}% + \setcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}{0}% + \def\do##1{% + \entrydata{##1}{% + \ifrelatedloop + {} + {\stepcounter{bbx:relatedtotal}% + \gappto{\bbx@tempa}{##1,}}}}% + \docsvfield{related}% + \restorefield{related}{\bbx@tempa}% + \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{0} + {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{entrykey}}% + \iffieldundef{clonesourcekey} + {} + {\listcsxadd{bbx:relatedloop}{\strfield{clonesourcekey}}}% + \setcounter{bbx:relatedcount}{0}% + \def\do{% + \stepcounter{bbx:relatedcount}% + \ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedcount}}{0}%这里从1改为0 + {\ifcsundef{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\printtext{\relateddelim}} + {\printtext{\csuse{relateddelim\strfield{relatedtype}}}}} + {}}% + \ifbibmacroundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro{related:default}}} + {\appto{\do}{\usebibmacro*{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}}% + \iffieldformatundef{related:\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\def\bbx@tempa{related}} + {\def\bbx@tempa{related:\strfield{relatedtype}}}% + \iffieldformatundef{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}} + {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:default}} + {\def\bbx@tempb{relatedstring:\strfield{relatedtype}}}% + \printtext[\bbx@tempa]{% + \usebibmacro{begrelatedloop}% + \iffieldundef{relatedstring} + {\ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumgreater{\value{bbx:relatedtotal}}{1}} + and + test {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{relatedtype}s}} + } + {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{% + \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}s}}} + {\iffieldbibstring{relatedtype} + {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{% + \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedtype}}}} + {}}} + {\iffieldbibstring{relatedstring} + {\printtext[\bbx@tempb]{% + \bibstring[\mkrelatedstring]{\thefield{relatedstring}}}} + {\printfield[\bbx@tempb]{relatedstring}}}% + \docsvfield{related}% + \usebibmacro{endrelatedloop}}}% + {}% + \usebibmacro{endrelated}}} +}{} + +% +% 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex3.11 +% +% 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏 +\defversion{3.11}{related}{ +\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak} +} + +\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%biblatex<=3.2 +\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{date}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}}{}%biblatex=3.7 +\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.7}{date}}{}%3.8<=biblatex<=3.9 +\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}}{}%biblatex3.10 +\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.10}{date}\switchversion{3.11}{related}}{}%biblatex最新 + +% +% 调整doi+eprint+url格式 +% +% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。 +\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{% +% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面 +% {\printfield{doi}} +% {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}}%必须要做域判断否则容易产生多余的标点 + {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:url} + {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}} + {} + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:doi} + {\printfield{doi}} + {}} + +% +% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printfield{chapter}}% + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出 + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit %这里的标点去掉 + } + +% +% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal +% +\DeclareListFormat{location}{% + \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}% + #1\isdot} +\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location} +\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location} + +% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间， +% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz +% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date} +\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifboolexpr{% +test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}% +}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}% +{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}% +}{% +\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}% + {\printlist{location}}% +\addcolon\addspace% +\iflistundef{institution}{% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}% \bibstring{nopublisher}%[s.n.\adddot] +{\printlist{institution}}}% +\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}% + \printfield{year}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}% + \newunit}% +{ \printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{institution}% + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit}% +} +% +% 通用的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。 +% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。 +% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理 +\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% + \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }% + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}% + {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。 + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress} + {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace% + \iflistundef{publisher}{% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}% + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}% + {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}% + {\printlist{publisher}}}% +\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace% +\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点 +}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{publisher} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{publisher}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit + }% +} + +% +% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz +% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 +\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。 +{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 + \iflistundef{institution} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + %\newunit + }} + +% +% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}% +{\bibstring{volume}~#1}% +}% volume of a book +\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal + +% +% 对number册信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,% +incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}% +{#1}% +}% + +% +% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\ifinteger{#1}% +{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}% +{#1\isdot}}% +{\ifinteger{#1}% +{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}% +{#1\isdot}}} + +% +% 对version的版本信息做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{\bibtitlefont%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% + \ifinteger{#1}% + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}% + {\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}% + {#1\isdot}} + +% +% 作者域的输出控制宏 +% +% 当两篇文献作者相同且连续时，标准样式是用-代替后面的文献的作者，这里取消这一设置 +\renewbibmacro*{author}{%author for biblatex version <=3.7 + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseauthor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} + } + {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck} + {%\bibnamedash + \printnames{author}% + }% + {\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}% + \printnames{author}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {\setunit{\addspace}} + {\setunit{\addcomma\space}}}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {} + {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}% + \setunit{\addspace}}}% + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash + \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%增加一个逗号 + \usebibmacro{date+extrayear} + } + +% +% 设置标注和文献表中作者和年份之间的分隔符 +% +% 原理方法:注意3.4版已经有\nameyeardelim，上述修改的author宏虽然定义了著录表中的标点，但标注中的未定义 +% 设置因为mergedate默认为true时的情况，来自\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact +% 去掉作者后面包围年份的圆括号 +% 这里因为biblatex版本的不同，做不同的处理，texlive2017版/2016等低版本分开处理 +\defversion{3.0}{dateextra}{ +\renewcommand*{\nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{%%重设date+extrayear格式，源来自authoryear.BBX + \iffieldundef{\thefield{datelabelsource}year} + {} + {\printtext{%[parens]%这里把括号去掉 + \iffieldsequal{year}{\thefield{datelabelsource}year} + {\printdateextralabel}% + {\printfield{labelyear}% + \printfield{extrayear}}}}}% + \newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}} +} + +\defversion{3.4}{dateextra}{ + \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{%%重设date+extrayear格式，源来自authoryear.BBX + \iffieldundef{\thefield{datelabelsource}year} + {} + {\printtext{%[parens]%这里把括号去掉 + \iffieldsequal{year}{\thefield{datelabelsource}year} + {\printdateextralabel}% + {\printfield{labelyear}% + \printfield{extrayear}}}}}% + \newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}} +} +\defversion{3.7}{dateextra}{ + \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \renewbibmacro*{date+extrayear}{%以前的\printdateextralabel宏变为了\printlabeldateextra + \iffieldundef{labelyear} + {} + {\printtext{%[parens] + \iffieldsequal{year}{labelyear} + {\printlabeldateextra}% + {\printfield{labelyear}% + \printfield{extrayear}}}}}% + +\newbibmacro{date+extradate}{\usebibmacro{date+extrayear}} +} +\defversion{3.8}{dateextra}{ + \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} +%注意这里当没有作者只有标题时在年份之前的标点是否需要标准并未涉及，所以未做处理。 +\renewbibmacro*{author}{%以前的date+extrayear变为date+extradate，所以对3.8以上版本重定义一下author + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseauthor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} + } + {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck} + {%\bibnamedash %去掉相同作者用横线代替的处理 + \printnames{author}\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%把标点也带上 + } + {\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}% + \printnames{author}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}} + {\setunit{\printdelim{authortypedelim}}}}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {} + {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}}% + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash + \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% + \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}} + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{labelyear} + {} + {\printtext{%[parens]%这里去掉括号 + \iflabeldateisdate + {\printdateextra} + {\printlabeldateextra}}}}% + +} + + +% +%为mergedate增加选项none，即实现年份不提前到作者后面的标签中 +%也不打印用于区分同作者同年份文献的标识符如(a，b，c) +%目的是实现一些特殊的文献表样式比如ucas的作者年制 +%v1.0q,20190212,hzz +\def\bbx@opt@mergedate@none{% + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{labelyear} + {} + {}}%[parens]\printtext{\printlabeldateextra} +\renewbibmacro*{bbx:ifmergeddate}{\@secondoftwo}%这一句用于3.12版本 +\renewbibmacro*{date}{\printdate}%这一句用于biblatex3.11以下版本 +\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号 +\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}% + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}% + {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}}% + %\newunit + }% + } + +\iftoggle{iftlfive}{\switchversion{3.0}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex<=3.2 +\iftoggle{iftlsix}{\switchversion{3.4}{dateextra}}{}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +\iftoggle{iftlseven}{\switchversion{3.7}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex=3.7 +\iftoggle{iftleight}{\switchversion{3.8}{dateextra}}{}%<=3.8biblatex<=3.9 +\iftoggle{iftlnine}{\switchversion{3.8}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex3.10 +\iftoggle{iftlatest}{\switchversion{3.8}{dateextra}}{}%biblatex最新3.11 + +% +% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号 +% +\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}} + and + test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}} + } + {} + {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}% + \newunit%标点换成下一句 + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}% + \printfield{booktitleaddon}} + +% +% 调整期刊名的格式 +% +% 原理方法:因为作者年制年份提到前面，因此涉及到期刊名与后面的卷期的关系。 +% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz +\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{journal}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + %\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号 + \iffieldundef{series}% + {}% + {\newunit% + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}% + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + %换成逗号和空格 + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面 + %\newunit + } + +% +% 增加一个number带括号的格式，避免使用mkbibparens而引入一个不必要的空格 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{addnumflag}{% +\nobreak\printtext{(}\nobreak #1\nobreak\printtext{)}} + +% +% 调整journal输出 +% +% 原理方法:首先判断子标题，然后再设置标点。 +% 避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在时需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格 +\renewbibmacro*{journal}{% + \iffieldundef{journaltitle}% + {}% + {\printtext[journaltitle]{% + \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}% + \iffieldundef{journalsubtitle}{}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}} + + + +% +% 调整期刊卷和期的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx +\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{% + \printfield{volume}% + \setunit*{\adddot}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}{% + \printfield{volume}% + %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号 + %\printfield{number}% + \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield[addnumflag]{number}}%区别于顺序编码制 + \iffieldundef{eid}{}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}}} + +% +% 调整期刊年份的格式 +% +% 原理方法:原在authoryear.BBX中\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact中定义 +% 当issue存在时，才设置newunit。避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在是需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格 + \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{% + \iffieldundef{issue}% + {}% + {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}\newunit}}} + + + +% +% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx + %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{ + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit + } + +% +% 编者的符号修改一下 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editor}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck} + {%\bibnamedash + \printnames{editor}% + } + {\printnames{editor}% + %\setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}% + %\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash} + }% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}% + %\clearname{editor}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}% + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash + \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% + \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}% + \ifboolexpr{% +test {\ifentrytype{inbook}} +or +test {\ifentrytype{incollection}} +or +test {\ifentrytype{inproceedings}} +or +test {\ifentrytype{conference}} +}% +{}% +{\usebibmacro{date+extradate}}} + +% +% 编者类型做一修改 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \printtext[editortype]{% + \iffieldundef{editortype} + {% +% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理 +% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} +% or +% test {\ifandothers{editor}} +% } +% {\bibstring{editors}} +% {\bibstring{editor}} + } + {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改 + {\ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} + or + test {\ifandothers{editor}} + } + {\printdelim{streditortypes}} + {\printdelim{streditortype}}} + {\thefield{editortype}}}% + }} + +% +% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符 +% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等 +% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串 +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}% + \fi} +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}% + \fi} + + +% +% bookauthor域的输出， +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替， +% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype +\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}% + {\ifnameundef{editor}% + {}% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}% + {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}% + }% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}% + {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}% + }% +} + +% +% 修改期刊的标题 +% +\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \iffieldundef{title} + {} + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct} + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + %}%把编组结束移到后面去 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母 + \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{} + }} + } + +% +% 期刊的标题做修改 +% +\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{periodical}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点 + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改 +\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字 + \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}% + \iffieldundef{volume}% + {\printfield{year}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}% + \printfield{year}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolfirst}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{% + \printfield{endyear}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolsecond}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit} + +% +% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份 +% +\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{% + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + {\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + }% + %\newunit +} + +% +% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去 +% +\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and% + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit + }% +}% +} + + + +% +% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型 +% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz +% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz +% +% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。 +\renewbibmacro*{in:}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace + {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}% + \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}% + }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct + +% +% 修改type域的输出格式 +% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz +% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文 +\DeclareFieldFormat{type}% +{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}% + {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}% +} + + +% +% 修改series域的输出格式 +% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz +\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{% + \printfield{series}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}% + %\newunit + } + +%===================================================================== +%设置驱动格式 +%===================================================================== +% +% book条目类的驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件 + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% +\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\newunit +\printlist{language}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{byauthor}% +\newunit\newblock}% +\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +\newunit +\printfield{edition}% +\newunit\newblock%% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\iffieldundef{maintitle}% +{\printfield{volume}% +\printfield{part}}% +{}% +\newunit% +\printfield{volumes}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{series+number}}% +\newunit\newblock% +%\printfield{note}% +%\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% +%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉 +\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， +\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。 + \newunit\newblock% + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + + + +% +% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物 + \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}% +% \newunit +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit + \usebibmacro{note+pages}% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期 + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 连续出版物的驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{editor}% + %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock + \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行 + \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}% + \newunit\newblock% + \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间 + \newunit\newblock%添加这一行 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock} + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 专利文献驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + %\usebibmacro{title}% + \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理 + \iflistundef{location} + {} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext{%[parens] + \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byholder}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{newsdate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 在线文献驱动 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit\newblock +% \printlist{organization}% + \printlist{institution}% + \newunit\newblock +\ifboolexpr{% +test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% +}{\usebibmacro{date}}% +{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\usebibmacro{eprint}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + + + +% +% 报告类型驱动 +% 当有网址无出版项时，用online输出 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 论文、手册类型驱动 +% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{% + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + }{}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 备选类型驱动 +% +% 利用biblatex的misc驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + + + + +% +% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{title}% +\usebibmacro{in:}% +%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}% + \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}% + }{\newunit}%替换下一句 + %\newunit\newblock +\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加 + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% +\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}% +\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息 + \newunit\newblock% +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit\newblock + \printfield{edition}% + \newunit + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +% \iffieldundef{maintitle} +% {\printfield{volume}% +% \printfield{part}} +% {}% +% \newunit +% \printfield{volumes}% +% \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{series+number} + }% + \newunit\newblock + %\printfield{note}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx index 077b5c8bb94..b5c3a34dd86 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ay.cbx @@ -1,429 +1,429 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,author year sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ay.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
-
-%
-% 加载标准样式
-%
-\RequireCitationStyle{authoryear-comp}
-
-
-%
-% 增加一个控制是否将标准标签中的作者加上超链接的选项
-% 20210119,v1.0v,hzz
-\newtoggle{bbx:gblabelref}
-\DeclareBibliographyOption{gblabelref}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{#1}}
-\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblabelref}
-
-
-\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- %autocite = superscript ,
- %autopunct = true ,
- %sorting = none ,
- maxcitenames=1,
- mincitenames=1,
- uniquename=init,%因为使用了名字缩写选项，所以需要设置uniquename=init而不是full避免冲突
- uniquelist=minyear
-}
-
-%
-% 选项设置，针对3.7以下版本
-%
-% 原理方法:labeldate用于控制是否给引用标签提供日期的成分
-\defversion{3.4}{cbxopt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- labeldate=true
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 选项设置，针对3.7以上版本
-%
-% 原理方法:labeldateparts用于控制是否给引用标签提供日期的成分
-\defversion{3.7}{cbxopt}{
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- labeldateparts=true
- }
-}
-
-\ifboolexpr{%选择选项设置
-test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}}%biblatex<=3.2
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-}{\switchversion{3.4}{cbxopt}}{\switchversion{3.7}{cbxopt}}%else: biblatex>=3.7
-
-
-\ifboolexpr{%兼容cite:labelyear+extrayear
-test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}}%biblatex<=3.2
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6
-or
-test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%3.7=biblatex
-}{\newbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{\usebibmacro{cite:labelyear+extrayear}}}{}%else: biblatex>3.7
-
-%textcite标注命令中的标点设置，注意只针对textcite命令。
-% v-old
-% v1.0t，20200320，hzz，修改如下
-% 在cbx中增加标注中的nameyeardelim标点定义，避免bbx使用其它样式时出现问题
-% 同时设置textcite的nameyeardelim为一个短空格，似乎原来直接连上去的不够美观
-\DeclareDelimFormat[cite,parencite,pagescite]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}%\addcomma\space
-\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{\addthinspace}%\addcomma\space
-\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\addthinspace}{\addspace}}%
-\AtEveryCitekey{%
-\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
-}
-
-%
-% 修订使可用选项gblabelref来控制是否将标准标签中的作者加上超链接
-% 20210119,v1.0v,hzz
-\iftoggle{iftlatest}%
-{\renewbibmacro*{cite}{%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
- {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
-\renewbibmacro*{textcite}{%
- \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}
- {\ifnameundef{labelname}
- {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}%
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}%
- \setunit{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \printdelim{nameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}%
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {}%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}%
- \stepcounter{textcitecount}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}%
- \setunit{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
- {}%
- \textcitedelim}}}{}
-
-
-
-%
-% 重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签
-%
-% 原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)，
-% 于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格
-\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{%
- \iffieldundef{label}%
- {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}%
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}}
-
-%
-% 重定义cite命令
-%
-% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
-% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {%(
- )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-%
-% 定义upcite命令
-% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:与cite命令相同
-\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{%
- \cite}
-
-%
-% 重定义parencite命令
-%
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
-% \iffieldundef{postnote}%
-% {}%
-% {\nopunct%
-% \printfield{postnote}}}%
-% (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{cite}}
-% {}
-% {%(
-% )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
-
-
-%
-% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 新增\pagescite引用命令
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {\thefield{pages}}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- (\usebibmacro{prenote}%)
- }%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {%(
- )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
-
-%
-% 定义yearpagescite，用于当文中作者已经存在，需要页码和年份的情况
-%
-% 原理:增加一个命令yearpagescite
-% 参考biblatex.DEF中的\DeclareCiteCommand*{\citeyear}命令
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {\thefield{pages}}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- \printtext{(}\usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%\printfield{year}\printfield{extrayear}
- {\multicitedelim}%
- {\printtext{)}\textsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}}
-
-%
-% 定义yearcite，用于当文中作者已经存在，仅需要年份的情况
-%
-% 原理:增加一个命令yearcite
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}%仅输出年份，不要页码
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \printtext{(}\usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%\printfield{year}\printfield{extrayear}
- {\multicitedelim}%
- {\printtext{)}}
-
-%
-% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码
-% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 为与顺序编码制兼容，增加了命令，定义与citet相同
-\newbibmacro*{citeta}{%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
- {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}%%
- %\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%
- (\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate})%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{citeta}}
- {}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-%
-% 增加如下多个命令
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义
-% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突
-
-%同\authornumcite
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}%
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
-% \iffieldundef{postnote}%
-% {}%
-% {\thefield{postnote}}}%
-% \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{citet}}
-% {}
-% {%(
-% )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
-% }
-
-
-%
-% 重定义citet，因为前面与\authornumcite同定义的命令无法正确处理多个bibtexkey同时给出的压缩情况
-% 20200721，v1.0v，hzz
-% 方法:利用textcite命令进行定义
-% 基本利用textcite命令来写citet，仅利用bool{cbx:incitet}做判断，进而处理不同的页码形式
-\newbool{cbx:incitet}
-\newbibmacro*{citet:postnote}{%
- \ifthenelse{\value{multicitecount}=\value{multicitetotal}}
- {\setunit{}%
- \printtext{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
- {}}}
- {\setunit{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
- {}%
- \textcitedelim}}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%
- }
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{textcite}}
- {}
- {\ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\usebibmacro{citet:postnote}}{\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}}}
-
- \newrobustcmd{\cbx@citet@init}[2]{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:incitet}%
- \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}%
- \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}%
- \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty}
-
- \renewrobustcmd{\cbx@textcite@init}[2]{%
- \global\boolfalse{cbx:incitet}%
- \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}%
- \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}%
- \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty}
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}[\cbx@citet@init\cbx@textcite]
- {\gdef\cbx@savedkeys{}%
- \citetrackerfalse%
- \pagetrackerfalse%
- \DeferNextCitekeyHook%
- \usebibmacro{cite:init}}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffirstcitekey\AND\value{multicitetotal}>0}
- {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{()(\thefield{multipostnote})}%
- \global\clearfield{multipostnote}}
- {}%
- \xappto\cbx@savedkeys{\thefield{entrykey},}%
- \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {}
- {\stepcounter{textcitetotal}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}}
- {}
- {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{%
- [\thefield{prenote}][\thefield{postnote}]{\cbx@savedkeys}}}
-
-\let\cbx@citets@init\cbx@citet@init
-\pretocmd{\cbx@citets@init}{\UseNextMultiCiteHook}{}{}
-\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\citets}[\cbx@citets@init\cbx@textcites]{\citet}{}
-
-%同cite
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {%(
- )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}%
- {\textcite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}%
- {\parencite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}%
- {\parencite}
-
-
-%
-% 增加如下复数的命令，以符合biblatex的复数命令习惯
-% 20190430，v1.0r，hzz
-% citec和citecs命令是为了兼容顺序编码制。
-% authornumcites是常用命令authornumcite的复数形式
-\newrobustcmd*{\citec}%
- {\cite}
-
-\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\citecs}[]{\cite}{\multicitedelim}
-
-\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\authornumcites}[]{\authornumcite}{\multicitedelim}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,author year sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ay.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style] + +% +% 加载标准样式 +% +\RequireCitationStyle{authoryear-comp} + + +% +% 增加一个控制是否将标准标签中的作者加上超链接的选项 +% 20210119,v1.0v,hzz +\newtoggle{bbx:gblabelref} +\DeclareBibliographyOption{gblabelref}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{#1}} +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblabelref} + + +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + %autocite = superscript , + %autopunct = true , + %sorting = none , + maxcitenames=1, + mincitenames=1, + uniquename=init,%因为使用了名字缩写选项，所以需要设置uniquename=init而不是full避免冲突 + uniquelist=minyear +} + +% +% 选项设置，针对3.7以下版本 +% +% 原理方法:labeldate用于控制是否给引用标签提供日期的成分 +\defversion{3.4}{cbxopt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + labeldate=true + } +} + +% +% 选项设置，针对3.7以上版本 +% +% 原理方法:labeldateparts用于控制是否给引用标签提供日期的成分 +\defversion{3.7}{cbxopt}{ + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + labeldateparts=true + } +} + +\ifboolexpr{%选择选项设置 +test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}}%biblatex<=3.2 +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +}{\switchversion{3.4}{cbxopt}}{\switchversion{3.7}{cbxopt}}%else: biblatex>=3.7 + + +\ifboolexpr{%兼容cite:labelyear+extrayear +test {\iftoggle{iftlfive}}%biblatex<=3.2 +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlsix}}%3.3<=biblatex<=3.6 +or +test {\iftoggle{iftlseven}}%3.7=biblatex +}{\newbibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}{\usebibmacro{cite:labelyear+extrayear}}}{}%else: biblatex>3.7 + +%textcite标注命令中的标点设置，注意只针对textcite命令。 +% v-old +% v1.0t，20200320，hzz，修改如下 +% 在cbx中增加标注中的nameyeardelim标点定义，避免bbx使用其它样式时出现问题 +% 同时设置textcite的nameyeardelim为一个短空格，似乎原来直接连上去的不够美观 +\DeclareDelimFormat[cite,parencite,pagescite]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}%\addcomma\space +\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{\addthinspace}%\addcomma\space +\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\addthinspace}{\addspace}}% +\AtEveryCitekey{% +\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% +} + +% +% 修订使可用选项gblabelref来控制是否将标准标签中的作者加上超链接 +% 20210119,v1.0v,hzz +\iftoggle{iftlatest}% +{\renewbibmacro*{cite}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}} + {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}} +\renewbibmacro*{textcite}{% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \printdelim{nameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\iffieldundef{labelyear} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}% + \stepcounter{textcitecount}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}% + \setunit{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {}% + \textcitedelim}}}{} + + + +% +% 重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签 +% +% 原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)， +% 于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格 +\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{% + \iffieldundef{label}% + {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}% + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}} + +% +% 重定义cite命令 +% +% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode} +% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%) + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {%( + )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + +% +% 定义upcite命令 +% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:与cite命令相同 +\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{% + \cite} + +% +% 重定义parencite命令 +% +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite} +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% +% \iffieldundef{postnote}% +% {}% +% {\nopunct% +% \printfield{postnote}}}% +% (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%) +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{cite}} +% {} +% {%( +% )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}} + + +% +% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +% 原理方法: +% 新增\pagescite引用命令 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {\thefield{pages}}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + (\usebibmacro{prenote}%) + }% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {%( + )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}} + +% +% 定义yearpagescite，用于当文中作者已经存在，需要页码和年份的情况 +% +% 原理:增加一个命令yearpagescite +% 参考biblatex.DEF中的\DeclareCiteCommand*{\citeyear}命令 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {\thefield{pages}}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + \printtext{(}\usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%\printfield{year}\printfield{extrayear} + {\multicitedelim}% + {\printtext{)}\textsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}} + +% +% 定义yearcite，用于当文中作者已经存在，仅需要年份的情况 +% +% 原理:增加一个命令yearcite +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}%仅输出年份，不要页码 + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \printtext{(}\usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%\printfield{year}\printfield{extrayear} + {\multicitedelim}% + {\printtext{)}} + +% +% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码 +% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 为与顺序编码制兼容，增加了命令，定义与citet相同 +\newbibmacro*{citeta}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}} + {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\iftoggle{bbx:gblabelref}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printnames{labelname}}}{\printnames{labelname}}%% + %\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}% + (\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate})% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citeta}} + {} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + +% +% 增加如下多个命令 +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义 +% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突 + +%同\authornumcite +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}% +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% +% \iffieldundef{postnote}% +% {}% +% {\thefield{postnote}}}% +% \usebibmacro{prenote}}% +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{citet}} +% {} +% {%( +% )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} +% } + + +% +% 重定义citet，因为前面与\authornumcite同定义的命令无法正确处理多个bibtexkey同时给出的压缩情况 +% 20200721，v1.0v，hzz +% 方法:利用textcite命令进行定义 +% 基本利用textcite命令来写citet，仅利用bool{cbx:incitet}做判断，进而处理不同的页码形式 +\newbool{cbx:incitet} +\newbibmacro*{citet:postnote}{% + \ifthenelse{\value{multicitecount}=\value{multicitetotal}} + {\setunit{}% + \printtext{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {}}} + {\setunit{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {}% + \textcitedelim}}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + \mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}% + } + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cbx@textcite} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{textcite}} + {} + {\ifbool{cbx:incitet}{\usebibmacro{citet:postnote}}{\usebibmacro{textcite:postnote}}} + + \newrobustcmd{\cbx@citet@init}[2]{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:incitet}% + \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}% + \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}% + \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty} + + \renewrobustcmd{\cbx@textcite@init}[2]{% + \global\boolfalse{cbx:incitet}% + \setcounter{textcitetotal}{0}% + \setcounter{textcitecount}{0}% + \def\cbx@savedcites{#1}#2\cbx@savedcites\empty} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}[\cbx@citet@init\cbx@textcite] + {\gdef\cbx@savedkeys{}% + \citetrackerfalse% + \pagetrackerfalse% + \DeferNextCitekeyHook% + \usebibmacro{cite:init}} + {\ifthenelse{\iffirstcitekey\AND\value{multicitetotal}>0} + {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{()(\thefield{multipostnote})}% + \global\clearfield{multipostnote}} + {}% + \xappto\cbx@savedkeys{\thefield{entrykey},}% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {} + {\stepcounter{textcitetotal}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}} + {} + {\protected@xappto\cbx@savedcites{% + [\thefield{prenote}][\thefield{postnote}]{\cbx@savedkeys}}} + +\let\cbx@citets@init\cbx@citet@init +\pretocmd{\cbx@citets@init}{\UseNextMultiCiteHook}{}{} +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\citets}[\cbx@citets@init\cbx@textcites]{\citet}{} + +%同cite +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%) + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {%( + )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + +\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}% + {\textcite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}% + {\parencite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}% + {\parencite} + + +% +% 增加如下复数的命令，以符合biblatex的复数命令习惯 +% 20190430，v1.0r，hzz +% citec和citecs命令是为了兼容顺序编码制。 +% authornumcites是常用命令authornumcite的复数形式 +\newrobustcmd*{\citec}% + {\cite} + +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\citecs}[]{\cite}{\multicitedelim} + +\DeclareMultiCiteCommand{\authornumcites}[]{\authornumcite}{\multicitedelim} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx index 3c5fe9097a9..635eeed2a8a 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.bbx @@ -1,2735 +1,2760 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,numerical sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-
-%
-% 版本和时间信息
-%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ms.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 加载标准样式
-%=====================================================================
-\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp}
-\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 功能函数
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % biblatex版本判断
- % 20180629，v1.0k，hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:适用于3.10以上版本的biblatex，否则给出警告
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/28}{}{
- \blx@warning@noline{%
- biblatex version is too old for this style\MessageBreak
- if errors raised，Please update biblatex to the latest version.}
- }
-
-
- %
- % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成
- % v1.0k,20180509,hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏
- % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8
- % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。
- %
- % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中，
- % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断
- \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt}
- \def\testCJKfirst#1{%
- \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}}
-
- %
- % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号
- \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}%
- {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}%
- }
-
-
- %
- % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}%
- {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}%
- }
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 数据模型定义
-%=====================================================================
- %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。
- %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
- %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
- %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
- %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
-
- %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型
- %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时
- %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式
- %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14
- \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}%
- }{}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置宏包选项
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项
- % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息
- % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote}
- %
- %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏
- %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式
- \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
- \printtext{\addspace(#1)}%
- }
- \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}%
- {\iffieldundef{annotation}%
- {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}%
- {\printfield{annotation}}}%
- {}%
- }
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
- % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项
- % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage}
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
- % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz
- % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
- % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式
- % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
-
- %%
- \newlength{\footbibmargin}
- \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
- \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
- \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
- \def\execgbfootbib%
- {%
- %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true}
- %
- %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐
- \AtEndPreamble{
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{
- %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
- %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
- %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
- %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
- %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
-
- %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
- %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
- %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
- %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}%
- {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器
-
-\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }
-
- \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
- \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
-
- }
-
- %
- %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
- \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}}
- %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标
- \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{%
- \def\@makefnmark{%
- \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}%
- }%
- }{}{}
- }
-
- %
- %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
- %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
- %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
- \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
- \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
- {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
- {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
- \@makefnmark%
- }}%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- }}%
- }%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
- }}%
- }
-
- %
- %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求
- \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]%
- {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器
- \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{postnote}}}%与ay样式不同，由于已修改postnote域格式，直接用printfield
- }%
- {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}%
- \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%
- {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}\nopunct}%
- {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}%
- }%
- {\multicitedelim}%
- {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式
- % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz
- % 原理方法:
- % 当gbstyle=true，则所有的文献使用国标样式，否则仅中文文献使用国标样式
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbstyle}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbstyle}{#1}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的
- % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype}
- %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档
- % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def
- % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用
- % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。
- % 另外注意：
- % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码
- % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常
- % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。
- \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}}
-
- \def\str@bibliography{参考文献}
- \def\str@references{参考文献}
- \def\str@bytranslator{译}
- \def\str@andotherscn{等}
- \def\str@backrefpage{引用页}
- \def\str@backrefpages{引用页}
- \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详}
- \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详}
- \def\str@edition{版}
- \def\str@volumecn{卷}
- \def\str@numbercn{册}
- \def\str@serialcn{第}
- \def\str@sameentry{同}
- \def\str@incn{见}
- \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
- \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
- \def\str@editorcn{主编}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK}
- \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def}
- }{}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息
- % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式
- % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。
- % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接
- \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项
- % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置
- \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{%
- \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{%
- \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}%
- \abx@dostrings
- \csuse{abx@strings@#1}%
- \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}%
- \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i
- \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}%
- }
- }{}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域
- % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}%
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。
- %
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{%
- %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}}
-
- %
- % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项
- %
- % 原理方法:在顺序编码制中不需要使用,为与作者年制的兼容性考虑,这里也增加避免报错
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{}%
-
-
- %
- %为日期控制格式增加一个gb7714-2015选项
- %
- \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{%
- \begingroup
- \blx@metadateinfo{#1}%
- \iffieldundef{#1year}
- {}
- {\printtext[#1date]{%
- \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}%
- \endgroup}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{%
- \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}%
- \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}}
-
- %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器
- \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase}
- \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase}
- %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}}
- %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbalignlabel}
- \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel}
- %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase}
- \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase}
- \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase}
- \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase}
-
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项
- % numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{}
-
-
- %
- % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
- % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
- % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串
- % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串
- % v1.0o，20190103，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}%
- }
-
- %
- % 增加序号标签格式处理选项
- % v1.0l，20180623，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{%
- \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1}
- }
-
- %
- % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
- \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
- \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
- }
-
-
- %
- % 增加标签对齐选项
- %
- % right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{}
- }
-
-
- %
- % 选项设置
- %
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- %firstinits=true, 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置，比如texlive2015中的3.0版
- giveninits=true, %针对3.3<=biblatex<3.5版本,比如texlive2016中的3.4版
- sorting=none,
- useprefix=true, %名字的信息包括前缀
- date = year, %日期仅写到年
- maxbibnames = 3,%设置名字最大数量
- minbibnames = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量
- maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量
- minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量
- isbn=false,
- gbstyle=true,
- gbtype=true,
- gbcodegbk=false,
- gbstrict=true,
- gbtitlelink=false,
- gbfieldstd=false,
- gbpub=true,
- gbpunctin=true,
- gbbiblabel=bracket,
- gbnamefmt=uppercase,
- gbalign=right,
- gbctexset=true,
- %urldate =edtf, %针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版
- %eventdate =edtf,%针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版
- urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，针对3.10<=biblatex版本的选项设置，比如texlive2018中的3.11版
- eventdate =gb7714-2015,
- gblocal=gb7714-2015,
- }
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置本地化字符串
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符
- %
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{andcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andkr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
- \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{incn}
- \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
-
-
- %
- % 修改一些当地化字符串
- %
- % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件
- % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn
- % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别
- \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
- bibliography = {\str@bibliography},
- references = {\str@references},
- bytranslator= {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译
- and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节
- andcn = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词
- andincitecn = {\addcomma},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andincite = {\addcomma},
- %andothers = {et al.}, %将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn}, %将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andothersincite={et al\adddot},
- backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:},
- backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:},
- in={in\intitlepunct},
- volumecn={\str@volumecn},
- numbercn={\str@numbercn},
- serialcn={\str@serialcn},
- andothersjp={他},
- andotherskr={외},
- andjp={和},
- andkr={和},
- incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
- mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
- phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
- editorscn={\str@editorcn},
- editorcn={\str@editorcn},
-}
-
- %
- % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串
- % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串
- % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内
- % v1.0t，hzz，20190525
- \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}}
- \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 动态数据修改
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中
-% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性
-% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个
-% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次
-% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。
-% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符，
-% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息
-%
-% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法：
-% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名
-% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射
-% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。
-%
-% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下：
-% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换
-% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动
-% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名
-% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type
-% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换
-% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射
-%
-% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下：
-% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article
-% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook
-% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理
-% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理
-% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型
-% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型
-% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更细日期
-% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型
-% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略，
-% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型
-% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时，
-% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。
-% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述
-% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式
-% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理：
-% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物
-% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report
-% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型
-% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。
-% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献
-% 10. 日期以如下方式处理：
-% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year
-% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate
-% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date
-% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate
-
-\DeclareSourcemap{%\perdatasource{examples.bib}
-\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
- \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除
- %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor
- }
- \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名
- %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。
- \step[notfield=address,final]%
- \step[fieldsource=location,final]
- \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \step[notfield=location,final]%
- \step[fieldsource=address,final]
- \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况
- \step[fieldsource=mark,final]
- \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}]
- }
- \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{article}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- }
- \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{periodical}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor
- \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{newspaper}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{database}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{dataset}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{software}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{map}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{archive}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以
- %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]
- \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]%
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{book}
- \pertype{inbook}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}]
- \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
- \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{standard}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{patent}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{inproceedings}
- \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{proceedings}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{incollection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{collection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{report}
- \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{thesis}
- \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型
- \pertype{phdthesis}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{online}
- \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型
- \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{manual}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version
- \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{unpublished}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况
- %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。
- %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息
- \step[fieldsource=year]
- \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题
- \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%
- \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=title,final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%作者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=author,final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%译者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=translator,final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=editor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]
- }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。
- \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。
- \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断，
- %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况，
- %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd
- \step[fieldsource=language]
- \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
-}
-}
-
-
- %
- % 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作
- %
- % 原理方法:biblatex3.4以上版本map可使用foreach选项来处理特殊字符
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
- %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
- %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断
- \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final]
- }
- \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为book，standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]%当不存在booktitle域是映射为book
- }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-% }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-% }
- \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置
- \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
- %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{report}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online]
- \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{thesis}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{manual}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{unpublished}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{database}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{dataset}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{software}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{map}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{archive}
- \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确)
- \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸
- \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,%
- address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- }
- }
-
-%
-%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 参考文献表环境
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 列表格式
-%
-% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent
-% v1.0l，20180615，hzz
-% v1.0t,20200319,hzz,增加尺寸\biblabelextend使某些字体下标签宽度不足时可增加标签宽度
-\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}%
-\newlength{\bibitemindent}
-\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt}
-\newlength{\biblabelextend}
-\setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt}
-
-
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
- {\list
- {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printfield{labelnumber}}}
- {\addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}%
- \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}%
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}%
- \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}}
- {\endlist}
- {\item}
-
-%
-% 顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理
-%
-% 原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择
-% 左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度
-% 项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。
-% 左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变
-% 右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变
-% 项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等
-% 修改序号标签格式为:
-% \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX
-% \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{%
-\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐
- \mkgbnumlabel{#1}%
-\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐
- \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill%
-\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间
- \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil%
-\fi}
-
-%
-% 修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。
-\def\setaligngbstyle{%
-\def\blx@bibitem##1{%
- \blx@ifdata{##1}
- {\begingroup
- \blx@getdata{##1}%
- \blx@bibcheck
- \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{%
- \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}%
- \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty
- \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype
- \blx@setoptions@entry
- \blx@thelabelnumber
- \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne
- \blx@initsep
- \blx@namesep
- \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax
-% \blx@initsep %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制
-% \blx@namesep
- \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}%
- \blx@execute
- \blx@initunit
- \blx@anchor
- \blx@beglangbib
- \bibsentence
- \blx@pagetracker
- \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype
- \blx@postpunct
- \blx@endlangbib}%
- \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par
- {}}
-\newlength{\lengthid}
-\newlength{\lengthlw}
-\newcommand{\itemcmd}{%
-\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}}
-\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep}
-\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth}
-\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid}
-\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用
-%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw
-\hangindent\lengthid
-\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}%
-\hspace{\biblabelsep}}
-%
-% 简单的段落环境
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
-{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}}
-{\endgroup}
-{\itemcmd}}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置单元或块等的标点
-%=====================================================================
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin
-\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def，
-%
-% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符
-% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进
-%
-% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets
-% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def
-\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
-\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号
-%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 新增文献类型标识符的格式
-% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉
-% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上
-% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- }%
- {\ifentrytype{online}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- }}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式
-\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{}
-
-%
-% 作者信息的输出格式
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式
-\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
-\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
-{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
-\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
-\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}%
-\or
- \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}}%
-\fi
- \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
-
-\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式
-\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family
-\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace}
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%
- \ifuseprefix%
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
-}
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
-\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
-}
-
-%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}
- {\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
-}
-
-
-\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily
-%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样
-\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行
-\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行
-\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行
-\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{%
- \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space
- \ifhyperref
- {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
- {\nolinkurl{#1}}}
-
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线
-
-%
-% beamer中文献标题后的标点问题
-% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen
-%
-% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况:
-% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于
-% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响
-% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct
-\@ifclassloaded{beamer}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}%
- \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{}
-
-
- %
- % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
- % 20160701，v1.0，新增加
- % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
- %
- % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
- % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份
- % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令
- % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用自定义的\blx@gbdate，以避免版本判断
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%
- \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}%
- }
-
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldundef{year}{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
- {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
- }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
- }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
- }%
- }}%
-
-
- %
- % biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理
- %
- %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了，
- %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息
- %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中
- \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{%
- \edef\entrykeya{#1}
- \edef\entrykeyb{#2}
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final]
- \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb]
- }
- }
- }
- }
-
- % 关联文献的输出格式
- %
- % 关联文献间的分隔符
- %
- \renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题
- %
- % 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>3.11
- %
- % 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏
- \ifdef{\begrelateddelim}{\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}}{}
-
-
-
-%
-% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份
-%
-\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{%
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- {\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- }%
- %\newunit
-}
-
-%
-% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and%
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
- }%
-}%
-}
-
-%
-% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
-% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
-% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
- \fi}%
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
- \fi}%
-
-
-%
-% 修改series域的输出格式
-% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz
-\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
- \printfield{series}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%=====================================================================
-%设置驱动格式
-%=====================================================================
-
-%中文环境的局部化代码
-\def\localsetchinesecode{%
-\ifboolexpr{%
-togl{bbx:gbstyle} or test {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}}%
-}%
-{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{}{%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{##1\adddot\addthinspace}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{##1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{##1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{##1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{##1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [article,patent,thesis,unpublished]%
- {title}{##1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [inbook,incollection,inproceedings]%
- {title}{##1}%\nopunct\unspace
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{##1}}%%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def
-%
-% 标题的字母大小写格式修改
-%
-% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase
-% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not
-%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital##1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{%
-\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital##1}{%
-\href{\thefield{url}}{##1}}}{\MakeCapital##1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{##1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}
-}%
-%
-% 修改译者位置格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式
-\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{%
- \ifnameundef{translator}%
- {}%
- {%\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}%
- \clearname{translator}%
- %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理
- %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \newunit}%
- \usebibmacro{withothers}}%
-%
-% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式
-% v1.0,20160701,hzz
-% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim
-%
-% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。
-\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}}%
- and
- test \ifmorenames
- }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%
- {\finalandcomma}%
- {}%
-\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
-}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
-%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
-%胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
-%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
-}}%
-%
-% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andotherscn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothers}%
- \fi}%
-%
-% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
- \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andcn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{and}\space%
- \fi}%
-%
-% url和url日期格式
-%
- \renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{%
- %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面
- \iffieldundef{urlyear}%
- {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{urldate}}%
- \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{url}}%
- \renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}}%
-%
-% 重设title的输出
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
-% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
-\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它
- }}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
-}%
-}}%
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex<3.7版本
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1}%
-\renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
-\addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
-%
-% 调整doi+eprint+url格式
-%
-% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。
-\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{%
-% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面
-% {\printfield{doi}}
-% {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}}
- {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}
- {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
- {}
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:doi}
- {\printfield{doi}}
- {}}%
-%
-% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printfield{chapter}}%
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit %这里的标点去掉
-}%
-%
-% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal
-%
-\DeclareListFormat{location}{%
- \usebibmacro{list:delim}{##1}%
- ##1\isdot}%
-\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location}%
-\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location}%
-% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间，
-% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz
-% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}
-\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}%
-}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}%
-{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}%
-}{%
-\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}%
- {\printlist{location}}%
-\addcolon\addspace%
-\iflistundef{institution}{%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}% \bibstring{nopublisher}%[s.n.\adddot]
-{\printlist{institution}}}%
-\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}%
- \newunit}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{institution}%
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- \newunit}%
-}%
-%
-% 通用的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。
-% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。
-% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理
-\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
- \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }%
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}%
- {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress}
- {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace%
- \iflistundef{publisher}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}%
- {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}%
- {\printlist{publisher}}}%
-\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace%
-\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点
-}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{publisher}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{publisher}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit
- }%
-}%
-%
-% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
-\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。
-{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
- \iflistundef{institution}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- %\newunit
- }}%
-%
-% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}##1\bibstring{volumecn}}%
-{\bibstring{volume}~##1}%
-}% volume of a book
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{##1}% volume of a journal
-%
-% 对number册信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{##1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,%
-incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}##1\bibstring{numbercn}}%
-{##1}%
-}%
-%
-% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\ifinteger{##1}%
-{\printtext{##1\str@edition}}%
-{##1\isdot}}%
-{\ifinteger{##1}%
-{\mkbibordedition{##1}~\bibstring{edition}}%
-{##1\isdot}}}%
-%
-% 对version的版本信息做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifinteger{##1}%
-{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{##1\str@edition}}%
-{\mkbibordedition{##1}~\bibstring{version}}}%
-{##1\isdot}}%
-%
-% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}}
- and
- test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}}
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
- \newunit%标点换成下一句
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}%
- \printfield{booktitleaddon}}%
-%
-% 调整期刊名的格式
-%
-% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{journal}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
- %换成逗号和空格
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
- %\newunit
- }%
-%
-% 调整期刊卷和期的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- \setunit*{\adddot}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
- %\printfield{number}%
- \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号
- \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}}}%
-%
-% 调整期刊年份的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}%
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}}%
- %\newunit
- }%
-%
-% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx
- %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit
- }%
-%
-% 编者的符号修改一下
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test \ifuseeditor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}%
- }%
- {\printnames{editor}%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况
- {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点
- {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}%
- %\clearname{editor}
- }%
- {}}%
-%
-% 编者类型做一修改
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \printtext[editortype]{%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}%
- {%
-% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理
-% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
-% or
-% test {\ifandothers{editor}}
-% }
-% {\bibstring{editors}}
-% {\bibstring{editor}}
- }%
- {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}}%定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
- {\ifboolexpr{%
- test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}%
- or
- test {\ifandothers{editor}}%
- }%
- {\printdelim{streditortypes}}%
- {\printdelim{streditortype}}}%
- {\thefield{editortype}}}%
- }}%
-%
-% bookauthor域的输出，
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
-% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
-\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
- {\ifnameundef{editor}%
- {}%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
- {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
- }%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
- {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
- }%
-}%
-%
-% 修改期刊的标题
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \iffieldundef{title}
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- %}%把编组结束移到后面去
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母
- \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{}%
- }}%
- }%
-%
-% 期刊的标题做修改
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{periodical}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}%
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字
- \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}%
- {\printfield{year}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolfirst}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{%
- \printfield{endyear}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolsecond}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}%
- \setunit{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \newunit}%
-%
-% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
-% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
-% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
-\renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
- {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
- \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
- }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
-%
-% 修改type域的输出格式
-% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
-% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
-\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
-{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\ifbibxstring{##1cn}{\bibxstring{##1cn}}{##1}}%
- {\ifbibstring{##1}{\bibstring{##1}}{##1}}%
-}%
-%
-% book条目类的驱动
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@book}{%%源来自standard.bbx文件
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\newunit
-\printlist{language}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
-\newunit\newblock}%
-\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-\newunit
-\printfield{edition}%
-\newunit\newblock%%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\iffieldundef{maintitle}%
-{\printfield{volume}%
-\printfield{part}}%
-{}%
-\newunit%
-\printfield{volumes}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-%\printfield{note}%
-%\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
-%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉
-\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
-\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。
- \newunit\newblock%
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@article}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物
- \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
- %\newunit
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit
- \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 连续出版物的驱动
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{editor}%
- %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock
- \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行
- \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间
- \newunit\newblock%添加这一行
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock}
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 专利文献驱动
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@patent}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- %\usebibmacro{title}%
- \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理
- \iflistundef{location}
- {}
- {\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printtext{%[parens]
- \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byholder}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{newsdate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 在线文献驱动
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@online}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit\newblock
-%\printlist{organization}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \newunit\newblock
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
-}{\usebibmacro{date}}%
-{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 报告类型驱动
-% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@report}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 手册类型驱动
-% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息
-%
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@manual}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}{}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 备选类型驱动
-%
-% 利用biblatex的misc驱动
-\csdef{blx@bbx@misc}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{howpublished}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-%
-% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改
-%
-\csdef{blx@bbx@inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{title}%
-\usebibmacro{in:}%
-%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
- \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
- }{\newunit}%替换下一句
- %\newunit\newblock
-\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加
- \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
-\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}%
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息
- \newunit\newblock%
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-% \iffieldundef{maintitle}
-% {\printfield{volume}%
-% \printfield{part}}
-% {}%
-% \newunit
-% \printfield{volumes}%
-% \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{series+number}
- }%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\printfield{note}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
-%\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}%
-}{}%
-}
-
-\AtEveryBibitem{\localsetchinesecode}%
-\AtEveryCite{\localsetchinesecode}%
-\AtEveryLositem{\localsetchinesecode}%
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,numerical sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% + +% +% 版本和时间信息 +% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ms.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style] +%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求 + + +%===================================================================== +% 加载标准样式 +%===================================================================== +\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp} +\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题 + +%===================================================================== +% 功能函数 +%===================================================================== + % + % biblatex版本判断 + % 20180629，v1.0k，hzz + % + % 原理方法:适用于3.10以上版本的biblatex，否则给出警告 + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/28}{}{ + \blx@warning@noline{% + biblatex version is too old for this style\MessageBreak + if errors raised，Please update biblatex to the latest version.} + } + + + % + % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成 + % v1.0k,20180509,hzz + % + % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏 + % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8 + % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。 + % + % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中， + % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断 + \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt} + \def\testCJKfirst#1{% + \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{% + \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}} + + % + % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号 + \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}% + {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}% + } + + + % + % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}% + {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}% + } + + +%===================================================================== +% 数据模型定义 +%===================================================================== + %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。 + %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名 + %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域 + %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域 + %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域 + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder} + + %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型 + %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时 + %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式 + %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。 + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14 + \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}% + }{} + +%===================================================================== +% 设置宏包选项 +%===================================================================== + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项 + % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息 + % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote} + % + %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏 + %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式 + \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{% + \printtext{\addspace(#1)}% + } + \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}% + {\iffieldundef{annotation}% + {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}% + {\printfield{annotation}}}% + {}% + } + + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项 + % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项 + % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage} + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表 + % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz + % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签 + % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式 + % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib} + + %% + \newlength{\footbibmargin} + \newlength{\footbiblabelsep} + \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离 + \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距 + \def\execgbfootbib% + {% + %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令 + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true} + % + %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐 + \AtEndPreamble{ + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{ + %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。 + %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接 + %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。 + %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}% + %\RequirePackage{footmisc}% + + %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码 + %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改 + %v1.0q 20190317 hzz + %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}% + {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器 + +\@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + } + + \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔 + \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1} + + } + + % + %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式 + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}} + %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标 + \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{% + \def\@makefnmark{% + \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}% + }% + }{}{} + } + + % + %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容) + %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。 + %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况 + \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{% + \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true + {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息 + {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}% + \@makefnmark% + }}% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + }}% + }% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断 + }}% + } + + % + %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求 + \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]% + {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器 + \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{postnote}}}%与ay样式不同，由于已修改postnote域格式，直接用printfield + }% + {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}% + \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}% + {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}\nopunct}% + {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}% + }% + {\multicitedelim}% + {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + + } + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式 + % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz + % 原理方法: + % 当gbstyle=true，则所有的文献使用国标样式，否则仅中文文献使用国标样式 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbstyle} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbstyle}{#1}} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项 + % + % 原理方法: + % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的 + % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype} + %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}} + + % + % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档 + % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def + % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用 + % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。 + % 另外注意： + % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码 + % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常 + % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。 + \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}} + + \def\str@bibliography{参考文献} + \def\str@references{参考文献} + \def\str@bytranslator{译} + \def\str@andotherscn{等} + \def\str@backrefpage{引用页} + \def\str@backrefpages{引用页} + \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详} + \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详} + \def\str@edition{版} + \def\str@volumecn{卷} + \def\str@numbercn{册} + \def\str@serialcn{第} + \def\str@sameentry{同} + \def\str@incn{见} + \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文} + \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文} + \def\str@editorcn{主编} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK} + \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def} + }{}} + + % + % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息 + % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式 + % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}} + + % + % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。 + % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接 + \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}} + + % + % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项 + % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置 + \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{% + \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{% + \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}% + \abx@dostrings + \csuse{abx@strings@#1}% + \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}% + \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i + \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}% + } + }{}} + + % + % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域 + % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}% + } + + % + % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。 + % + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{% + %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句 + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}} + + % + % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}} + + % + % 增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项 + % + % 原理方法:在顺序编码制中不需要使用,为与作者年制的兼容性考虑,这里也增加避免报错 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{}% + + + % + %为日期控制格式增加一个gb7714-2015选项 + % + \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@metadateinfo{#1}% + \iffieldundef{#1year} + {} + {\printtext[#1date]{% + \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}% + \endgroup} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{% + \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}% + \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}} + + %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器 + \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase} + \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase} + %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}} + %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbalignlabel} + \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel} + %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase} + \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase} + \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase} + \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase} + + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项 + % numeric样式，不使用该选项，这里给出仅为兼容性考虑 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{} + + + % + % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项 + % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串 + % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串 + % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串 + % v1.0o，20190103，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}% + } + + % + % 增加序号标签格式处理选项 + % v1.0l，20180623，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{% + \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1} + } + + % + % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项 + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given + \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family + } + + + % + % 增加标签对齐选项 + % + % right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式 + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{} + } + + + % + % 选项设置 + % + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + %firstinits=true, 针对biblatex<3.3版本的选项设置，比如texlive2015中的3.0版 + giveninits=true, %针对3.3<=biblatex<3.5版本,比如texlive2016中的3.4版 + sorting=none, + useprefix=true, %名字的信息包括前缀 + date = year, %日期仅写到年 + maxbibnames = 3,%设置名字最大数量 + minbibnames = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量 + maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量 + minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量 + isbn=false, + gbstyle=true, + gbtype=true, + gbcodegbk=false, + gbstrict=true, + gbtitlelink=false, + gbfieldstd=false, + gbpub=true, + gbpunctin=true, + gbbiblabel=bracket, + gbnamefmt=uppercase, + gbalign=right, + gbctexset=true, + %urldate =edtf, %针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版 + %eventdate =edtf,%针对3.7<=biblatex<=3.9版本的选项设置，比如texlive2017中的3.7版 + urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，针对3.10<=biblatex版本的选项设置，比如texlive2018中的3.11版 + eventdate =gb7714-2015, + gblocal=gb7714-2015, + } + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置本地化字符串 +%===================================================================== + % + % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符 + % + \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite} + \NewBibliographyString{andcn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr} + \NewBibliographyString{andjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andkr} + \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andincite} + \NewBibliographyString{volumecn} + \NewBibliographyString{numbercn} + \NewBibliographyString{serialcn} + \NewBibliographyString{incn} + \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorcn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorscn} + \NewBibliographyString{bytranslatorcn} + + + % + % 修改一些当地化字符串 + % + % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件 + % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn + % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别 + \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{ + bibliography = {\str@bibliography}, + references = {\str@references}, + bytranslatorcn = {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译 + and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节 + andcn = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词 + andincitecn = {\addcomma},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andincite = {\addcomma}, + %andothers = {et al.}, %将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn}, %将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andothersincite={et al\adddot}, + backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:}, + backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:}, + in={in\intitlepunct}, + volumecn={\str@volumecn}, + numbercn={\str@numbercn}, + serialcn={\str@serialcn}, + andothersjp={他}, + andotherskr={외}, + andjp={和}, + andkr={和}, + incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace}, + mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn}, + phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn}, + editorscn={\str@editorcn}, + editorcn={\str@editorcn}, +} + + % + % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串 + % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串 + % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内 + % v1.0t，hzz，20190525 + \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}} + \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}} + +%===================================================================== +% 动态数据修改 +%===================================================================== +% +% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中 +% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性 +% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个 +% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次 +% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。 +% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符， +% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息 +% +% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法： +% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名 +% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射 +% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。 +% +% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下： +% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换 +% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动 +% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名 +% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type +% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换 +% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射 +% +% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下： +% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article +% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook +% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理 +% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理 +% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型 +% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型 +% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更细日期 +% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型 +% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略， +% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型 +% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时， +% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。 +% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述 +% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式 +% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理： +% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物 +% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report +% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型 +% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。 +% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献 +% 10. 日期以如下方式处理： +% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year +% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate +% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date +% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate + +\DeclareSourcemap{%\perdatasource{examples.bib} +\maps[datatype=bibtex]{% + \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author + \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除 + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除 + %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有 + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author + \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor + } + \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author + \pernottype{inbook} + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author + \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator + } + \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名 + %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。 + \step[notfield=address,final]% + \step[fieldsource=location,final] + \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \step[notfield=location,final]% + \step[fieldsource=address,final] + \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况 + \step[fieldsource=mark,final] + \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}] + } + \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{article} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + } + \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{periodical} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor + \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{newspaper} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断 + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{database} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{dataset} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{software} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{map} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{archive} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以 + %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldsource=url,final] + \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]% + } + \map{ + \pertype{book} + \pertype{inbook} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}] + \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition + \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval] + } + \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{standard} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断 + } + \map{ + \pertype{patent} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}] + } + \map{ + \pertype{inproceedings} + \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{proceedings} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{incollection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{collection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{report} + \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{thesis} + \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型 + \pertype{phdthesis} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{online} + \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型 + \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册 + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{manual} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version + \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{unpublished} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}] + } + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + } + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况 + %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。 + %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息 + \step[fieldsource=year] + \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval] + } + \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用 + \step[fieldsource=entrykey] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题 + \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]% + \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=title,final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%作者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=author,final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%译者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=translator,final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=editor,final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定 + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval] + }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。 + \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。 + \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断， + %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况， + %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd + \step[fieldsource=language] + \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval] + } + \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + } +} +} + + + % + % 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作 + % + % 原理方法:biblatex3.4以上版本map可使用foreach选项来处理特殊字符 + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook， + %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义 + %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断 + \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final] + } + \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为book，standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义 + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]%当不存在booktitle域是映射为book + } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis] +% } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis] +% } + \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，将其先映射过来，并取消type设置 + \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final] + %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport] + } + \map{% + \pertype{report} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online] + \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}] + } + \map{% + \pertype{thesis} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{manual} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{unpublished} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{database} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{dataset} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{software} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{map} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{archive} + \step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online] + } + \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确) + \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸 + \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,% + address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + } + } + +% +%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射 +% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual} + + +%===================================================================== +% 参考文献表环境 +%===================================================================== +% +% 列表格式 +% +% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent +% v1.0l，20180615，hzz +% v1.0t,20200319,hzz,增加尺寸\biblabelextend使某些字体下标签宽度不足时可增加标签宽度 +\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}% +\newlength{\bibitemindent} +\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt} +\newlength{\biblabelextend} +\setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt} + + +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}}} + {\addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}% + \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +% +% 顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理 +% +% 原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择 +% 左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度 +% 项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。 +% 左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变 +% 右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变 +% 项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等 +% 修改序号标签格式为: +% \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX +% \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill} +\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{% +\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐 + \mkgbnumlabel{#1}% +\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐 + \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill% +\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间 + \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil% +\fi} + +% +% 修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。 +\def\setaligngbstyle{% +\def\blx@bibitem##1{% + \blx@ifdata{##1} + {\begingroup + \blx@getdata{##1}% + \blx@bibcheck + \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{% + \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}% + \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty + \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype + \blx@setoptions@entry + \blx@thelabelnumber + \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne + \blx@initsep + \blx@namesep + \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax +% \blx@initsep %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制 +% \blx@namesep + \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}% + \blx@execute + \blx@initunit + \blx@anchor + \blx@beglangbib + \bibsentence + \blx@pagetracker + \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype + \blx@postpunct + \blx@endlangbib}% + \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par + {}} +\newlength{\lengthid} +\newlength{\lengthlw} +\newcommand{\itemcmd}{% +\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}} +\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep} +\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth} +\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid} +\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用 +%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw +\hangindent\lengthid +\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}% +\hspace{\biblabelsep}} +% +% 简单的段落环境 +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} +{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}} +{\endgroup} +{\itemcmd}} + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置单元或块等的标点 +%===================================================================== +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin +\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def， +% +% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符 +% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进 +% +% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets +% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def +\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak} +\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号 +%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par + +%===================================================================== +% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏 +%===================================================================== +% +% 新增文献类型标识符的格式 +% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉 +% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上 +% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + }% + {\ifentrytype{online}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + }}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}% +} + +% +% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式 +\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{} +\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{} +\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{} + +% +% 作者信息的输出格式 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式 +\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{% +\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}% +{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}% +\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}% + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or +\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}% +\or + \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven} + and + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}}% +\fi + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}} + +\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式 +\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family +\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace} +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}% + \ifuseprefix% + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital% + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}% + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号 +} + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出 +\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号 +} + +%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {} + {\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} + + +\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily +%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样 +\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行 +\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行 +\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行 +\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{% + \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space + \ifhyperref + {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}} + {\nolinkurl{#1}}} + +\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线 + +% +% beamer中文献标题后的标点问题 +% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen +% +% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况: +% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于 +% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响 +% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct +\@ifclassloaded{beamer}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}% + \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{} + + + % + % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏 + % 20160701，v1.0，新增加 + % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen + % + % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制 + % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份 + % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令 + % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用自定义的\blx@gbdate，以避免版本判断 + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%% + \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}% + } + + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldundef{year}{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}% + {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}% + }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空 + }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}% + }% + }}% + + + % + % biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理 + % + %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了， + %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息 + %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中 + \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{% + \edef\entrykeya{#1} + \edef\entrykeyb{#2} + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final] + \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb] + } + } + } + } + + % 关联文献的输出格式 + % + % 关联文献间的分隔符 + % + \renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题 + % + % 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>3.11 + % + % 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏 + \ifdef{\begrelateddelim}{\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}}{} + + + +% +% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份 +% +\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{% + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + {\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + }% + %\newunit +} + +% +% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去 +% +\renewbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and% + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit + }% +}% +} + +% +% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符 +% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等 +% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串 +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}% + \fi}% +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}% + \fi}% + + +% +% 修改series域的输出格式 +% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz +\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{% + \printfield{series}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}% + %\newunit + } + +%===================================================================== +%设置驱动格式 +%===================================================================== + +%中文环境的局部化代码 +\def\localsetchinesecode{% +\ifboolexpr{% +togl{bbx:gbstyle} or test {\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}}% +}% +{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{}{% +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{##1\adddot\addthinspace}% +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{##1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪 +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{##1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{##1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{##1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [article,patent,thesis,unpublished]% + {title}{##1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{##1\isdot} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [inbook,incollection,inproceedings]% + {title}{##1}%\nopunct\unspace +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{##1}}%%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def +% +% 标题的字母大小写格式修改 +% +% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase +% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not +%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital##1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{% +\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital##1}{% +\href{\thefield{url}}{##1}}}{\MakeCapital##1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{##1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1} +}% +% +% 修改译者位置格式 +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,增加对英文等其它语言译者的处理 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式 +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifnameundef{translator} + {} + {\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}} + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}% + \clearname{translator}% + %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理 + %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串 + \iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}}{}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。 + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \newunit}% + \usebibmacro{withothers}} +% +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}{% + \def\abx@tempa{bytranslator}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{co}% + \clearname{commentator}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{an}% + \clearname{annotator}} + {}}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction} + {\appto\abx@tempa{in}% + \clearname{introduction}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}% + \clearname{foreword}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{af}% + \clearname{afterword}} + {}}}% +\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\bibstring{bytranslatorcn}} + {\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}} +% +% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式 +% v1.0,20160701,hzz +% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,针对其它语言的译者后的标点与中文不同做处理 +% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。 +% \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames +\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}} + and + test \ifmorenames + }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma + {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。 + {}% +\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}% +}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如： +%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等. +%胡泳, 范海燕, 译. +%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译. +\ifcurrentname{translator}{\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理 +}} +% +% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al. +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{andotherscn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothers}% + \fi}% +% +% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% + \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andcn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{and}\space% + \fi}% +% +% url和url日期格式 +% + \renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{% + %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面 + \iffieldundef{urlyear}% + {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{urldate}}% + \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{url}}% + \renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}}% +% +% 重设title的输出 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件 +% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断 +\renewbibmacro*{title}{% + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令 + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它 + }}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit +}% +}}% +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex<3.7版本 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{##1}% +\renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% +\addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令 +% +% 调整doi+eprint+url格式 +% +% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。 +\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{% +% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面 +% {\printfield{doi}} +% {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}} + {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:url} + {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}} + {} + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:doi} + {\printfield{doi}} + {}}% +% +% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printfield{chapter}}% + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出 + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit %这里的标点去掉 +}% +% +% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal +% +\DeclareListFormat{location}{% + \usebibmacro{list:delim}{##1}% + ##1\isdot}% +\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location}% +\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location}% +% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间， +% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz +% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date} +\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifboolexpr{% +test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}% +}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}% +{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}% +}{% +\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}% + {\printlist{location}}% +\addcolon\addspace% +\iflistundef{institution}{% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}% \bibstring{nopublisher}%[s.n.\adddot] +{\printlist{institution}}}% +\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}% + \printfield{year}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}% + \newunit}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{institution}% + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit}% +}% +% +% 通用的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。 +% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。 +% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理 +\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% + \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }% + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}% + {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。 + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress} + {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace% + \iflistundef{publisher}{% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}% + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}% + {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}% + {\printlist{publisher}}}% +\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace% +\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点 +}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{publisher} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{publisher}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit + }% +}% +% +% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz +% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 +\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。 +{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 + \iflistundef{institution} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + %\newunit + }}% +% +% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}##1\bibstring{volumecn}}% +{\bibstring{volume}~##1}% +}% volume of a book +\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{##1}% volume of a journal +% +% 对number册信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{##1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,% +incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}##1\bibstring{numbercn}}% +{##1}% +}% +% +% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\ifinteger{##1}% +{\printtext{##1\str@edition}}% +{##1\isdot}}% +{\ifinteger{##1}% +{\mkbibordedition{##1}~\bibstring{edition}}% +{##1\isdot}}}% +% +% 对version的版本信息做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifinteger{##1}% +{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{##1\str@edition}}% +{\mkbibordedition{##1}~\bibstring{version}}}% +{##1\isdot}}% +% +% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号 +% +\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{% + \ifboolexpr{% + test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}} + and + test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}} + }% + {}% + {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}% + \newunit%标点换成下一句 + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}% + \printfield{booktitleaddon}}% +% +% 调整期刊名的格式 +% +% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz +\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{journal}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号 + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}% + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + %换成逗号和空格 + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面 + %\newunit + }% +% +% 调整期刊卷和期的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx +\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{% + \printfield{volume}% + \setunit*{\adddot}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}{% + \printfield{volume}% + %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号 + %\printfield{number}% + \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号 + \iffieldundef{eid}{}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}}}% +% +% 调整期刊年份的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号 + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}% + {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}}% + %\newunit + }% +% +% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx + %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{% + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit + }% +% +% 编者的符号修改一下 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \ifboolexpr{% + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}% + }% + {\printnames{editor}% + \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况 + {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点 + {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}% + %\clearname{editor} + }% + {}}% +% +% 编者类型做一修改 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \printtext[editortype]{% + \iffieldundef{editortype}% + {% +% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理 +% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} +% or +% test {\ifandothers{editor}} +% } +% {\bibstring{editors}} +% {\bibstring{editor}} + }% + {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}}%定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改 + {\ifboolexpr{% + test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}% + or + test {\ifandothers{editor}}% + }% + {\printdelim{streditortypes}}% + {\printdelim{streditortype}}}% + {\thefield{editortype}}}% + }}% +% +% bookauthor域的输出， +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替， +% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype +\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}% + {\ifnameundef{editor}% + {}% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}% + {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}% + }% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}% + {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}% + }% +}% +% +% 修改期刊的标题 +% +\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \iffieldundef{title} + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct} + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + %}%把编组结束移到后面去 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母 + \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{}% + }}% + }% +% +% 期刊的标题做修改 +% +\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{periodical}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点 + \iffieldundef{series} + {}% + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改 +\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字 + \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}% + \iffieldundef{volume}% + {\printfield{year}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}% + \printfield{year}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolfirst}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{% + \printfield{endyear}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolsecond}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit}% +% +% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型 +% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz +% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz +% +% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。 +\renewbibmacro*{in:}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace + {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}% + \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}% + }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct +% +% 修改type域的输出格式 +% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz +% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文 +\DeclareFieldFormat{type}% +{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\ifbibxstring{##1cn}{\bibxstring{##1cn}}{##1}}% + {\ifbibstring{##1}{\bibstring{##1}}{##1}}% +}% +% +% book条目类的驱动 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@book}{%%源来自standard.bbx文件 + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% +\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\newunit +\printlist{language}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{byauthor}% +\newunit\newblock}% +\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +\newunit +\printfield{edition}% +\newunit\newblock%% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\iffieldundef{maintitle}% +{\printfield{volume}% +\printfield{part}}% +{}% +\newunit% +\printfield{volumes}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{series+number}}% +\newunit\newblock% +%\printfield{note}% +%\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% +%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉 +\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， +\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。 + \newunit\newblock% + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@article}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物 + \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}% + %\newunit +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit + \usebibmacro{note+pages}% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期 + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 连续出版物的驱动 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{editor}% + %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock + \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行 + \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}% + \newunit\newblock% + \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间 + \newunit\newblock%添加这一行 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock} + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 专利文献驱动 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@patent}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + %\usebibmacro{title}% + \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理 + \iflistundef{location} + {} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext{%[parens] + \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byholder}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{newsdate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 在线文献驱动 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@online}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit\newblock +%\printlist{organization}% + \printlist{institution}% + \newunit\newblock +\ifboolexpr{% +test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% +}{\usebibmacro{date}}% +{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\usebibmacro{eprint}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 报告类型驱动 +% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@report}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 手册类型驱动 +% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息 +% +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@manual}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{% + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}{}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 备选类型驱动 +% +% 利用biblatex的misc驱动 +\csdef{blx@bbx@misc}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +% +% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改 +% +\csdef{blx@bbx@inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{title}% +\usebibmacro{in:}% +%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}% + \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}% + }{\newunit}%替换下一句 + %\newunit\newblock +\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加 + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% +\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}% +\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息 + \newunit\newblock% +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit\newblock + \printfield{edition}% + \newunit + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +% \iffieldundef{maintitle} +% {\printfield{volume}% +% \printfield{part}} +% {}% +% \newunit +% \printfield{volumes}% +% \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{series+number} + }% + \newunit\newblock + %\printfield{note}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% +%\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}% +}{}% +} + +\AtEveryBibitem{\localsetchinesecode}% +\AtEveryCite{\localsetchinesecode}% +\AtEveryLositem{\localsetchinesecode}% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx index 3679a03ae9d..f46151d4ed3 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015ms.cbx @@ -1,190 +1,200 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ms.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
-
-%
-% 加载标准样式
-%
-\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric
-
-
-%
-% 选项设置
-%
-\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- autocite = superscript ,
- autopunct = true ,
- %sorting = none ,
- maxcitenames=1,
- mincitenames=1,
-}
-
-%textcite标注命令中的标点设置
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%
-% 定义一个上标方括号wrapper
-%
-\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}%
-}
-
-% 修改postnote的输出格式
-\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1}
-
-%
-% 重定义cite命令
-%
-% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
-% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \printfield{postnote}}
-% v1.0p 以前用的方式
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \usebibmacro{prenote}}
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
-% {}
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}%
-% \usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
-%
-% 定义upcite命令
-% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:对supercite增加[]
-\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{%
- \cite}
-
-%
-% 重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets]
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {%[
- \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-%
-% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1.新增页码输出宏
-\newbibmacro*{postpages}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}
- {\printfield[postnote]{pages}}
- {\printfield{postnote}}}
-% 2.新增\pagescite引用命令
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \usebibmacro{postpages}}
-
-%
-% 定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite
-%
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \usebibmacro{postpages}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式，
-%
-% 原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]}
-
-%
-% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码
-% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz
-% gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite
-% 区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。
-%见numeric.CBX
-\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
- \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printfield{labelnumber}%
- \ifbool{bbx:subentry}
- {\printfield{entrysetcount}}
- {}}}
-%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite},
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript]
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
- \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
- {\multicitedelim}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-
-%
-% 增加如下多个命令
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义
-% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}%
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
- \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
- {\multicitedelim}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \printfield{postnote}}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}%
- {\textcite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}%
- {\parencite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}%
- {\parencite}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015ms.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style] + +% +% 加载标准样式 +% +\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric + + +% +% 选项设置 +% +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + autocite = superscript , + autopunct = true , + %sorting = none , + maxcitenames=1, + mincitenames=1, +} + +%textcite标注命令中的标点设置 +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +%修改\mkbibsuperscript宏在最后加上一个空白使得xeCJK不会自动在引用标签后面加上中英文之间的空白 +%hzz,v1.0w,2021-0401 +\renewrobustcmd{\mkbibsuperscript}[1]{% + \unspace\allowhyphens\textsuperscript{% + \begingroup + \protected\long\def\mkbibsuperscript##1{% + \blx@warning{Nested superscript}% + \mkbibbrackets{##1}}% + #1\endgroup}\kern\z@} + +% +% 定义一个上标方括号wrapper +% +\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{% + \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}% +} + +% 修改postnote的输出格式 +\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1} + +% +% 重定义cite命令 +% +% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode} +% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \printfield{postnote}} +% v1.0p 以前用的方式 +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \usebibmacro{prenote}} +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} +% {} +% {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}% +% \usebibmacro{postnote}} + +% +% 定义upcite命令 +% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:对supercite增加[] +\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{% + \cite} + +% +% 重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets] + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%] + \usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {%[ + \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + +% +% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1.新增页码输出宏 +\newbibmacro*{postpages}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote} + {\printfield[postnote]{pages}} + {\printfield{postnote}}} +% 2.新增\pagescite引用命令 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \usebibmacro{postpages}} + +% +% 定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite +% +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \usebibmacro{postpages}} + + + +% +% 定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式， +% +% 原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]} + +% +% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码 +% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz +% gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite +% 区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。 +%见numeric.CBX +\newbibmacro*{cite}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}% + \ifbool{bbx:subentry} + {\printfield{entrysetcount}} + {}}} +%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}, +\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% + \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + + +% +% 增加如下多个命令 +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义 +% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}% + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% + \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \printfield{postnote}} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}% + {\textcite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}% + {\parencite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}% + {\parencite} diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx index 6ff1d8af167..99b6847fde4 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.bbx @@ -1,3340 +1,3363 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,numerical sequence and authoryear mixed style
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-
-%
-% 版本和时间信息
-%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015mx.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style]
-%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 加载标准样式
-%=====================================================================
-\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp}
-\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 功能函数
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项
- % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium}
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息
- % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote}
- %
- %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏
- %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式
- \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{%
- \printtext{\addspace(#1)}%
- }
- \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}%
- {\iffieldundef{annotation}%
- {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}%
- {\printfield{annotation}}}%
- {}%
- }
-
-
- %
- % biblatex版本判断
- % 20180629，v1.0k，hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:适用于3.10以上版本的biblatex，否则给出警告
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/28}{}{
- \blx@warning@noline{%
- biblatex version is too old for this style\MessageBreak
- if errors raised，Please update biblatex to the latest version.}
- }
-
- %
- % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成
- % v1.0k,20180509,hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏
- % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8
- % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。
- %
- % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中，
- % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断
- \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt}
- \def\testCJKfirst#1{%
- \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}}
-
- %
- % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号
- \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}%
- {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}%
- }
-
-
- %
- % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物
- %
- \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{%
- \IfSubStr{#1}{-}%
- {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}%
- {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}%
- }
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 数据模型定义
-%=====================================================================
- %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。
- %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名
- %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域
- %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域
- %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder}
- %为多样式文献表增加的stylesections、styleaysection域：
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{aysections}
- \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{styleaysection}
-
- %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型
- %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时
- %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式
- %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。
- \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14
- \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}%
- }{}
-
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置宏包选项
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项
- % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项
- % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage}
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表
- % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz
- % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签
- % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式
- % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib}
-
- %%
- \newlength{\footbibmargin}
- \newlength{\footbiblabelsep}
- \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离
- \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距
- \def\execgbfootbib%
- {%
- %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true}
- %
- %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐
- \AtEndPreamble{
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{
- %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。
- %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接
- %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。
- %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}%
- %\RequirePackage{footmisc}%
-
- %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码
- %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改
- %v1.0q 20190317 hzz
- %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}%
- {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器
-
- \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义
- \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{%
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
- \splittopskip\footnotesep
- \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM
- \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel{%
- \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark
- }%
- \color@begingroup
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox%
- }%
- \color@endgroup}}%
-
- \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{%
- \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{%
- \unvbox\@mpfootins
- \reset@font\footnotesize
- \hsize\columnwidth
- \@parboxrestore
- \protected@edef\@currentlabel
- {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}%
- \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进
- \color@begingroup
- \@makefntext{%
- \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}%
- \color@endgroup}}
- }
-
- \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔
- \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1}
-
- }
-
- %
- %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式
- \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}}
- %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标
- \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{%
- \def\@makefnmark{%
- \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}%
- }%
- }{}{}
- }
-
- %
- %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容)
- %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。
- %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况
- \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{%
- \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true
- {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息
- {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%
- \@makefnmark%
- }}%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- }}%
- }%
- {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{%
- \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}%
- %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断
- }}%
- }
-
- %
- %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求
- \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]%
- {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器
- \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printtext{\thefield{postnote}}}}%由于ay样式中没有修改postnote域，此处因为格式需要不使用默认域格式
- }%
- {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}%
- \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%
- {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%\nopunct
- {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}%
- }%
- {\multicitedelim}%
- {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式
- % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz
- % 原理方法:
- % 只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- }
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的
- % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype}
- %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本
- \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype}
-
- %
- % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档
- % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def
- % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用
- % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。
- % 另外注意：
- % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码
- % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常
- % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。
- \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk}
-
- \def\str@bibliography{参考文献}
- \def\str@references{参考文献}
- \def\str@bytranslator{译}
- \def\str@andotherscn{等}
- \def\str@backrefpage{引用页}
- \def\str@backrefpages{引用页}
- \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详}
- \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详}
- \def\str@edition{版}
- \def\str@volumecn{卷}
- \def\str@numbercn{册}
- \def\str@serialcn{第}
- \def\str@sameentry{同}
- \def\str@incn{见}
- \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文}
- \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文}
- \def\str@editorcn{主编}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK}
- \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def}
- }{}}
-
- %
- % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息
- % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式
- % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。
- % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接
- \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink}
-
- %
- % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项
- % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置
- \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset}
-
- \AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{%
- \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{%
- \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}%
- \abx@dostrings
- \csuse{abx@strings@#1}%
- \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}%
- \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i
- \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}%
- }
- }{}}
-
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz
- %
- % 原理方法:
- % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域
- % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd}
-
- %
- % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。
- %
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{%
- %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub}
-
- %
- % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项
- % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz
- \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{%
- \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}}
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin}
-
-
- %
- % 增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项
- %
- % 原理方法:顺序编码制中与作者年制都使用
- \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\dealnoathor}}
- %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnoauthor=true}%对于需要展开较早(展开层级优先)的选项，这一执行无效，只能用宏包加载时给出的选项。
-
-
-
-
- %
- % 选项设置
- %
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- sorting=none,
- useprefix=true, %名字的信息包括前缀
- date = year, %日期仅写到年
- maxbibnames = 3,%设置名字最大数量
- minbibnames = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量
- maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量
- minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量
- isbn=false,
- sortlocale=zh__pinyin,%zh__big5han,%zh__stroke,%zh__gb2312han,%zh__pinyin,
- }
-
- %
- %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015
- %
- \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{%
- \begingroup
- \blx@metadateinfo{#1}%
- \iffieldundef{#1year}
- {}
- {\printtext[#1date]{%
- \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}%
- \endgroup}
-
- \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{%
- \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}%
- \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}%
- \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}}
-
-
- %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器
- \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase}
- \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase}
- %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}}
- \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}}
- %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbalignlabel}
- \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel}
- %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令
- \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase}
- \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase}
- \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase}
- \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase}
-
-
- %
- % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项，numeric样式，不使用该选项
- % gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru
- % gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr
- % gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔
- % v1.0q，20190307，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序
- {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}%
- \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}%
- {%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}%
- {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}%
- {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}%
- }%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder}
-
- \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序
- \gdef\lancnorder{4}
- \gdef\lanjporder{5}
- \gdef\lankrorder{6}
- \gdef\lanenorder{1}
- \gdef\lanfrorder{2}
- \gdef\lanruorder{3}}
-
- \newcounter{lanordernum}
- \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr
- \setcounter{lanordernum}{0}
- \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;}
- \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}}
- \parsinglanorder{#1}
- }
-
- %
- % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项
- % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串
- % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串
- % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串
- % v1.0o，20190103，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal}
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}%
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal}
-
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}%
- }
- %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置
-
- %
- % 增加序号标签格式处理选项
- % v1.0l，20180623，hzz
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{%
- \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1}
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel}
-
- %
- % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项
- %
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family
- \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given
- \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family
- }
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt}
-
- %
- % 增加标签对齐选项
- %
- % right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式
- \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{%
- \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{}
- \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{}
- }
-
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- giveninits=true,
- urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，iso8601，edtf
- eventdate =gb7714-2015,
- labeldateparts=true,
- }
-
-%
-% 针对3.13<=biblatex版本的选项设置，因为内容有限，所以不做版本区分，而用时间直接判断
-%
-% 解决国标中“王临慧, 2010a.”和“王临慧, 等, 2010b.”的问题
-% 在没有这个选项之前无法加上a和b
-% v1.0s，20190828
-\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/08/16}{%
- \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{%
- nohashothers=true}}{}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置本地化字符串
-%=====================================================================
- %
- % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符
- %
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{andcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andjp}
- \NewBibliographyString{andkr}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{andincite}
- \NewBibliographyString{volumecn}
- \NewBibliographyString{numbercn}
- \NewBibliographyString{serialcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{incn}
- \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorcn}
- \NewBibliographyString{editorscn}
-
-
-
- %
- % 修改一些当地化字符串
- %
- % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件
- % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn
- % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别
-
- \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{
- bibliography = {\str@bibliography},
- references = {\str@references},
- bytranslator= {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译\addcomma\
- and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节
- andcn = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词
- andincitecn = {\addcomma},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andincite = {\addcomma},
- %andothers = {et al.},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等
- andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分
- andothersincite={et al\adddot},
- backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:},
- backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:},
- in={in\intitlepunct},
- volumecn={\str@volumecn},
- numbercn={\str@numbercn},
- serialcn={\str@serialcn},
- andothersjp={他},
- andotherskr={외},
- andjp={和},
- andkr={和},
- incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace},
- mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn},
- phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn},
- editorscn={\str@editorcn},
- editorcn={\str@editorcn},
-}
-
- %
- % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串
- % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串
- % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内
- % v1.0t，hzz，20190525
- \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}}
- \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{%
- \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}}
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 动态数据修改
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中
-% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性
-% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个
-% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次
-% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。
-% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符，
-% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息
-%
-% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法：
-% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型
-% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名
-% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射
-% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。
-%
-% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下：
-% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换
-% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动
-% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名
-% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type
-% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换
-% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射
-%
-% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下：
-% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article
-% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook
-% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理
-% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理
-% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理
-% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型
-% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型
-% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期
-% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型
-% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略，
-% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型
-% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时，
-% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。
-% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述
-% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式
-% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理：
-% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物
-% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report
-% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型
-% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。
-% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献
-% 10. 日期以如下方式处理：
-% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year
-% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate
-% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date
-% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate
-
-
-\DeclareSourcemap{
-\maps[datatype=bibtex]{%
- \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除
- %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor
- }
- \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author
- \pernottype{inbook}
- \pernottype{inproceedings}
- \pernottype{incollection}
- %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author
- \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名
- %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。
- %\step[notfield=address,final]
- \step[fieldsource=location,final]
- \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%让address和location同步
- %\step[notfield=location,final]
- \step[fieldsource=address,final]
- \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况
- \step[fieldsource=mark,final]
- \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}]
- }
- \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况
- \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final]
- \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}]
- }
- \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{article}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- }
- \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{periodical}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}]
- \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor
- \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{newspaper}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{database}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{dataset}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{software}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{map}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]%
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{archive}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以
- %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]
- \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{misc}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]%
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{book}
- \pertype{inbook}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}]
- \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition
- \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符
- \pertype{standard}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}]
- \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{patent}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{inproceedings}
- \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{proceedings}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{incollection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{collection}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{report}
- \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}]
- \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher
- \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{thesis}
- \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型
- \pertype{phdthesis}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{online}
- \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型
- \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{manual}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}]
- \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version
- \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性
- \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{
- \pertype{unpublished}
- \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况
- \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}]
- }%
- \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况
- %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。
- %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息
- \step[fieldsource=year]
- \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题
- \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%
- \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=title,final]
- \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%作者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=author,final]
- \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%译者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=translator,final]
- \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=editor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语
- } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语
- }
- \map{%编者的中文判断
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5
- \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}]
- }
- \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文
- \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final]
- \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定
- }
- \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language
- \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]
- }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。
- \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。
- \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}]
- }
- \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断，
- %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况，
- %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd
- \step[fieldsource=language]
- \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval]
- }
- \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分
- %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
- }
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final]
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
- }
- \map{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
- }
-}
-}
-
-
-%
-% 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作
-%
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook，
- %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义
- %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断
- \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final]
- }
- \map{%剩下的全部映射为book
- \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final]
- }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis]
-% }
-% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
-% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final]
-% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis]
-% }
- \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置
- \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final]
- %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{report}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online]
- \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{thesis}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{manual}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{unpublished}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{database}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{dataset}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{software}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{map}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map{%
- \pertype{archive}
- %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步
- \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}]
- \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- %3.7以上版本用notfield
- %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续
- \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online
- \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确)
- \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸
- \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append]
- \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}]
- }
- \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,%
- address,location,institution,organization}]{
- \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}]
- }
- }
- }
-
-%
-% 佚名/noauthor的处理
-%
-% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改实现
-\def\dealnoathor{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的中文文献设置为佚名
- \step[fieldsource=language,match={chinese},final]
- \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={佚名}]
- }
- \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的英文文献设置为A{non}
- \step[fieldsource=language,match={english},final]
- \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={A{non}}]%noauthor换成Anon，同时为避免大写还加了{}
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-%
-% 不同语言分集调整的实现方式
-%
-% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序
-\def\dealsortlan{
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final]
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder]
- }
- \map[overwrite]{%
- \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english，
- \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder]
- }
- }
- }
-}
-
-
-
-
-%
-%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}%
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual}
-\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置排序格式
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本
-%
-\DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
- %\sort[final]{
- %\field{sortkey}
- %}
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%[direction=descending]
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的nyt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %降序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort[direction=descending]{
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
- %升序的ynt
- \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{
- \sort{
- \field{presort}
- }
-% \sort[final]{
-% \field{sortkey}
-% }
- \sort{
- \field{lansortorder}%language
- }
- \sort{%[direction=ascending]
- \field{sortyear}
- \field{year}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sortkey}
- }
- \sort{%
- \field{sortname}
- \field{author}
- \field{editor}
- \field{translator}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{sorttitle}
- \field{title}
- }
- \sort{
- \field{volume}
- \literal{0}
- }
- }
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 参考文献表环境
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 列表格式
-%
-% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent
-% v1.0l，20180615，hzz
-% v1.0t,20200319,hzz,增加尺寸\biblabelextend使某些字体下标签宽度不足时可增加标签宽度
-\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}%
-\newlength{\bibitemindent}
-\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt}
-\newlength{\biblabelextend}
-\setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt}
-
-
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
- {\list
- {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printfield{labelnumber}}}
- {\addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}%
- \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}%
- \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}%
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}%
- \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}}
- {\endlist}
- {\item}
-
-%
-% 顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理
-%
-% 原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择
-% 左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度
-% 项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。
-% 左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变
-% 右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变
-% 项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等
-% 修改序号标签格式为:
-% \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX
-% \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{%
-\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐
- \mkgbnumlabel{#1}%
-\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐
- \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill%
-\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间
- \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil%
-\fi}
-
-%
-% 修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。
-\def\setaligngbstyle{%
-\def\blx@bibitem##1{%
- \blx@ifdata{##1}
- {\begingroup
- \blx@getdata{##1}%
- \blx@bibcheck
- \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{%
- \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}%
- \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty
- \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype
- \blx@setoptions@entry
- \blx@thelabelnumber
- \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne
- \blx@initsep
- \blx@namesep
- \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax
-% \blx@initsep %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制
-% \blx@namesep
- \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}%
- \blx@execute
- \blx@initunit
- \blx@anchor
- \blx@beglangbib
- \bibsentence
- \blx@pagetracker
- \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype
- \blx@postpunct
- \blx@endlangbib}%
- \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par
- {}}
-\newlength{\lengthid}
-\newlength{\lengthlw}
-\newcommand{\itemcmd}{%
-\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}}
-\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep}
-\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth}
-\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid}
-\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用
-%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw
-\hangindent\lengthid
-\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}%
-\hspace{\biblabelsep}}
-%
-% 简单的段落环境
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
-{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}}
-{\endgroup}
-{\itemcmd}}
-
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 设置单元或块等的标点
-%=====================================================================
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin
-\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def，
-%
-% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符
-% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进
-%
-% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets
-% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def
-\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
-\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号
-%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par
-
-%=====================================================================
-% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% 新增文献类型标识符的格式
-% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉
-% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上
-% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- }%
- {\ifentrytype{online}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}%
- }}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}%
-{\iftoggle{bbx:url}%
- {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}%
- }%
- {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}%
-}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}%
-}
-
-%
-% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式
-\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{}
-\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{}
-
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [article,patent,thesis,unpublished]
- {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{#1\isdot}
-\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉
- [inbook,incollection,inproceedings]
- {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def
-\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily
-%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样
-\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行
-\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行
-\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行
-\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{%
- \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space
- \ifhyperref
- {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
- {\nolinkurl{#1}}}
-%
-% 标题的字母大小写格式修改
-%
-% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase
-% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not
-%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{%
-\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{%
-\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{#1}
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线
-\DefineBibliographyExtras{russian}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}
-
-\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置
-\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat
- [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished]
- {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat
- [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical]
- {title}{##1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1}
-\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}}
-}
-
-%
-% 文献标题后的标点问题
-% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen
-%
-% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况:
-% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于
-% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响
-% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct
- {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本
- \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{
- \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}%
- \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{}
- }
-
-
-%
-% 修改译者位置格式
-%
-% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式
-\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{%
- \ifnameundef{translator}
- {}
- {%\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}%
- \clearname{translator}%
- %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理
- %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \newunit}%
- \usebibmacro{withothers}}
-
-
-%
-% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式
-% v1.0,20160701,hzz
-% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim
-%
-% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。
-% \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames
-\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}}
- and
- test \ifmorenames
- }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma
- {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。
- {}%
-\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}%
-}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如：
-%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等.
-%胡泳, 范海燕, 译.
-%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译.
-\ifcurrentname{translator}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理
-}}
-
-
-%
-% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al.
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothersincitecn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothersincite}%
- \fi}
-
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andotherscn}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andothers}%
- \fi}
-
-%
-% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and
-% v1.0o,20190103,hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。
-% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文
-% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了
-% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置
-\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
- \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andincite}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andincitecn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andincite}\space%
- \fi}
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{%
- \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}%
- \addspace%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}%
-\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{andcn}\space%
- \or%
- \bibstring{and}\space%
- \fi}
-
-
-%
-% 重设title的输出
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件
-% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断
-\renewbibmacro*{title}{%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它
- }}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
-}%
-}}
-
-%
-% 作者信息的输出格式
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen
-% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式
-\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{%
-\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}%
-{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}%
-\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}%
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
- \ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
-\or
-\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}%
-\or
- \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:family-given}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}}
- {\ifgiveninits
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiveni}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:given-family}
- {\namepartfamily}
- {\namepartgiven}
- {\namepartprefix}
- {\namepartsuffix}}}%
-\fi
- \usebibmacro{name:andothers}}
-
-\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式
-\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family
-\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename
-
-\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace}
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%
- \ifuseprefix%
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}%
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
-}
-
-%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出
-\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
- \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉
- \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}{\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号
-}
-
-%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式
-\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont%
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY
-\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def
-\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}%
- \ifuseprefix
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{%
- \ifcapital
- {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}
- {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}%
- \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}
- {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}%
- \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot%
- \ifboolexpe{%
- test {\ifdefvoid{#2}}
- and
- test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}}
- {}
- {\revsdnamepunct}%
- \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital
- \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}
- \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%
-}
-
-
-%
-% url和url日期格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{%
- %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面
- \iffieldundef{urlyear}%
- {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{urldate}}%
- \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{url}}
-\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}}
-
-
-%
-% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本
-%
- \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{#1}
- \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{%
- \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令
-
- %
- % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏
- % 20160701，v1.0，新增加
- % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen
- %
- % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制
- % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份
- % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令
- % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断
- \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%%
- \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}%
- }
-
- %
- \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
- }%
- {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息
- {\iffieldundef{year}{%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}%
- {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}%
- }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空
- }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}%
- }%
- }}%
-
-
-%
-% biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理
-%
- %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了，
- %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息
- %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中
- \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{%
- \edef\entrykeya{##1}
- \edef\entrykeyb{##2}
- \DeclareStyleSourcemap{
- \maps[datatype=bibtex]{
- \map{
- \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final]
- \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb]
- }
- }
- }
- }
-
-%
-% 关联文献间的分隔符
-%
-\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题
-
-%
-% 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>=3.11
-%
-% 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏
-\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}
-
-
-%
-% 调整doi+eprint+url格式
-%
-% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。
-\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{%
-% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面
-% {\printfield{doi}}
-% {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}}
- {}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}
- {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}}
- {}
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:doi}
- {\printfield{doi}}
- {}}
-
-%
-% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printfield{chapter}}%
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit %这里的标点去掉
-}
-
-%
-% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal
-%
-\DeclareListFormat{location}{%
- \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}%
- #1\isdot}
-\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location}
-\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location}
-
-% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间，
-% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz
-% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}
-\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}%
-}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}%
-{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}%
-}{%
-\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}%
- {\printlist{location}}%
-\addcolon\addspace%
-\iflistundef{institution}{%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}%
-{\printlist{institution}}}%
-\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}%
- \newunit}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{institution}%
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- \newunit}%
-}
-%
-% 通用的出版社和地址的处理
-%
-% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。
-% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。
-% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理
-\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}%
-{\testCJKfirst{userd}%
- \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }%
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}%
- {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress}
- {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace%
- \iflistundef{publisher}{%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%
- {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}%
- {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}%
- {\printlist{publisher}}}%
-\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace%
-\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点
-}%
-{\printlist{location}%
- \iflistundef{publisher}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{publisher}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型
-%
-% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
-\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。
-{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉
- \iflistundef{institution}
- {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}}
- {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{date}%
- %\newunit
- }}
-
-%
-% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}%
-{\bibstring{volume}~#1}%
-}% volume of a book
-\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal
-
-%
-% 对number册信息格式做出修改
-% v1.0o,20190105,hzz
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}%
-\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,%
-incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{%
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}%
-{#1}%
-}%
-
-%
-% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}%
-{\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
-{#1\isdot}}%
-{\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}%
-{#1\isdot}}}
-
-%
-% 对version的版本信息做出修改
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
-\testCJKfirst{userd}%
-\ifinteger{#1}%
-{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}%
-{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}%
-{#1\isdot}}
-
-%
-% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}}
- and
- test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}}
- }
- {}
- {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}%
- \newunit%标点换成下一句
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}%
- \printfield{booktitleaddon}}
-
-
-%
-% 调整期刊名的格式
-%
-% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz
-\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{journal}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%
- %\setunit{\addspace}%
- \usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}%
- %换成逗号和空格
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面
- %\newunit
- }
-
-
-
-%
-% 调整期刊卷和期的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- \setunit*{\adddot}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
- %\printfield{number}%
- \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号
- \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}}}
-
-%
-% 调整期刊年份的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}%
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}
- \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸
- {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸
- {\usebibmacro{date}}%
- }}}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%
-% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx
- %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper
- \iffieldundef{pages}{}{
- \setunit{\bibpagespunct}%
- \printfield{pages}}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-
-%
-% 编者的符号修改一下
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseeditor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
- }
- {\printnames{editor}%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况
- {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点
- {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}%
- %\clearname{editor}
- }%
- {}}
-
-%
-% 编者类型做一修改
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \printtext[editortype]{%
- \iffieldundef{editortype}
- {%
-% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理
-% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
-% or
-% test {\ifandothers{editor}}
-% }
-% {\bibstring{editors}}
-% {\bibstring{editor}}
- }
- {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改
- {\ifboolexpr{
- test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}}
- or
- test {\ifandothers{editor}}
- }
- {\printdelim{streditortypes}}
- {\printdelim{streditortype}}}
- {\thefield{editortype}}}%
- }}
-
-%
-% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符
-% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等
-% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}%
- \fi}
-%
-\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{%
- \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%
- \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}%
- \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}%
- \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}%
- \or%
- \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}%
- \or%
- \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}%
- \fi}
-
-
-%
-% bookauthor域的输出，
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz
-% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替，
-% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype
-\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}%
- {\ifnameundef{editor}%
- {}%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}%
- {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}%
- }%
- {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}%
- {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}%
- }%
-}
-
-%
-% 修改期刊的标题
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF
- \iffieldundef{title}
- {}
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- %{}%把编组结束移到后面去
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{%
- \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母
- \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{}
- }}
- }
-
-
-%
-% 期刊的标题做修改
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{periodical}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点
- \iffieldundef{series}
- {}
- {\newunit
- \printfield{series}%
- \setunit{\addspace}}%
- \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字
- \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}%
- \iffieldundef{volume}%
- {\printfield{year}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}%
- \printfield{year}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolfirst}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}%
- \bibrangedash%
- \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{%
- \printfield{endyear}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号
- \printtext{\multivolsecond}%
- \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}%
- }%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}%
- \setunit{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{issue+date}%
- %\setunit{\addcolon\space}%
- \usebibmacro{issue}%
- \newunit}
-
-%
-% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份
-%
-\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{%
- \printtext{%去掉了[parens]
- \iffieldundef{issue}
- {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- {\printfield{issue}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句
- }%
- }%
- %\newunit
-}
-
-%
-% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去
-%
-\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test{\iffieldundef{title}}%
- and%
- test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}%
- }%
- {}%
- {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%
- \printfield[titlecase]{title}%
- \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题
- {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}%
- \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格
- {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}%
- \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}%
- %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点
- %\newunit
- }%
-}%
-}
-
-
-
-%
-% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型
-% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz
-% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz
-%
-% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。
-\renewbibmacro*{in:}{%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace
- {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}%
- \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}%
- {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}%
- }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct
-
-%
-% 修改type域的输出格式
-% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz
-% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文
-\DeclareFieldFormat{type}%
-{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}%
- {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}%
- {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}%
-}
-
-
-%
-% 修改series域的输出格式
-% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz
-\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{%
- \printfield{series}%
- %\setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%
- %\newunit
- }
-
-%=====================================================================
-%设置驱动格式
-%=====================================================================
-%
-% book条目类的驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
-\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\newunit
-\printlist{language}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{byauthor}%
-\newunit\newblock}%
-\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-\newunit
-\printfield{edition}%
-\newunit\newblock%%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-\iffieldundef{maintitle}%
-{\printfield{volume}%
-\printfield{part}}%
-{}%
-\newunit%
-\printfield{volumes}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{series+number}}%
-\newunit\newblock%
-%\printfield{note}%
-%\newunit\newblock%
-\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
-%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉
-\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
-\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。
- \newunit\newblock%
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物
- \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}%
- %\newunit
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit
- \usebibmacro{note+pages}%
- \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期，
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 连续出版物的驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{editor}%
- %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock
- \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行
- \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}%
- \newunit\newblock%
- \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间
- \newunit\newblock%添加这一行
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock}
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{issn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 专利文献驱动
-%
- \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- %\usebibmacro{title}%
- \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理
- \iflistundef{location}
- {}
- {\setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printtext{%[parens]
- \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byholder}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{newsdate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 在线文献驱动
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{note}}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\printlist{organization}%
- \printlist{institution}%
- \newunit\newblock
-\ifboolexpr{%
-test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}%
-}{\usebibmacro{date}}%
-{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:eprint}
- {\usebibmacro{eprint}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 报告类型驱动
-% 当有网址无出版项时，用online输出
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 论文、手册类型驱动
-% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit%
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{%
- \printfield{type}%
- \setunit*{\addspace}}{}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期
- \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{pagetotal}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isrn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-%
-% 备选类型驱动
-%
-% 利用biblatex的misc驱动
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{%
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
- \usebibmacro{title}%
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
- \newunit
- \printlist{language}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byauthor}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{howpublished}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{type}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{version}%
- \newunit
- \printfield{note}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}%
- %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改
-%
-\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx
- \usebibmacro{bibindex}%
- \usebibmacro{begentry}%
- \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}%
-\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点
-\usebibmacro{title}%
-\usebibmacro{in:}%
-%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}%
- \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}%
- \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{%
- \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}%
- }{\newunit}%替换下一句
- %\newunit\newblock
-\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加
- \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}%
-\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}%
-\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息
- \newunit\newblock%
-% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \printfield{edition}%
- \newunit
- \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{%
-% \iffieldundef{maintitle}
-% {\printfield{volume}%
-% \printfield{part}}
-% {}%
-% \newunit
-% \printfield{volumes}%
-% \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{series+number}
- }%
- \newunit\newblock
- %\printfield{note}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}%
- %\newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:isbn}
- {\printfield{isbn}}
- {}%
- \newunit\newblock
-% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%
-% \newunit\newblock
- \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}%
- \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock
- \usebibmacro{pageref}%
- \newunit\newblock
- \iftoggle{bbx:related}
- {\usebibmacro{related:init}%
- \usebibmacro{related}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}}
-
-
-%
-%针对不同refsection做不同的格式处理的代码
-%
-
-%
-%默认采用顺序编码制，因此只需增加的是作者年制
-\newrobustcmd{\setaystylesection}[1]{\csxdef{gb@aystyle@section#1}{#1}}
-
-%
-%在AtBeginBibliography处已经无法重定义defbibenvironment{bibliographyay}
-%所以输出只能是用另外定义的环境来实现
-%可以在refsection后面做patch
-%为排序引入newrefcontext
-\apptocmd{\refsection}{
-\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
-\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
-{
-\newrefcontext[sorting=gb7714-2015]
-
-\setlength{\bibhang}{1em}
-\setlength{\bibitemindent}{-\bibhang}
-\defbibenvironment{bibliography}
- {\list
- {}
- {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}%
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}}
- {\endlist}
- {\item}
-}{}
-}{}{}
-
-%
-%为排序引入endrefcontext
-%
-\pretocmd{\endrefsection}{
-\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
-\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
-{\endrefcontext}{}
-}{}{}
-
-%因为是整个文献表，在打印文献表的时候，增加钩子代码
-%因为下面的钩子是在defbibenvironment的begincode之后，所以对于defbibenvironment相关的设置都是无效的
-\AtBeginBibliography{
-
-\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
-\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
-%\ifboolexpr{
-%not test {\ifcsundef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}}
-%and
-%test {\ifcsequal{gb@refsecnum}{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}}
-%}
- {
-
- \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
- \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space}
-
- \renewbibmacro*{date}{%
- \iflabeldateisdate
- {}
- {\printdate}}%
-
- \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{%
- \iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {}
- {\printtext{%[parens]%这里去掉括号
- \iflabeldateisdate
- {\printdateextra}
- {\printlabeldateextra}}}}%
-
- \newbibmacro*{bbx:savehash}{%
- \savefield{fullhash}{\bbx@lasthash}}
-
- \newbibmacro*{bbx:dashcheck}[2]{}
-
- %注意这里当没有作者只有标题时在年份之前的标点是否需要标准并未涉及，所以未做处理。
- \renewbibmacro*{author}{%以前的date+extrayear变为date+extradate，所以对3.8以上版本重定义一下author
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseauthor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{author}}
- }
- {%
- \usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}%
- \printnames{author}%
- \iffieldundef{authortype}
- {\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}
- {\setunit{\printdelim{authortypedelim}}}%
- \iffieldundef{authortype}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}
- }%
- {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
- \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
- \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
- \usebibmacro{date+extradate}}
-
- \newbibmacro*{labeltitle}{%
- \iffieldundef{label}
- {\iffieldundef{shorttitle}
- {\printfield{title}%
- \clearfield{title}}
- {\printfield[title]{shorttitle}}}
- {\printfield{label}}}
-
-%
-% 增加一个number带括号的格式，避免使用mkbibparens而引入一个不必要的空格
-%
-\DeclareFieldFormat{addnumflag}{%
-\nobreak\printtext{(}\nobreak #1\nobreak\printtext{)}}
-
-%
-% 调整journal输出
-%
-% 原理方法:首先判断子标题，然后再设置标点。
-% 避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在时需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格
-\renewbibmacro*{journal}{%
- \iffieldundef{journaltitle}%
- {}%
- {\printtext[journaltitle]{%
- \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}%
- \iffieldundef{journalsubtitle}{}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}%
- \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 调整期刊卷和期的格式
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx
-\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- \setunit*{\adddot}%
- \printfield{number}%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}{%
- \printfield{volume}%
- %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号
- %\printfield{number}%
- \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield[addnumflag]{number}}%区别于顺序编码制
- \iffieldundef{eid}{}{%
- \setunit{\addcomma\space}%
- \printfield{eid}}}}
-
-%
-% 调整期刊年份的格式
-%
-% 原理方法:原在authoryear.BBX中\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact中定义
-% 当issue存在时，才设置newunit。避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在是需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格
- \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%
- \iffieldundef{issue}%
- {}%
- {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}\newunit}}}
-
-%
-% 编者的符号修改一下
-% v1.0 2016-07-01
-% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点
-%
-\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%
- \ifboolexpr{
- test \ifuseeditor
- and
- not test {\ifnameundef{editor}}
- }
- {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck}
- {%\bibnamedash
- \printnames{editor}%
- }
- {\printnames{editor}%
- %\setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}%
- %\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}
- }%
- \usebibmacro{editorstrg}%
- %\clearname{editor}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}%
- {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash
- \usebibmacro{labeltitle}%
- \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}%
- \ifboolexpr{%
- test {\ifentrytype{inbook}}
- or
- test {\ifentrytype{incollection}}
- or
- test {\ifentrytype{inproceedings}}
- or
- test {\ifentrytype{conference}}
- }%
- {}%
- {\usebibmacro{date+extradate}}}
-
-
- }{}
-
-
-
-}
-
-
-
-%
-%针对具体条目做处理时的特殊处理
-%
-%\def\localsetrefsectionstyle{%
-%}
-
-%\AtEveryBibitem{\localsetrefsectionstyle}%
-%\AtEveryCite{\localsetchinesecode}%
-%\AtEveryLositem{\localsetchinesecode}%
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 bibliography style,numerical sequence and authoryear mixed style +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% + +% +% 版本和时间信息 +% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\def\versionofbiblatex{\abx@version} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015mx.bbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex bibliography style] +%\RequireBiber[3]%显式指定用biber后端，当用bibtex时会报错，但其实不会影响编译，只是采用bibtex后无法达成格式需求 + +%===================================================================== +% 加载标准样式 +%===================================================================== +\RequireBibliographyStyle{numeric-comp} +\RequirePackage{xstring}%解决texlive2015的biblatex3.0不加载xstring包的问题 + + +%===================================================================== +% 功能函数 +%===================================================================== + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献载体的选项 + % 20191125,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbmedium} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbmedium}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbmedium}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbmedium} + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出annotation域的选项，该域可以用于在文献条目后面输出一些注释信息 + % 20190509,v1,0s,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbannote} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbannote}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbannote}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbannote} + % + %用于在文献条目后面输出注释信息的宏 + %FieldFormat{annotation}用于设置注释信息的格式 + \DeclareFieldFormat{annotation}{% + \printtext{\addspace(#1)}% + } + \renewbibmacro*{annotation}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbannote}% + {\iffieldundef{annotation}% + {\printfile[annotation]{\bibannotationprefix\thefield{entrykey}.tex}}% + {\printfield{annotation}}}% + {}% + } + + + % + % biblatex版本判断 + % 20180629，v1.0k，hzz + % + % 原理方法:适用于3.10以上版本的biblatex，否则给出警告 + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2017/12/28}{}{ + \blx@warning@noline{% + biblatex version is too old for this style\MessageBreak + if errors raised，Please update biblatex to the latest version.} + } + + % + % 判断CJK字符的函数，用于判断作者等信息是否由中文字符构成 + % v1.0k,20180509,hzz + % + % 原理方法:用biber中的perl方法代替。因为利用tex函数对字符判断时，当字符在宏 + % 中时，基于`的方法无法解决GBK编码的问题，基于CJKsymbol的方法无法解决utf-8 + % 编码用xelatex编译的问题。 + % + % 原理是：利用perl正则将中文标识记录到域中， + % 然后利用\iffieldundef和\iffieldequalstr进行判断 + \providetoggle{ifCJKforgbt} + \def\testCJKfirst#1{% + \iffieldundef{#1}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}{% + \iffieldequalstr{#1}{chinese}{\toggletrue{ifCJKforgbt}}{\togglefalse{ifCJKforgbt}}}} + + % + % 2个卷的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + % 原理方法: 范围起止间隔符号还是用-，而不是与date相同的/，因为有合期期刊的问题，需要用到/符号 + \newcommand{\multivolparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multivolfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multivolsecond]}% + {\def\multivolfirst{#1}\def\multivolsecond{}}% + } + + + % + % 2个期的解析函数，用于连续出版物 + % + \newcommand{\multinumberparser}[1]{% + \IfSubStr{#1}{-}% + {\StrBefore{#1}{-}[\multinumberfirst]\StrBehind{#1}{-}[\multinumbersecond]}% + {\def\multinumberfirst{#1}\def\multinumbersecond{}}% + } + +%===================================================================== +% 数据模型定义 +%===================================================================== + %定义类型和载体标识，从gb内容看载体基本属于介质。 + %为与lee zeping的bst的样式统一，使用mark和medium这两域名 + %为单个条目的姓名格式控制增加nameformat和namefmtid两个域 + %为缩略信息文献表增加了shortbooktitle域 + %为多语言排序增加了lansortorder域 + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{mark,medium,nameformat} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{namefmtid} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{shortbooktitle} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{lansortorder} + %为多样式文献表增加的stylesections、styleaysection域： + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=integer]{aysections} + \DeclareDatamodelFields[type=field,datatype=literal]{styleaysection} + + %因为biblatex更新3.14版本以后，biber对于为声明数据模型的条目类型 + %不再默认读取，而是以空字符串作为条目类型名，自然在条目定义alias时 + %就会出现问题，因此显式的声明一下newspaper，然后保留后面采用alias的方式 + %而standard类型则是采用另一种方式直接在sourcemap中转换为其它类型。 + \@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/11/30}{%2019/12/01 v3.14 + \DeclareDatamodelEntrytypes{newspaper}% + }{} + + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置宏包选项 +%===================================================================== + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出type域的选项 + % 20190212,v1,0q,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldtype}[false]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldtype} + + % + % 增加一个控制是否根据页码重设脚注数字标号的选项 + % 20190422,v1,0r,hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfnperpage}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfnperpage} + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制是否实现GB/T 7714-2015标准的脚注文献表 + % 20190203，v1.0p，hzz + % 原理方法:默认做patch，文献引用带圈上标数字表示，脚注中的文献用带圈非上标数字做标签 + % 当前面的脚注中已经存在当前文献，那么当前文献内容不再输出而用同(4)这样的方式 + % 需要注意的是由于小页环境和表格中的脚注本身的问题，可能会有一些问题 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfootbib}[false]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfootbib}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfootbib} + + %% + \newlength{\footbibmargin} + \newlength{\footbiblabelsep} + \setlength{\footbibmargin}{1em}%脚注的段落左侧缩进距离 + \setlength{\footbiblabelsep}{0.5em}%脚注中标记号与脚注段落的间距 + \def\execgbfootbib% + {% + %开启引用跟踪计数器，为使用\ifciteseen等测试命令 + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{citetracker=true} + % + %利用footmisc宏包来实现脚注文献的悬挂对齐 + \AtEndPreamble{ + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{}{ + %beamer类因为其特殊性，为避免冲突不调footmisc。 + %同时footmisc与hyperref宏包也不兼容，所以使用footmisc时会破坏脚注的超链接 + %如果要实现超链接可以将下句注释掉，这里留着主要是实现悬挂对齐。 + %\PassOptionsToPackage{perpage,hang}{footmisc}% + %\RequirePackage{footmisc}% + + %重新实现脚注的根据单页重设脚注号码 + %重新实现脚注的悬挂对齐问题，不再使用footmisc，直接从latex核心代码和hyperref代码进行修改 + %v1.0q 20190317 hzz + %v1.0r 20190422 hzz 根据gbfnperpage选项设置 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfnperpage}% + {\@addtoreset{footnote}{page}}{}%重设计数器 + + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{%加载hyperref则对\H@@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\H@@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\H@@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + }{%否则对latex核心代码中的\@footnotetext做重定义 + \long\def\@footnotetext##1{\insert\footins{% + \reset@font\footnotesize + \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty + \splittopskip\footnotesep + \splitmaxdepth \dp\strutbox \floatingpenalty \@MM + \hsize\columnwidth \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel{% + \csname p@footnote\endcsname\@thefnmark + }% + \color@begingroup + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox% + }% + \color@endgroup}}% + + \long\def\@mpfootnotetext##1{% + \global\setbox\@mpfootins\vbox{% + \unvbox\@mpfootins + \reset@font\footnotesize + \hsize\columnwidth + \@parboxrestore + \protected@edef\@currentlabel + {\csname p@mpfootnote\endcsname\@thefnmark}% + \leftskip \footbibmargin%增加的左侧缩进 + \color@begingroup + \@makefntext{% + \rule\z@\footnotesep\ignorespaces##1\@finalstrut\strutbox}% + \color@endgroup}} + } + + \long\def\@makefntext##1{%增加了脚注标记与正文的间隔 + \parindent 1em\noindent \hb@xt@ 0em{\hss \@makefnmark\makebox[\footbiblabelsep]{}}##1} + + } + + % + %使脚注标记加圈并设置数字的字体为tiny，不使用修改thefootnote的方式 + \def\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}}} + %做patch使得脚注内容中的脚注数字标签不上标 + \pretocmd{\@makefntext}{% + \def\@makefnmark{% + \hbox{\textcircled{\tiny\@thefnmark}}% + }% + }{}{} + } + + % + %判断当前文献是否已经引用过且是做的footfullcite(即已经作为脚注输出文献内容) + %记录首次输出时的脚注号码，用于后面再次引用该文献时的输出，比如同(4)。 + %v1.0q 20190309 区分使脚注标注适应minipage中的情况 + \newbibmacro*{citesavefn}{% + \ifciteseen%当被引用过为true + {\ifcsdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}%当已经定义过脚注序号信息 + {\csgdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \str@sameentry\gdef\@thefnmark{\csuse{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}% + \@makefnmark% + }}% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + }}% + }% + {\csxdef{sec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}{% + \ifcsstring{@mpfn}{mpfootnote}{\@alph\c@mpfootnote}{\thefootnote}% + %判断在minipage中比较麻烦，这里使用\@mpfn的定义进行判断 + }}% + } + + % + %重定义\footfullcite使完成gb7714-2015的脚注文献要求 + \DeclareCiteCommand{\footfullcite}[\mkbibfootnote]% + {\defcounter{maxnames}{\blx@maxbibnames}%局部定义maxnames和minnames计数器 + \defcounter{minnames}{\blx@minbibnames}%使footfullcite内的作者输出与正文文献表中的一致。 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printtext{\thefield{postnote}}}}%由于ay样式中没有修改postnote域，此处因为格式需要不使用默认域格式 + }% + {\usebibmacro{citesavefn}% + \ifcsdef{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}% + {\csuse{labelsec\arabic{refsection}\arabic{page}et\thefield{entrykey}}}%\nopunct + {\usedriver{\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}}{\thefield{entrytype}}}% + }% + {\multicitedelim}% + {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + + } + + % + % 增加一个选项，用于控制gb7714的使用范围，即英文文献和中文文献使用不同的样式 + % 20180814，v1.0m，hzz + % 原理方法: + % 只为兼容性考虑不做任何处理 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstyle}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + } + + % + % 增加一个控制是否输出文献类型和载体标识的选项 + % + % 原理方法: + % 对于biblatex3.4以上版本DeclareBibliographyOption命令中的[datatype]如果是boolean，那么是可以省略的 + % 所以用老版本的不用[datatype]的命令可以兼容所有biblatex版本 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbtype} + %\DeclareBibliographyOption[boolean]{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex高版本 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtype}[true]{%biblatex低版本 + \settoggle{bbx:gbtype}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtype} + + % + % 增加一个源文件编码选择选项，当true时可以使用GBK编码。 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法：将需要输出的中文字符串用命令形式表示存储，采用utf8编码时采用bbx文档 + % 内的定义即是utf8编码的中文字符串，但tex源文件是gbk编码时，利用gb7714-2015-gbk.def + % 文档内的gbk编码的字符串覆盖。这种覆盖只能在宏包末尾加载时成功实现，所以使用 + % AtEndOfPackage。该解决思路源自biblatex-caspervector宏包。 + % 另外注意： + % gbk编码的tex文档，利用pdflatex/latex能正确编译，利用xelatex能编译，但中文显示乱码 + % 在源文档前面增加 XeTeX 原语：\XeTeXinputencoding "GBK" 后，显示正常 + % utf-8编码的tex文档，利用xelatex能正确编译，而pdflatex/latex不能编译。 + \newtoggle{bbx:codegbk} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbcodegbk}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:codegbk}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcodegbk} + + \def\str@bibliography{参考文献} + \def\str@references{参考文献} + \def\str@bytranslator{译} + \def\str@andotherscn{等} + \def\str@backrefpage{引用页} + \def\str@backrefpages{引用页} + \def\str@noaddress{出版地不详} + \def\str@nopublisher{出版者不详} + \def\str@edition{版} + \def\str@volumecn{卷} + \def\str@numbercn{册} + \def\str@serialcn{第} + \def\str@sameentry{同} + \def\str@incn{见} + \def\str@mathesiscn{硕士学位论文} + \def\str@phdthesiscn{博士学位论文} + \def\str@editorcn{主编} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:codegbk}{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{texencoding = GBK} + \input{gb7714-2015-gbk.def} + }{}} + + % + % 增加一个严格按GB/T 7714-2015给出著录格式控制域的输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.08, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为真，进而不输出GB/T 7714-2015中没有的域的信息 + % 这样可以避免因为bib文件带有多余的域的信息的输出，比如因为bibtex样式 + % 可能需要用于中英文判断的language域的信息。 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbstrict} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbstrict}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbstrict} + + % + % 增加一个控制标题域超链接设置的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.24, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 利用标题域格式来实现，默认设置该选项为false，不做超链接。 + % 设置为true，则标题设置超链接 + \newtoggle{bbx:titlelink} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbtitlelink}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:titlelink}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbtitlelink} + + % + % 增加一个控制参考文献标题是否能够被ctex宏包设置的选项 + % v1.0l, 2018.07.02, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 重定义biblatex的宏，去除使用本地化字符串的方式，是的可以利用ctexset进行设置 + \newtoggle{bbx:ctexset} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbctexset}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:ctexset}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbctexset} + + \AtEndOfPackage{% + \iftoggle{bbx:ctexset}{% + \def\blx@defbibstrings#1#2{% + \def\do##1{\csundef{abx@lstr@##1}\csundef{abx@sstr@##1}}% + \abx@dostrings + \csuse{abx@strings@#1}% + \setkeys{blx@lbx}{#2}% + \let\do\blx@defbibstrings@i + \csxdef{abx@strings@#1}{\abx@dostrings}% + } + }{}} + + + + % + % 增加一个恢复域格式为标准样式的控制选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.05.15, by hzz + % + % 原理方法: + % 默认设置该选项为false，采用国标要求的域格式输出相关域 + % 当设置该选项为true时，则重新利用标准样式的域格式输出相关的域 + \newtoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbfieldstd}[false]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{#1}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\execgbfdfmtstd}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbfieldstd} + + % + % 增加一个出版项自动处理控制选项，当true时使用出版者不详等信息补充缺失的出版信息。 + % + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpub} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpub}[true]{% + %\settoggle{bbx:gbpub}{#1} %或采用下面这一句 + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{\togglefalse{bbx:gbpub}}{\toggletrue{bbx:gbpub}}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpub} + + % + % 增加控制析出文献来源前的标点符号//输出的选项 + % v1.0k, 2018.04.20,added in by hzz + \newtoggle{bbx:gbpunctin} + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbpunctin}[true]{% + \settoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{#1}} + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbpunctin} + + + % + % 增加一个处理佚名或noauthor的控制选项 + % + % 原理方法:顺序编码制中与作者年制都使用 + \DeclareBibliographyOption{gbnoauthor}[true]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{false}{}{\dealnoathor}} + %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnoauthor=true}%对于需要展开较早(展开层级优先)的选项，这一执行无效，只能用宏包加载时给出的选项。 + + + + + % + % 选项设置 + % + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + sorting=none, + useprefix=true, %名字的信息包括前缀 + date = year, %日期仅写到年 + maxbibnames = 3,%设置名字最大数量 + minbibnames = 3, %设置缩减后的名字最小数量 + maxitems = 1,%设置列表最大数量 + minitems = 1, %设置缩减后的列表最小数量 + isbn=false, + sortlocale=zh__pinyin,%zh__big5han,%zh__stroke,%zh__gb2312han,%zh__pinyin, + } + + % + %为日期相关选项增加选项值gb7714-2015 + % + \csdef{mkdaterangegb7714-2015}#1{% + \begingroup + \blx@metadateinfo{#1}% + \iffieldundef{#1year} + {} + {\printtext[#1date]{% + \blx@gbdate{#1}{}}}% + \endgroup} + + \newrobustcmd*{\blx@gbdate}[3][]{% + \dateeraprintpre{#2#3year}% + \blx@imc@forcezerosy{\thefield{#2#3year}}\ifblank{#1}{}{\printfield{#1}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3month}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3month}}}% + \iffieldundef{#2#3day}{}{\hyphen\blx@imc@forcezerosmdt{\thefield{#2#3day}}}} + + + %为姓名格式选择增加的计数器 + \newcounter{gbnamefmtcase} + \def\thegbnamefmtcase{\the\c@gbnamefmtcase} + %为数字标签格式选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@bracket{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibbrackets{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@parens{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\mkbibparens{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@dot{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1\adddot}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@plain{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{##1}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@box{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\framebox{##1}}} + \def\gbbiblabelopt@circle{\renewcommand{\mkgbnumlabel}[1]{\textcircled{##1}}} + %为文献表中数字标签对齐方式选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbalignlabel} + \def\thegbalignlabel{\the\c@gbalignlabel} + %为引用标签标注/文献表中本地化字符串中英文选择增加的计数器/命令 + \newcounter{gbcitelocalcase} + \newcounter{gbbiblocalcase} + \def\thegbcitelocalcase{\the\c@gbcitelocalcase} + \def\thegbbiblocalcase{\the\c@gbbiblocalcase} + + + % + % 增加不同语言排序的切换选项，numeric样式，不使用该选项 + % gblanorder=chineseahead的顺序为cn，jp，kr，en，fr，ru + % gblanorder=englishahead的顺序为en，fr，ru，cn，jp，kr + % gblanorder=cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr的顺序为指定的cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr，自定义内容可以随意写以分号分隔 + % v1.0q，20190307，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblanorder}[chineseahead]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chineseahead}%%中文在前的顺序 + {\gdef\lancnorder{1}\gdef\lanjporder{2}\gdef\lankrorder{3}% + \gdef\lanenorder{4}\gdef\lanfrorder{5}\gdef\lanruorder{6}}% + {% + \ifstrequal{#1}{englishahead}% + {\execlanodeah\dealsortlan}% + {\execlanodudf{#1}\dealsortlan}% + }% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblanorder} + + \def\execlanodeah{%中文在后的顺序 + \gdef\lancnorder{4} + \gdef\lanjporder{5} + \gdef\lankrorder{6} + \gdef\lanenorder{1} + \gdef\lanfrorder{2} + \gdef\lanruorder{3}} + + \newcounter{lanordernum} + \newcommand{\execlanodudf}[1]{%like：cn;en;ru;fr;jp;kr + \setcounter{lanordernum}{0} + \DeclareListParser{\parsinglanorder}{;} + \renewcommand*{\do}[1]{\stepcounter{lanordernum}\csxdef{lan##1order}{\thelanordernum}} + \parsinglanorder{#1} + } + + % + % 增加本地化字符串的中英文切换选项 + % gbcitelocal指标注中的本地化字符串 + % gbbiblocal 指文献表中的本地化字符串 + % gblocal 指设置文献表和标注中的本地化字符串 + % v1.0o，20190103，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbcitelocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbcitelocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal} + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{chinese}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{english}{\setcounter{gbbiblocalcase}{2}}{}% + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal} + + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gblocal}[gb7714-2015]{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblocal=#1}% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbcitelocal=#1}% + } + %\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gblocal} %默认值已经通过两个相关选项设置 + + % + % 增加序号标签格式处理选项 + % v1.0l，20180623，hzz + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbbiblabel}[bracket]{% + \csuse{gbbiblabelopt@#1} + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbbiblabel} + + % + % 增加姓名大小写格式处理选项 + % + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbnamefmt}[uppercase]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{uppercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{0}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{lowercase}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{1}}{}% + \ifstrequal{#1}{givenahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{2}}{}%given-family + \ifstrequal{#1}{familyahead}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{3}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{pinyin}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{4}}{}%family-given + \ifstrequal{#1}{reverseorder}{\setcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{5}}{}%family-given/given-family + } + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{gbnamefmt} + + % + % 增加标签对齐选项 + % + % right是默认的右对齐，left是左对齐，gb7714-2015是项对齐方式 + \DeclareBibliographyOption[string]{gbalign}[right]{% + \ifstrequal{#1}{right}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{0}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{left}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{1}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{center}{\setcounter{gbalignlabel}{2}}{} + \ifstrequal{#1}{gb7714-2015}{\setaligngbstyle}{} + } + + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + giveninits=true, + urldate =gb7714-2015, %iso，iso8601，edtf + eventdate =gb7714-2015, + labeldateparts=true, + } + +% +% 针对3.13<=biblatex版本的选项设置，因为内容有限，所以不做版本区分，而用时间直接判断 +% +% 解决国标中“王临慧, 2010a.”和“王临慧, 等, 2010b.”的问题 +% 在没有这个选项之前无法加上a和b +% v1.0s，20190828 +\@ifpackagelater{biblatex}{2019/08/16}{% + \ExecuteBibliographyOptions{% + nohashothers=true}}{} + +%===================================================================== +% 设置本地化字符串 +%===================================================================== + % + % 新建当地化字符串，用来记录“等”字符、“和”字符 + % + \NewBibliographyString{andotherscn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersincite} + \NewBibliographyString{andcn} + \NewBibliographyString{andothersjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andotherskr} + \NewBibliographyString{andjp} + \NewBibliographyString{andkr} + \NewBibliographyString{andincitecn} + \NewBibliographyString{andincite} + \NewBibliographyString{volumecn} + \NewBibliographyString{numbercn} + \NewBibliographyString{serialcn} + \NewBibliographyString{incn} + \NewBibliographyString{mathesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{phdthesiscn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorcn} + \NewBibliographyString{editorscn} + \NewBibliographyString{bytranslatorcn} + + + + % + % 修改一些当地化字符串 + % + % 原理方法:直接利用当地化格式english修改出一些中文的格式，具体修改内容参考english.lbx文件 + % 当然也可以增加比如上面定义的andotherscn + % 注意:在lbx文件和bbx文件中定义本地字符串的不同语法，两个参数和一个参数的区别 + + \DefineBibliographyStrings{english}{ + bibliography = {\str@bibliography}, + references = {\str@references}, + bytranslatorcn = {\str@bytranslator},%\addperiod，%将trans. by 改成 译\addcomma\ + and = {\addcomma},%将第2和3人名间的and符号改成逗号，用\finalnamedelim命令也可以定义，参见3.9.1节 + andcn = {\addcomma},%and本地化字符串的中文对应词 + andincitecn = {\addcomma},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andincite = {\addcomma}, + %andothers = {et al.},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andotherscn = {\str@andotherscn},%将超过3个人名的省略，et al.改成为 等 + andothersincitecn={\str@andotherscn},%将标注中的分开，便于与文献表中的区分 + andothersincite={et al\adddot}, + backrefpage = {\str@backrefpage:}, + backrefpages = {\str@backrefpages:}, + in={in\intitlepunct}, + volumecn={\str@volumecn}, + numbercn={\str@numbercn}, + serialcn={\str@serialcn}, + andothersjp={他}, + andotherskr={외}, + andjp={和}, + andkr={和}, + incn={\str@incn\addcolon\addspace}, + mathesiscn={\str@mathesiscn}, + phdthesiscn={\str@phdthesiscn}, + editorscn={\str@editorcn}, + editorcn={\str@editorcn}, +} + + % + % 增加两个命令用于临时的局部的修改本地化字符串 + % 其中\setlocalbibstring修改缩写字符串，setlocalbiblstring修改长字符串 + % 注意使用时因为是局部修改，因此要将其与需要修改的引用命令放在一个编组符号内 + % v1.0t，hzz，20190525 + \newcommand{\setlocalbibstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@sstr@#1}{#2}} + \newcommand{\setlocalbiblstring}[2]{% + \csdef{abx@lstr@#1}{#2}} + +%===================================================================== +% 动态数据修改 +%===================================================================== +% +% 各层次的数据映射和动态修改 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1. 进行语言包括中英文判断，并设置和记录，比如记录到userf，usere中 +% 2. 增加文献标识符如[M],[J]等，对一些容易混淆的域进行设置以增强兼容性 +% 3. \DeclareSourcemap命令对于biblatex3.11以下版本只能出现一次，3.11版开始支持多个 +% 4. \DeclarestyleSourcemap在biblatex v3.7版开始可以支持出现多次 +% 5. 把作者和译者信息准确的记录到userf，usere中，用于后面判断是否是cjk字符。 +% 注意:这里用userf，usere而不是namee，namef，是因为只有把name列表转成域，才能有效读取姓名中的字符， +% 如果用namee，namef，name信息会自动解析，所以就不能为cjk判断提供需要的信息 +% +% 不同的文献类型使用相同的驱动输出可以有5种方法： +% 1. 是数据源层的映射，将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 2. 是样式层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 3. 是驱动层映射，也是将其它类型转换为某一要使用驱动的类型 +% 4. 定义驱动类型别名DeclareBibliographyAlias，将其它类型定义为某一要使用驱动的类型的别名 +% 驱动别名定义本质上是做了驱动层映射 +% 5. 直接定义不同的类型的驱动，但驱动内容相同。 +% +% 关于数据映射和驱动使用的考虑如下： +% 1. 为避免利用biber输出bib文件时的数据变动，尽量不在数据源层映射做类型转换 +% 2. 为减少代码量，尽量少做内容相同的不同类型驱动 +% 3. 因此类型相关的处理主要在样式层映射、驱动层映射、驱动别名 +% 4. 由于biblatex默认做的驱动别名处理可能增加一些信息比如masterthesis转thesis时增加的type +% 可以在样式层映射做某些需要避免这种默认处置的转换 +% 5. 当没有避免默认行为的需求时，全部采用驱动别名的方式处理，等价于驱动层的映射 +% +% 文献类型和驱动考虑如下： +% 1. 连续出版物及析出文献有其特殊性，因此考虑两类periodical和article +% newpaper映射为article，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% 2. 专著和专著中的析出文献是主要的类型，因此考虑book和inbook +% standard映射为book或inbook，并以note域做区分特殊处理 +% collection和proceedings基本与book类似，因此做book驱动别名处理 +% incollection和inproceedings基本与inbook类似，因此做inbook驱动别名处理 +% 3. 专利类型有其特殊性，考虑patent类型 +% 4. 电子资源类型有其特殊性，考虑online类型 +% 5. 报告类型与book有点类似，出版项处理与book一样，但有时又要有修改和更新日期 +% 因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用report类型 +% 6. 手册/学位论文等类型与book有点类似，但对于出版项处理时，有缺省时，直接省略， +% 同时有version和edition的区别，因此考虑用一种类型来输出，使用manual类型 +% 7. 包括报告，学位论文在内的其它所有的类型，都做一个判断，当没有出版项时， +% 且存在网址信息时，将其转换为online类型输出，否则都做为manual类型输出。 +% 8. 备选类型misc当存在网址时直接转换为online，由于howpublished域可用于描述 +% 更多的信息，因此不存在网址时，独立做一个备选格式 +% 9. 出版项主要以如下方式处理： +% (a) location+institution+date 仅用于连续出版物 +% (b)publisher+location+date 用于需要完整输出出版项的类型，比如book，collection，proceedings，in*，report +% (c)institution+location+date 用于出版项缺失时不输出的类型，包括manual，thesis，archive等其他类型 +% (d)printlist{insitution} 用于电子资源，仅输出出版者或组织，为数据映射方便，本来默认的organization域转换为用insitution输出。 +% (e) 不输出，主要用于连续出版物析出的文献 +% 10. 日期以如下方式处理： +% date 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，数据源为date解析数据或year +% urldate 由于存在biblatex选项，因此通过选项控制，输出到日，且用[]包围，数据源为urldate +% newsdate 用于公告日期，公开日期或新闻日期，输出到日，但无包围符号，数据源为date +% modifydate 用于更新或修改日期，输出到日，且用()包围，数据源为date或enddate或eventdate + + +\DeclareSourcemap{ +\maps[datatype=bibtex]{% + \map{%当没有作者时将editor转成author + \pernottype{inbook}%因为in系列中editor可能用来表示bookauthor，所以排除 + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + \pernottype{periodical}%因为peridical直接使用editor，所以排除 + %注意notfield在低版本biblatex中没有 + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将editor复制给author + \step[fieldsource=editor,fieldtarget=author]%并删除editor + } + \map{%当没有作者时将translator转成author + \pernottype{inbook} + \pernottype{inproceedings} + \pernottype{incollection} + %\step[notfield=author,final]%当author不存在，将translator复制给author + \step[fieldsource=translator,fieldtarget=author]%并删除translator + } + \map{%让address和location同步，biblatex中address是location的别名 + %因此输出的时候只有location信息，但处理过程中是可以存在address的。 + %\step[notfield=address,final] + \step[fieldsource=location,final] + \step[fieldset=address,origfieldval] + } + \map{%让address和location同步 + %\step[notfield=location,final] + \step[fieldsource=address,final] + \step[fieldset=location,origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件用mark标记文献类型标识符的情况 + \step[fieldsource=mark,final] + \step[fieldset=usera, origfieldval] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为lowercase的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=lowercase,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={1}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为givenahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=givenahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={2}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为familyahead的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=familyahead,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={3}] + } + \map{%处理在bib文件中直接给出文献的姓名格式为pinyin的情况 + \step[fieldsource=nameformat,match=pinyin,final] + \step[fieldset=namefmtid,fieldvalue={4}] + } + \map{%根据article确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{article} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + } + \map{%根据periodical确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{periodical} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={J}] + \step[fieldsource=author] %有时会把author和editor混淆，处理后使用editor + \step[fieldset=editor, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%根据增加一个新闻报纸的类型newspaper确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{newspaper} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={N}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=news]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为article后判断 + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据库类型database确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{database} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个数据集类型dataset确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{dataset} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={DS}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个软件类型software确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{software} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CP}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个舆图类型map确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{map} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={CM}]% + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个档案类型archive确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{archive} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher] %有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{%因为misc类型本身就是没有类型，而不像其它文献有明确的类型，所以 + %当misc类型带有网址时，直接将其转换为online类型 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldsource=url,final] + \step[typesource=misc,typetarget=online] + } + \map{%对应增加的一个备选类型misc确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{misc} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}]% + } + \map{ + \pertype{book} + \pertype{inbook} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={M}] + \step[fieldsource=version] %有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后直接用edition + \step[fieldset=edition, origfieldval] + } + \map{%兼容老的standard类型，确定文献类型标识符 + \pertype{standard} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={S}] + \step[fieldset=note, fieldvalue=standard]%因为没有专门的驱动，记录note方便映射为book和inbook后判断 + } + \map{ + \pertype{patent} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={P}] + } + \map{ + \pertype{inproceedings} + \pertype{conference}%兼容老的conference类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{proceedings} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={C}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{incollection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{collection} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={G}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{report} + \pertype{techreport}%兼容老的techreport类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={R}] + \step[fieldsource=institution]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用publisher + \step[fieldset=publisher, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{thesis} + \pertype{mastersthesis}%兼容老的mastersthesis和phdthesis类型 + \pertype{phdthesis} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={D}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{online} + \pertype{electronic}%兼容老的electronic类型 + \pertype{www}%兼容老的www类型 + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={EB}] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval]%因为online的出版项处理类似手册 + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{manual} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={A}] + \step[fieldsource=edition]%有时会把version和edition混淆，处理后使用version + \step[fieldset=version, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=publisher]%有时会把publisher和institution混淆，处理后使用institution + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + \step[fieldsource=organization]%有时会把organization和institution混淆，处理后使用institution，以增强兼容性 + \step[fieldset=institution, origfieldval] + } + \map{ + \pertype{unpublished} + \step[fieldset=usera, fieldvalue={Z}] + } + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={author}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={editor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={translator}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map[overwrite]{%用于处理zotero从cnki导出中文文献姓名中存在逗号的情况 + \step[fieldsource={bookauthor}, match=\regexp{([\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}])\,\s*}, replace=\regexp{$1}] + }% + \map{%处理一些用year表示date的情况 + %这样处理将会设置date域，并使得labeldatesource变为空，因为date的前缀为空(如果是urldate，那么labeldatesource就是url)。 + %同时date域会被biblatex自动解析为year，month，day，并且覆盖原来的year信息 + \step[fieldsource=year] + \step[fieldset=date, origfieldval] + } + \map{%将entrykey放入keywords中用于后期使用 + \step[fieldsource=entrykey] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=title,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%文献题名的中文判断，将信息保存到userd中，避免因为标签生成原因导致title域被清除而产生问题 + \step[fieldsource=title, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]% + \step[fieldset=userd, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userd，且存在title域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=title,final] + \step[fieldset=userd,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=author,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%作者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=author, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userf, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userf，且存在author域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=author,final] + \step[fieldset=userf,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=translator,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%译者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=translator, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final] + \step[fieldset=usere, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置usere，且存在translator域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=translator,final] + \step[fieldset=usere,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=editor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=editor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userc, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=editor,final] + \step[fieldset=userc,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0100}-\x{017F}]},final]%\x80-\xFF + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={french}]%法语,0080开始到00ff的字符没法匹配有点奇怪 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{0400}-\x{052F}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={russian}]%俄语 + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{3040}-\x{30FF}\x{31F0}-\x{31FF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={japanese}]%日语 + } %确定形式后可增加类似andotherscn这样的本地化字符串处理 + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,match=\regexp{[\x{1100}-\x{11FF}\x{3130}-\x{318F}\x{AC00}-\x{D7AF}]},final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={korean}]%韩语 + } + \map{%编者的中文判断 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor, match=\regexp{[\x{2FF0}-\x{9FA5}]},final]%直接匹配cjk字符，unicode编码位置从2FF0到9FA5 + \step[fieldset=userb, fieldvalue={chinese}] + } + \map{%将没有设置userc，且存在editor域的默认设置为英文 + \step[fieldsource=bookauthor,final] + \step[fieldset=userb,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userd,final]%userd存在则用根据标题的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval]%本身language存在则不设定 + } + \map{\step[fieldsource=userf,final]%userd不存在，而userf存在则根据author的语言设定language + \step[fieldset=language,origfieldval] + }%如果没有作者和标题，那么剩下的最可能有意义的只有网址了，而网址通常是英文的，因此不用再进一步对其它域进行判断了。 + \map{%将没有设置的language设置成en，即认为不是中文的就是英文的。 + \step[fieldset=language,fieldvalue={english}] + } + \map{%一条文献的语言已经设定在language域中，由于出版项相关宏中使用userd判断， + %所以将一条文献的主体语言设定到userd中，本身前面userd已经设定，但没有处理无标题的情况， + %这里的处理等价于没有标题时，利用作者的语言设定userd，再没有作者，则默认用英文设定userd + \step[fieldsource=language] + \step[fieldset=userd,origfieldval] + } + \map{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + %biblatex 3.11及以下版本仅有match是区分大小写的，而3.12版开始用matchi来区分大小，而match不区分 + %这里为兼容3.11及以下版本，所以用一个复杂一点的正则表达式 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(e|E)(n|N)(g|G)(l|L)(i|I)(s|S)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder] + } + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(r|R)(u|U)(s|S)(s|S)(i|I)(a|A)(n|N)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={russian}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(f|F)(r|R)(e|E)(n|N)(c|C)(h|H)},final] + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={french}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(c|C)(h|H)(i|I)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(j|J)(a|A)(p|P)(a|A)(n|N)(e|E)(s|S)(e|E)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder] + } + \map{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=\regexp{(k|K)(o|O)(r|R)(e|E)(a|A)(n|N)},final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=langid,fieldvalue={english}] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder] + } +} +} + + +% +% 修改输入的参考文献数据，样式层的操作 +% + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{%尝试未定义数据模型的standard类型映射为其他类型book或inbook， + %standard类型在blx-dm中有出现，但仅定义了类型，域和约束等都没有定义 + %因为可能要映射两种类型，所以不能在驱动层处理，因为要做判断 + \step[fieldsource=booktitle,final]%当存在booktitle域是映射为inbook + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=inbook, final] + } + \map{%剩下的全部映射为book + \step[typesource=standard, typetarget=book, final] + } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=mastersthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=mathesis] +% } +% \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 +% \step[typesource=phdthesis, typetarget=thesis, final] +% %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=phdthesis] +% } + \map{%先于标准样式的driver层映射，以取消type设置 + \step[typesource=techreport, typetarget=report, final] + %\step[fieldset=type, fieldvalue=techreport] + } + \map{% + \pertype{report} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=report,typetarget=online] + \step[fieldset=note,fieldvalue={report}] + } + \map{% + \pertype{thesis} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=thesis,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{manual} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=manual,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{unpublished} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=unpublished,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{database} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=databasetypetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{dataset} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=dataset,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{software} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=software,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{map} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=map,typetarget=online] + } + \map{% + \pertype{archive} + %biblatex3.7以下版本用如下方式来替代，address和location已在sourcemap中同步 + \step[fieldset=location,fieldvalue={}] + \step[fieldsource=location,notmatch=\regexp{.},final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + %3.7以上版本用notfield + %\step[notfield=address,final]%当address不存在则继续 + \step[fieldsource=url,final]%地址不存在且存在url那么转变为online + \step[typesource=archive,typetarget=online] + } + \map[overwrite]{%这里还必须有overwrite，注意不同版本存在差异，比如texlive2015变16后biber有变化(20161207修改正确) + \step[fieldsource=note, final]%将note域信息复制给keywords，用于输出时容易区分标准和报纸 + \step[fieldset=keywords, fieldvalue={,}, append] + \step[fieldset=keywords, origfieldval, append] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\#}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\#}] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\%}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\%}] + } + \map[overwrite, foreach={title,booktitle,journaltitle,journal,publisher,% + address,location,institution,organization}]{ + \step[fieldsource=\regexp{$MAPLOOP}, match=\regexp{([^\\])\x26}, replace=\regexp{$1\\\x26}] + } + } + } + +% +% 佚名/noauthor的处理 +% +% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改实现 +\def\dealnoathor{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的中文文献设置为佚名 + \step[fieldsource=language,match={chinese},final] + \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={佚名}] + } + \map{%默认情况下将空缺作者的英文文献设置为A{non} + \step[fieldsource=language,match={english},final] + \step[fieldset=author, fieldvalue={A{non}}]%noauthor换成Anon，同时为避免大写还加了{} + } + } + } +} + +% +% 不同语言分集调整的实现方式 +% +% 原理方法:利用样式层的动态数据修改lansortorder域来实现排序 +\def\dealsortlan{ + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map[overwrite]{%当文献给出language域时，设置文献要使用的本地化字符串的语言 + \step[fieldsource=language,match=english,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanenorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{ + \step[fieldsource=language,match=russian,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanruorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=french,final] + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanfrorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=chinese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lancnorder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=japanese,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lanjporder] + } + \map[overwrite]{% + \step[fieldsource=language,match=korean,final]%中日韩语目前都用english， + \step[fieldset=lansortorder,fieldvalue=\lankrorder] + } + } + } +} + + + + +% +%驱动别名等价于驱动层映射 +% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{newspaper}{article}% +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{inproceedings}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{conference}{inbook}%会议论文文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{incollection}{inbook}%文集中析出文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{collection}{book}%%文集类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{proceedings}{book}%会议论文集文献类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{thesis}{manual}%学位论文驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{unpublished}{manual}%其它类型驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{database}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{dataset}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{software}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{map}{manual} +\DeclareBibliographyAlias{archive}{manual} + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置排序格式 +%===================================================================== +% +% 排序格式，用降序，及userb域，针对biblatex3.8及以上版本 +% +\DeclareSortingTemplate{gb7714-2015}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } + %\sort[final]{ + %\field{sortkey} + %} + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{%[direction=descending] + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的nyt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbnytd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort[direction=descending]{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %降序的ynt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbyntd}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort[direction=descending]{ + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + + %升序的ynt + \DeclareSortingTemplate{gbynta}{ + \sort{ + \field{presort} + } +% \sort[final]{ +% \field{sortkey} +% } + \sort{ + \field{lansortorder}%language + } + \sort{%[direction=ascending] + \field{sortyear} + \field{year} + } + \sort{ + \field{sortkey} + } + \sort{% + \field{sortname} + \field{author} + \field{editor} + \field{translator} + } + \sort{ + \field{sorttitle} + \field{title} + } + \sort{ + \field{volume} + \literal{0} + } + } + +%===================================================================== +% 参考文献表环境 +%===================================================================== +% +% 列表格式 +% +% 增加一个\bibitemindent尺寸用于控制list环境的itemindent +% v1.0l，20180615，hzz +% v1.0t,20200319,hzz,增加尺寸\biblabelextend使某些字体下标签宽度不足时可增加标签宽度 +\setlength{\bibhang}{\biblabelsep}% +\newlength{\bibitemindent} +\setlength{\bibitemindent}{0pt} +\newlength{\biblabelextend} +\setlength{\biblabelextend}{0pt} + + +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {\printtext[labelnumberwidth]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}}} + {\addtolength{\labelnumberwidth}{\biblabelextend}% + \setlength{\labelwidth}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\labelsep}{\biblabelsep}% + \setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelnumberwidth}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}% + \renewcommand*{\makelabel}[1]{\hss##1}} + {\endlist} + {\item} + +% +% 顺序编码制-标签对齐方式处理 +% +% 原理方法:利用选项提供的计数器数值做选择 +% 左对齐，右对齐为list环境下的处理，此时list环境的\labelwidth只能设置一个，是最宽标签的宽度 +% 项对齐则是在段落环境下做的处理。 +% 左对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距可变 +% 右对齐时，参考文献各项内容对齐，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等，标签与页边距离可变 +% 项对齐时，序号标签贴在页边，序号标签与参考文献项内容的间距相等 +% 修改序号标签格式为: +% \DeclareFieldFormat{shorthandwidth}{\mkbibbrackets{#1}} %源来自numeric.BBX +% \DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{\ttfamily\mkbibbrackets{#1}\hfill} +\DeclareFieldFormat{labelnumberwidth}{% +\ifcase\value{gbalignlabel}%右对齐，整个标签为右对齐 + \mkgbnumlabel{#1}% +\or%左对齐，整个标签为左对齐 + \mkgbnumlabel{#1}\hfill% +\or%中间对齐，比如：序号数字居于[]中间 + \hfil\mkgbnumlabel{\hfill#1\hfill}\hfil% +\fi} + +% +% 修改序号标签格式为以各条参文献为基础进行对齐的方式，即序号与条目内容间隔相等的方式。 +\def\setaligngbstyle{% +\def\blx@bibitem##1{% + \blx@ifdata{##1} + {\begingroup + \blx@getdata{##1}% + \blx@bibcheck + \iftoggle{blx@skipentry}{}{% + \blx@setdefaultrefcontext{##1}% + \global\let\blx@noitem\@empty + \blx@setoptions@type\abx@field@entrytype + \blx@setoptions@entry + \blx@thelabelnumber + \addtocounter{instcount}\@ne + \blx@initsep + \blx@namesep + \csuse{blx@item@\blx@theenv}\relax +% \blx@initsep %移动到上面去，恢复bibnamesep等的作用机制 +% \blx@namesep + \csuse{blx@hook@bibitem}% + \blx@execute + \blx@initunit + \blx@anchor + \blx@beglangbib + \bibsentence + \blx@pagetracker + \blx@driver\abx@field@entrytype + \blx@postpunct + \blx@endlangbib}% + \par\endgroup}%这里增加了一个\par + {}} +\newlength{\lengthid} +\newlength{\lengthlw} +\newcommand{\itemcmd}{% +\settowidth{\lengthid}{\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}} +\addtolength{\lengthid}{\biblabelsep} +\setlength{\lengthlw}{\textwidth} +\addtolength{\lengthlw}{-\lengthid} +\addvspace{\bibitemsep}%恢复\bibitemsep的作用 +%\parshape 2 0em \textwidth \lengthid \lengthlw +\hangindent\lengthid +\mkgbnumlabel{\printfield{labelnumber}}% +\hspace{\biblabelsep}} +% +% 简单的段落环境 +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} +{\begingroup\setlength{\parindent}{0em}} +{\endgroup} +{\itemcmd}} + + +%===================================================================== +% 设置单元或块等的标点 +%===================================================================== +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinithyphendelim}{\addhighpenspace}%用于处理姓名中名部分存在-的情况，比如ZHANG Yu-xin +\renewcommand*{\subtitlepunct}{\addcolon\addspace} %修改标题和其它标题信息间的标点，来源biblatex.def， +% +% 利用set实现的多语言文献不同语言间的分隔符 +% 20170411，双语之间用newline替换par，避免采用gb7714-2015的项对齐方式第二语言间分段导致没有缩进 +% +% 原理方法:set方法可以参考3.11.5 Entry Sets，4.11.1 Entry Sets +% 这里调整一下两种语言参考文献的间隔，源来自biblatex.def +\renewcommand*{\entrysetpunct}{\adddot\newline\nobreak} +\renewcommand*{\bibpagespunct}{\addcolon\addthinspace}%%页码引用格式的修改，修改为用冒号 +%\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{}%\par + +%===================================================================== +% 修改域的格式，重定义域的输出宏 +%===================================================================== +% +% 新增文献类型标识符的格式 +% []前的nobreak，从GB4.1节的例子看不应该加，所以去掉 +% 但因为考虑到cjk字符和[]之间可能添加空格，所以仍然加上 +% 而[]中间的内容，从4.6.2节的例子看也是可以分割的，因此内部的nobreak也可以去掉 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflag}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + }% + {\ifentrytype{online}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}}% + }}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak#1\nobreak\printtext{]}}% +} + +% +% 新增用于报纸的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflagn}{%用于报纸newspaper +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak N\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 新增用于标准的文献类型标识符的格式 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{gbtypeflags}{%用于标准standard +\iftoggle{bbx:gbmedium}% +{\iftoggle{bbx:url}% + {\iffieldundef{url}%当存在url时，增加一个OL标识符 + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\texttt{/}OL]}\nobreak}% + }% + {\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{\iffieldundef{medium}{}{\texttt{/}\thefield{medium}}]}\nobreak}% +}{\nobreak\printtext{[}\nobreak S\printtext{]}\nobreak}% +} + +% +% 重设title等参考文献信息的输出格式 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的原格式 +\newcommand{\bibtitlefont}{} +\newcommand{\bibauthorfont}{} +\newcommand{\bibpubfont}{} + +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{#1\isdot}%添加\isdot用于缩写名带点情况，将其转换为缩写点，便于标点的追踪 +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{#1} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [article,patent,thesis,unpublished] + {title}{#1\adddot\addthinspace}%\mkbibquote{#1\isdot} +\DeclareFieldFormat%将期刊等文献的标题中原来带的引号去掉 + [inbook,incollection,inproceedings] + {title}{#1}%\nopunct\unspace +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\url{#1}} %%url相关输出，url域修改如本行，源来自biblatex.def +\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}%设置url字体为roman字体%\ttfamily +%\urlstyle{rm} %使用这句也一样 +\setcounter{biburlnumpenalty}{100} %让url可以在数字后断行 +\setcounter{biburlucpenalty}{100} %让url可以在大写字母后断行 +\setcounter{biburllcpenalty}{100} %让url可以在小写字母后断行 +\DeclareFieldFormat{doi}{% + \rmfamily{DOI}\addcolon\space + \ifhyperref + {\href{https://doi.org/#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}} + {\nolinkurl{#1}}} +% +% 标题的字母大小写格式修改 +% +% 注意:修改标题的字母大小写，不能用前面的title的格式而要用titlecase +% 因为titlecase is applied to the contents of the field directly，title is not +%\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\MakeCapital#1}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{\iftoggle{bbx:titlelink}{% +\iffieldundef{url}{\MakeCapital#1}{% +\href{\thefield{url}}{#1}}}{\MakeCapital#1}}%重设标题格式，将其修改为首字母大写 +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{#1}%去掉前面引导页码的pp.等字符，\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{#1} +\DefineBibliographyExtras{english}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}}%将页码间隔符替换会英文的短横线 +\DefineBibliographyExtras{russian}{\renewcommand*{\bibrangedash}{-}} + +\def\execgbfdfmtstd{%恢复到标准样式的设置 +\DeclareFieldFormat{title}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat + [article,inbook,incollection,inproceedings,patent,thesis,unpublished] + {title}{\mkbibquote{##1\isdot}} +\DeclareFieldFormat + [suppbook,suppcollection,suppperiodical] + {title}{##1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{journaltitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{issuetitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{maintitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{booktitle}{\mkbibemph{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{url}{\mkbibacro{URL}\addcolon\space\url{##1}} +\DeclareFieldFormat{titlecase}{##1} +\DeclareFieldFormat{pages}{\mkpageprefix[bookpagination]{##1}} +} + +% +% 文献标题后的标点问题 +% v1.0k，20180405，为texlive2017以上版本中的beamer兼容性做的处理，Hu Zhenzhen +% +% 原理方法:如下代码处理texlive2017以上版本中，beamer中文献的标题后出现两个点的情况: +% texlive2017以上的beamer中对macro{title}做了patch，正常情况下不会出现两个点的情况，但由于 +% 之前为了处理texlive2015，2016下的title格式添加了adddot，导致出现两个点的情况，而且也影响 +% 析出文献的//符号的输出，因此再次对macro{title}做patch消除beamer中做apptocmd时添加的\newunitpunct + {%texlive 2017对应iftlseven以上版本 + \@ifclassloaded{beamer}{ + \DeclareFieldFormat{title}{#1}% + \DeclareFieldFormat[article,patent,thesis,unpublished]{title}{#1} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \patchcmd{\abx@macro@title}{\newunitpunct}{}{}{}}}{} + } + + +% +% 修改译者位置格式 +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,增加对英文等其它语言译者的处理 +% +% 原理方法:修改来自biblatex.def文件的bytranslator+others宏的格式 +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+others}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifnameundef{translator} + {} + {\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}} + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \printnames[bytranslator]{translator}% + \clearname{translator}% + %从macro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}%中可以看到当地化字符串格式的引用前的代码处理 + %比如生成cotranslator等用于调用cotranslator所代表的当地化字符串 + \iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\usebibmacro{bytranslator+othersstrg}}{}%“译”的位置换到下面来，即放到译者后面。 + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \newunit}% + \usebibmacro{withothers}} + +\renewbibmacro*{bytranslator+othersstrg}{% + \def\abx@tempa{bytranslator}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{commentator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{co}% + \clearname{commentator}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{annotator} + {\appto\abx@tempa{an}% + \clearname{annotator}} + {}}% + \ifnamesequal{translator}{introduction} + {\appto\abx@tempa{in}% + \clearname{introduction}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{foreword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{fo}% + \clearname{foreword}} + {\ifnamesequal{translator}{afterword} + {\appto\abx@tempa{af}% + \clearname{afterword}} + {}}}% +\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\bibstring{bytranslatorcn}} + {\bibstring{\abx@tempa}}} + +% +% 修改作者数量超过限定值，做省略时的处理格式 +% v1.0,20160701,hzz +% v1.0O,20190103,hzz,修改利用新定义的一个分隔符strandothersdelim +% v1.0w,20210401,hzz,针对其它语言的译者后的标点与中文不同做处理 +% 原理方法:判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符等，否则用et al. 。 +% \printnames由start-stop控制项数，默认是1和maxnames/minnames +\renewbibmacro*{name:andothers}{\bibauthorfont% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{\value{liststop}}} + and + test \ifmorenames + }{\ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{1}%注意这里试图去区分姓名总数大于1的情况，当姓名总数大于1时，最后一个姓名后面先加入一个\finalandcomma + {\finalandcomma}%目前国标没有这样的区分要求，如果有需要也是可以这么去做的。 + {}% +\printdelim{andothersdelim}\printdelim{strandothersdelim}% +}{%当是译者的时候需要特殊处理：从7.2节看等，译前面加逗号，但从示例看等和译同时出现时，译前的逗号没有，比如： +%袁训来, 陈哲, 肖书海, 等. +%胡泳, 范海燕, 译. +%潘惠霞, 魏婧, 杨艳, 等译. +\ifcurrentname{translator}{\iffieldequalstr{usere}{chinese}{\addcomma\addthinspace}{}}{}%为了实现上述第二个示例情况做的处理 +}} + + +% +% 修改省略作者后的本地化字符串，比如et al. +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andotherscn=“等”，否则用andothers=“et al.”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}%这里使用\iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}替代ifcurrentname因为标注中使用ifcurrentname无效 + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{labelnamesource}{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\ifbibstring{andothersincitecn}{\bibstring{andothersincitecn}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%中文已经通过english本地化字符串定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\ifbibstring{andotherskr}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%韩语未定义，所以与bib中一致 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\ifbibstring{andothersjp}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%日与同韩语 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\ifbibstring{andothersincite}{\bibstring{andothersincite}}{\bibstring{andothers}}}{}%英语已定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%法语未定义，若要定义需要针对french本地化字符串定义 + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}%俄语未定义，若要定义需要针对russian本地化字符串定义 + \or% + \bibstring{andothersincitecn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothersincite}% + \fi} + + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{strandothersdelim}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andotherscn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andotherskr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andothersjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{andothers}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{andotherscn}% + \or% + \bibstring{andothers}% + \fi} + +% +% 修改最后一个作者前的字符串，比如 and +% v1.0o,20190103,hzz +% +% 原理方法:默认情况下判断作者或译者是否中文，若中文用字符andcn=“和”，否则用and=“and”。 +% 非默认情况，根据选项信息，选择选择强制中文或英文 +% 首先设置全局的，然后设置文献表中的，这一等价于将所有的cite命令环境都设置过了 +% 而不用对每一个引用命令单独设置，比如cite，parancite，textcite都设置 +\DeclareDelimFormat{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% + \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbcitelocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andincitecn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{andincite}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andincitecn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andincite}\space% + \fi} + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{finalnamedelim}{% + \ifnumgreater{\value{liststop}}{2}{\finalandcomma}{}% + \addspace% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{translator}{\edef\userfieldabcde{usere}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{author}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userf}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{andcn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{andkr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{andjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\bibstring{and}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\bibstring{and}}{}% +\space% + \or% + \bibstring{andcn}\space% + \or% + \bibstring{and}\space% + \fi} + + +% +% 重设title的输出 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为标题增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 原理方法:将文献类型标识符输出出去，原输出来自biblatex.def文件 +% 利用toggle做标识符是否输出的判断 +\renewbibmacro*{title}{% + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont%增加字体控制命令 + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{note}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母，判断一下，是否是报纸和标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{\printfield[gbtypeflags]{usera}}%判断是否为标准 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\printfield[gbtypeflagn]{usera}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}%其它 + }}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit +}% +}} + +% +% 作者信息的输出格式 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，为作者增加字体控制命令，Hu Zhenzhen +% 20180603，v1.0l，增加使用nameformat域来选择姓名格式 +\DeclareNameFormat{namefmtselected}{% +\iffieldundef{namefmtid}{}% +{\defcounter{gbnamefmtcase}{\thefield{namefmtid}}}% +\ifcase\value{gbnamefmtcase}% + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gbuppercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:gblowercase} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or + \ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% +\or +\usebibmacro{name:gbpinyin} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}% +\or + \ifnumequal{\value{listcount}}{1} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:family-given} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartgiven} + and + test {\ifdefvoid\namepartprefix}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{name:revsdelim}}} + {\ifgiveninits + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiveni} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}} + {\usebibmacro{name:given-family} + {\namepartfamily} + {\namepartgiven} + {\namepartprefix} + {\namepartsuffix}}}% +\fi + \usebibmacro{name:andothers}} + +\DeclareNameAlias{default}{namefmtselected}%姓名的默认格式采用可选的模式 +\DeclareNameAlias{sortname}{default}% Used in the bibliography %family-given/given-family +\DeclareNameAlias{citename}{default}% Default used by \citename + +\DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{andothersdelim}{\addcomma\addspace} +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，全部大写 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbuppercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}% + \ifuseprefix% + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital% + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot}% + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeUppercase{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号 +} + +%GB/T 7714-2015 风格，大小写不变，根据bib文件内输入原样输出 +\newbibmacro*{name:gblowercase}[4]{\bibauthorfont% + \renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉 + \renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%后缀前加逗号 + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {}{\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\addcomma\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}%%后缀前加逗号 +} + +%中文常见风格，汉语拼音全拼模式 +\newbibmacro*{name:gbpinyin}[4]{\bibauthorfont% +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibinitperiod}{}%将名字简写后的点去掉，%来源biblatex2.STY +\renewcommand*{\revsdnamepunct}{}%%来源biblatex.def +\renewrobustcmd*{\bibnamedelima}{\mbox{-}}% + \ifuseprefix + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#3#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#3#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{% + \ifcapital + {\mkbibnameprefix{\MakeCapital{#3}}\isdot} + {\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot}% + \ifprefchar{}{\bibnamedelimc}}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\revsdnamepunct\bibnamedelimd\MakeSentenceCase{\mkbibnamegiven{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}} + {\usebibmacro{name:delim}{#1}% + \usebibmacro{name:hook}{#1}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeCapital{#1}}}{\mkbibnamefamily{\MakeUppercase{#1}}}\isdot% + \ifboolexpe{% + test {\ifdefvoid{#2}} + and + test {\ifdefvoid{#3}}} + {} + {\revsdnamepunct}% + \ifdefvoid{#2}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamegiven{\MakeCapital{#2}}\isdot}%\MakeCapital + \ifdefvoid{#3}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnameprefix{#3}\isdot} + \ifdefvoid{#4}{}{\bibnamedelimd\mkbibnamesuffix{#4}\isdot}}% +} + + +% +% url和url日期格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{url+urldate}{% + %\usebibmacro{url}%%更换url的位置，放到下面 + \iffieldundef{urlyear}% + {}{%\setunit*{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{urldate}}% + \setunit{\addperiod\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{url}} +\renewbibmacro*{url}{\printfield{url}} + + +% +% 日期信息的输出格式，针对biblatex>=3.10版本 +% + \DeclareFieldFormat{urldate}{#1} + \renewbibmacro*{urldate}{% + \addthinspace\printtext{[}\printurldate\printtext{]}}%能用高层命令+选项尽量用命令(比如这里的\printurldate)，而不用\blx@edtfdate这种更底层的命令 + + % + % 专利的公告日期、或报纸的日期的输出宏 + % 20160701，v1.0，新增加 + % 20180405，为biblatexv3.10版本，出现多出点bug做处理，Hu Zhenzhen + % + % 原理方法:加上printtext避免破坏异步标点机制 + % 本可以用\printdate，但由于date选项设置为year，所以仅会给出年份 + % 所以无法再用选项设置的方法，印象需要用底层的命令 + % 这里可以用\blx@isodate，但用\blx@gbdate试图避免版本判断 + \newbibmacro*{newsdate}{%% + \printtext{\blx@gbdate{}{}}%%\blx@isodate{}{}% + } + + % + \newbibmacro*{modifydate}{%新增加一个带括号的日期，用于表示电子资源的更新和修改日期，而公告日期则按日期格式 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% + }% + {}%更新或修改日期通常有day信息 + {\iffieldundef{year}{% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{\iffieldundef{eventyear}{}{\printtext{(}\printeventdate\printtext{)}}}% + {\printtext{(}\printenddate\printtext{)}}% + }{\iffieldequalstr{year}{}{%因为year存在，但为空 + }{\printtext{(}\blx@gbdate{}{}\printtext{)}}% + }% + }}% + + +% +% biblatex>v3.8版利用related实现双语文献的处理 +% + %为了实现v3.8以上版本的双语文献，采用related的方法代替set方法，因为set方法已经无法实现了， + %因为set不再复制其第一个成员的信息。于是定义一个命令，用于动态的修改数据，即添加related域的信息 + %其中使用了\DeclareStyleSourcemap，但由于其只能出现在导言区中，因此\defdoublelangentry命令也只能出现在导言区中 + \newcommand{\defdoublelangentry}[2]{% + \edef\entrykeya{##1} + \edef\entrykeyb{##2} + \DeclareStyleSourcemap{ + \maps[datatype=bibtex]{ + \map{ + \step[fieldsource=entrykey, match=\entrykeya, final] + \step[fieldset=related, fieldvalue=\entrykeyb] + } + } + } + } + +% +% 关联文献间的分隔符 +% +\renewcommand{\relateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak}%\par，而作者年样式不需要修改，因为没有项对齐的标签问题 + +% +% 关联文献块前的分隔符，针对biblatex>=3.11 +% +% 原理方法:因为增加了begrelateddelim钩子，所以不需要重定义related输出宏 +\renewcommand{\begrelateddelim}{\adddot\newline\nobreak} + + +% +% 调整doi+eprint+url格式 +% +% 原理方法:源来自standard.bbx，因为页码后面直接跟引用日期，没有标点所以去掉其中的标点。 +\renewbibmacro*{doi+eprint+url}{% +% \iftoggle{bbx:doi}%把doi的位置放到url后面 +% {\printfield{doi}} +% {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\iffieldundef{eprint}{}{\newunit\usebibmacro{eprint}}} + {}% + %\newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:url} + {\usebibmacro{url+urldate}} + {} + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:doi} + {\printfield{doi}} + {}} + +% +% 调整页码的格式，即chapter+pages格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{chapter+pages}{% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printfield{chapter}}% + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{%这里增加一个判断，当没有页码时就不输出 + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit %这里的标点去掉 +} + +% +% 当location等出版项超过maxitem缩减后不再输出etal +% +\DeclareListFormat{location}{% + \usebibmacro{list:delim}{#1}% + #1\isdot} +\DeclareListAlias{institution}{location} +\DeclareListAlias{publisher}{location} + +% 新增一个样式用于输出连续出版物的地址，单位，时间， +% 用于periodical连续出版物的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% v1.0k，20180425，为出版信息增加字体控制命令，hzz +% %类似\newbibmacro*{publisher+location+date} +\newbibmacro*{location+institution+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifboolexpr{% +test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{institution}}% +}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}% +{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}% +}{% +\iflistundef{location}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}}}% + {\printlist{location}}% +\addcolon\addspace% +\iflistundef{institution}{% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}}{\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}}}% +{\printlist{institution}}}% +\setunit{\addcomma\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}% + \printfield{year}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}}% + \newunit}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{institution}% + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + \newunit}% +} +% +% 通用的出版社和地址的处理 +% +% 原理方法:当没有出版社地址时，直接判断title的信息是否是中文，若为中文，则写出版地不详，否则用英文的字符表示。 +% 事实上title对于每个文献来说是必须的，所以用它判断是最快的，而且一般标题和出版社的语言是一样的。 +% 注意标准standard类型，因为当没有出版项时直接省略，所以做特殊处理 +\renewbibmacro*{publisher+location+date}{\bibpubfont% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbpub}% +{\testCJKfirst{userd}% + \ifboolexpr{ test {\iflistundef{location}} and test {\iflistundef{publisher}} }% + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress}\space :\space\str@nopublisher]}{\printtext{[S.l.\space :\space s.n.\adddot]}}}}% + {\iflistundef{location}{%\adddot + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}%%从gbt7714-2015标准第19页看到，标准存在出版项时输出，没有时完全省略。 + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@noaddress]}\addcolon\addspace}{\printtext{[S.l.\adddot]}\addcolon\addspace}}}% \bibstring{noaddress} + {\printlist{location}\addcolon\addspace}%%\addcolon\addspace% + \iflistundef{publisher}{% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{standard}{}% + {\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{[\str@nopublisher]}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}% + {\printtext{\mkbibbrackets{s.n.}}\setunit{\adddot\addspace}\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}}}}% + {\printlist{publisher}}}% +\setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%\addcomma\addspace% +\usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit %去掉这个标点 +}% +{\printlist{location}% + \iflistundef{publisher} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{publisher}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}%%\newunit + }% +} + +% +% 修改了一个institution+location+date用于manual、report、thesis等类型 +% +% 20180425，v1.0k，增加了字体控制命令，hzz +% 20190105，v1.0o，加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 +\renewbibmacro*{institution+location+date}{\bibpubfont%当没有institution时不处理。 +{\printlist{location}%%加了一个编组避免\usebibmacro{date}把month和day信息去掉 + \iflistundef{institution} + {\setunit*{\addcomma\space}} + {\setunit*{\addcolon\space}}% + \printlist{institution}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{date}% + %\newunit + }} + +% +% 对volume卷信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{volume}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{volumecn}}% +{\bibstring{volume}~#1}% +}% volume of a book +\DeclareFieldFormat[article,periodical]{volume}{#1}% volume of a journal + +% +% 对number册信息格式做出修改 +% v1.0o,20190105,hzz +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{number}{#1}% +\DeclareFieldFormat[book,collection,inbook,% +incollection,proceedings,inproceedings]{number}{% +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\bibstring{serialcn}#1\bibstring{numbercn}}% +{#1}% +}% + +% +% 对edition版本信息格式做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{edition}{%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}% +{\ifinteger{#1}% +{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}% +{#1\isdot}}% +{\ifinteger{#1}% +{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{edition}}% +{#1\isdot}}} + +% +% 对version的版本信息做出修改 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{version}{%源来自biblatex.DEF +\testCJKfirst{userd}% +\ifinteger{#1}% +{\iftoggle{ifCJKforgbt}{\printtext{#1\str@edition}}% +{\mkbibordedition{#1}~\bibstring{version}}}% +{#1\isdot}} + +% +% 修改析出文献的文集的标题与附加标题间的符号 +% +\renewbibmacro*{booktitle}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test {\iffieldundef{booktitle}} + and + test {\iffieldundef{booksubtitle}} + } + {} + {\printtext[booktitle]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{booktitle}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{booksubtitle}}% + \newunit%标点换成下一句 + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}}% + \printfield{booktitleaddon}} + + +% +% 调整期刊名的格式 +% +% v1.0k,20180425,增加了字体控制命令，hzz +\renewbibmacro*{journal+issuetitle}{\bibpubfont%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{journal}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\addcomma\addspace}%修改为增加一个逗号 + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}% + %\setunit{\addspace}% + \usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcomma\space}}% + %换成逗号和空格 + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \usebibmacro{volume+number+eid}%把卷期放到年份后面 + %\newunit + } + + + +% +% 调整期刊卷和期的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx +\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{% + \printfield{volume}% + \setunit*{\adddot}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}{% + \printfield{volume}% + %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号 + %\printfield{number}% + \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printtext{\mkbibparens{\printfield{number}}}}%增加一个圆括号 + \iffieldundef{eid}{}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}}} + +% +% 调整期刊年份的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{%去掉括号 + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}% + {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}% + %\usebibmacro{date} + \iffieldundef{note}{\usebibmacro{date}}%判断一下，是否是报纸 + {\iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{\usebibmacro{newsdate}}%判断是否为报纸 + {\usebibmacro{date}}% + }}}% + %\newunit + } + +% +% 调整页码前的标点和去掉期刊文章等页码后面的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{note+pages}{%源来自standard.bbx + %\printfield{note}%不要note，note用来判断是否是报纸newspaper + \iffieldundef{pages}{}{ + \setunit{\bibpagespunct}% + \printfield{pages}}% + %\newunit + } + + +% +% 编者的符号修改一下 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editor}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\printnames{editor}% + \iffieldundef{editortype}%增加一个类型判断，用于存在editortype的情况 + {\setunit\addspace}%当没有editortype时，直接用句点 + {%\setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}}% + %\clearname{editor} + }% + {}} + +% +% 编者类型做一修改 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype不同语言的不同本地化字符串 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editorstrg}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \printtext[editortype]{% + \iffieldundef{editortype} + {% +% \ifboolexpr{ %这一段去掉，未定义编者类型情况下不处理 +% test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} +% or +% test {\ifandothers{editor}} +% } +% {\bibstring{editors}} +% {\bibstring{editor}} + } + {\ifbibxstring{\thefield{editortype}} %定义编者类型情况下处理，以后根据需要修改 + {\ifboolexpr{ + test {\ifnumgreater{\value{editor}}{1}} + or + test {\ifandothers{editor}} + } + {\printdelim{streditortypes}} + {\printdelim{streditortype}}} + {\thefield{editortype}}}% + }} + +% +% 编者类型的本地化字符串输出 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 能对不同条目类型作格式设置的域格式，能对不同环境做格式设置的分隔符 +% 能对不同文境作设置的包括排序，标签等 +% 这里因为考虑可能标注和文献表中存在不同，所以用分隔符来输出本地化字符串 +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortypes}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}skr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}sjp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}scn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}s}% + \fi} +% +\DeclareDelimFormat{streditortype}{% + \edef\userfieldabcde{userd}% + \ifcurrentname{editor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userc}}{}% + \ifcurrentname{bookauthor}{\edef\userfieldabcde{userb}}{}% + \ifcase\value{gbbiblocalcase}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{chinese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{korean}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}kr}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{japanese}{\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}jp}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{english}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{french}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \iffieldequalstr{\userfieldabcde}{russian}{\addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}}{}% + \or% + \bibstring{\thefield{editortype}cn}% + \or% + \addcomma\addthinspace\bibstring{\thefield{editortype}}% + \fi} + + +% +% bookauthor域的输出， +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz +% 不再对editor和bookauthor做sourcemap，而是下面的宏内逻辑代替， +% 使得除使用bookauthor外也可以使用editor，便于在使用editor时使用editortype +\renewbibmacro*{bybookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}% + {\ifnameundef{editor}% + {}% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{editor}% + {}{\usebibmacro{editor}}}% + }% + {\ifnamesequal{author}{bookauthor}% + {}{\printnames{bookauthor}}% + }% +} + +% +% 修改期刊的标题 +% +\renewbibmacro*{periodical}{%源来自biblatex.DEF + \iffieldundef{title} + {} + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + %\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct} + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + %{}%把编组结束移到后面去 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{% + \iffieldundef{usera}{}{%在标题后直接给出文献标识字母 + \printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}}{} + }} + } + + +% +% 期刊的标题做修改 +% +\renewbibmacro*{title+issuetitle}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{periodical}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + \setunit*{\adddot\addspace}%标点修改为句点 + \iffieldundef{series} + {} + {\newunit + \printfield{series}% + \setunit{\addspace}}% + \usebibmacro{periodical+issue}%将issue调整到上面来，并修改 +\iffieldundef{number}{}{%%进一步处理有范围的数字 + \multinumberparser{\thefield{number}}}% + \iffieldundef{volume}% + {\printfield{year}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{\printfield{endyear}\printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + {\multivolparser{\thefield{volume}}% + \printfield{year}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolfirst}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumberfirst}}% + \bibrangedash% + \iffieldundef{endyear}{}{% + \printfield{endyear}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}%将冒号修改为逗号 + \printtext{\multivolsecond}% + \printtext{\mkbibparens{\multinumbersecond}}}% + }% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}% + \setunit{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{issue+date}% + %\setunit{\addcolon\space}% + \usebibmacro{issue}% + \newunit} + +% +% 新增一个样式用于调整期刊年份的格式，只打印年份 +% +\newbibmacro*{periodical+issue}{% + \printtext{%去掉了[parens] + \iffieldundef{issue} + {%\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + {\printfield{issue}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\usebibmacro{date}%修改为下一句 + }% + }% + %\newunit +} + +% +% 重设专利title的输出，将文献类型标识符输出出去 +% +\newbibmacro*{patenttitle}{%原输出来自biblatex.def文件 + \ifboolexpr{% + test{\iffieldundef{title}}% + and% + test{\iffieldundef{subtitle}}% + }% + {}% + {\printtext[title]{\bibtitlefont% + \printfield[titlecase]{title}% + \ifboolexpr{test {\iffieldundef{subtitle}}}%这里增加了对子标题的判断，解决不判断多一个点的问题 + {}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{subtitle}}% + \iffieldundef{titleaddon}{}%判断一下titleaddon，否则直接加可能多一个空格 + {\setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{titleaddon}}% + \setunit{\subtitlepunct}\printfield{number}%写专利号 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbtype}{\printfield[gbtypeflag]{usera}}{}% + %\iffieldundef{booktitle}{\newunit}{}%当title是析出时，不要标点 + %\newunit + }% +}% +} + + + +% +% 修改in:用于inbook、incollection、inproceedings等类型 +% 2018.04.20,v1.0k,renewed marco，by hzz +% 20190212,v1.0q,增加中英文区分，by hzz +% +% 原理方法:使用bibmacro{in:}改变了以前在driver中直接输出//的方式，同时也简化了标点控制。 +\renewbibmacro*{in:}{% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbpunctin}{\printtext{\allowbreak\texttt{//}\allowbreak}}%\addthinspace + {\setunit{\adddot\addspace}% + \iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{incn}}}% + {\printtext{\bibstring{in}}}% + }}%\newunit\newblock\intitlepunct + +% +% 修改type域的输出格式 +% 2019.02.12，v1.0q，byhzz +% 使其可以区分中英文输出不同的格式，比如博士论文英文输出PHD thesis，中文则是博士学位论文 +\DeclareFieldFormat{type}% +{\iffieldequalstr{userd}{chinese}% + {\ifbibxstring{#1cn}{\bibxstring{#1cn}}{#1}}% + {\ifbibstring{#1}{\bibstring{#1}}{#1}}% +} + + +% +% 修改series域的输出格式 +% 2019.05.01，v1.0r，byhzz +\renewbibmacro*{series+number}{% + \printfield{series}% + %\setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}% + %\newunit + } + +%===================================================================== +%设置驱动格式 +%===================================================================== +% +% book条目类的驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{book}{%源来自standard.bbx文件 + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% +\usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{maintitle+title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\newunit +\printlist{language}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{byauthor}% +\newunit\newblock}% +\usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +\newunit +\printfield{edition}% +\newunit\newblock%% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +\iffieldundef{maintitle}% +{\printfield{volume}% +\printfield{part}}% +{}% +\newunit% +\printfield{volumes}% +\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{series+number}}% +\newunit\newblock% +%\printfield{note}% +%\newunit\newblock% +\usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% +%\newunit\newblock %这里标点去掉 +\usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， +\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从下面移动到上面来，因为gbt2015的url需直接放在页码后面。 + \newunit\newblock% + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock% + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 期刊文章，连续出版物中的析出文献的格式 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{article}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{bytranslator+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{in:}% 不使用in来表示期刊等连续出版物 + \usebibmacro{journal+issuetitle}% + %\newunit +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit + \usebibmacro{note+pages}% + \iffieldequalstr{note}{news}{}{%当是新闻时不输出修改或更新日期 + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:url}{%当url选项为false时，也不输出 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}{}}}%带括号的修改或更新日期， + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%从后面移上来，调整url和页码之间的位置 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + + +% +% 连续出版物的驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{periodical}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{editor}% + %\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock + \newunit\newblock %删除上面一行，添加这一行 + \usebibmacro{title+issuetitle}% + \newunit\newblock% + \usebibmacro{location+institution+date}%添加这一行用于输出地址，单位和时间 + \newunit\newblock%添加这一行 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock} + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{issn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 专利文献驱动 +% + \DeclareBibliographyDriver{patent}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + %\usebibmacro{title}% + \usebibmacro{patenttitle}%给出专利专用的标题输出 + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + %\printfield{number}%已放到patenttitle中处理 + \iflistundef{location} + {} + {\setunit*{\addspace}% + \printtext{%[parens] + \printlist[][-\value{listtotal}]{location}}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byholder}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{newsdate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 在线文献驱动 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{online}{%源来自standard.BBX + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{note}}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit\newblock + %\printlist{organization}% + \printlist{institution}% + \newunit\newblock +\ifboolexpr{% +test{\iffieldundef{day}} and test{\iffieldundef{endday}} and test{\iffieldundef{eventday}}% +}{\usebibmacro{date}}% +{\usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期，为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{url+urldate}%从下面移上来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:eprint} + {\usebibmacro{eprint}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock + %\usebibmacro{url+urldate}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 报告类型驱动 +% 当有网址无出版项时，用online输出 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{report}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 论文、手册类型驱动 +% 2016-11-11，增加了译者信息 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{manual}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit% + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}%增加的译者信息 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldtype}{% + \printfield{type}% + \setunit*{\addspace}}{}% + \printfield{number}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + \iffieldundef{url}{}{%当没有网址时也不输出修改或更新日期 + \usebibmacro{modifydate}}%修改或更新日期为带括号的时间 + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit + \printfield{pagetotal}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isrn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + +% +% 备选类型驱动 +% +% 利用biblatex的misc驱动 +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{misc}{% + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/editor+others/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 + \usebibmacro{title}% +\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% + \newunit + \printlist{language}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byauthor}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{howpublished}% + \newunit\newblock + \printfield{type}% + \newunit + \printfield{version}% + \newunit + \printfield{note}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{institution+location+date}% + %\usebibmacro{organization+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% + \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +% 专著中的析出文献的格式修改 +% +\DeclareBibliographyDriver{inbook}{%源来自standard.bbx + \usebibmacro{bibindex}% + \usebibmacro{begentry}% + \usebibmacro{author/translator+others}% +\ifnameundef{author}{}{\setunit{\labelnamepunct}\newblock}%这一段用于去除作者不存在时多出的标点 +\usebibmacro{title}% +\usebibmacro{in:}% +%\printtext{\texttt{//}\addthinspace}% + \usebibmacro{bybookauthor}% + \ifnameundef{bookauthor}{% + \ifnameundef{editor}{}{\newunit}% + }{\newunit}%替换下一句 + %\newunit\newblock +\iffieldundef{series}{}{\usebibmacro{series+number}\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}}%为处理一些存在series的情况而增加 + \usebibmacro{maintitle+booktitle}% +\iffieldundef{volume}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{volume}}% +\iffieldundef{number}{}{\setunit{\addcolon\addspace}\printfield{number}}%增加卷和册信息 + \newunit\newblock% +% \usebibmacro{byeditor+others}% +% \newunit\newblock + \printfield{edition}% + \newunit + \iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{% +% \iffieldundef{maintitle} +% {\printfield{volume}% +% \printfield{part}} +% {}% +% \newunit +% \printfield{volumes}% +% \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{series+number} + }% + \newunit\newblock + %\printfield{note}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{publisher+location+date}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{chapter+pages}% + %\newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}%移到上面来 + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:isbn} + {\printfield{isbn}} + {}% + \newunit\newblock +% \usebibmacro{doi+eprint+url}% +% \newunit\newblock + \usebibmacro{addendum+pubstate}% + \setunit{\bibpagerefpunct}\newblock + \usebibmacro{pageref}% + \newunit\newblock + \iftoggle{bbx:related} + {\usebibmacro{related:init}% + \usebibmacro{related}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{finentry}\usebibmacro{annotation}} + + +% +%针对不同refsection做不同的格式处理的代码 +% + +% +%默认采用顺序编码制，因此只需增加的是作者年制 +\newrobustcmd{\setaystylesection}[1]{\csxdef{gb@aystyle@section#1}{#1}} + +% +%在AtBeginBibliography处已经无法重定义defbibenvironment{bibliographyay} +%所以输出只能是用另外定义的环境来实现 +%可以在refsection后面做patch +%为排序引入newrefcontext +\apptocmd{\refsection}{ +\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}% +\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}% +{ +\newrefcontext[sorting=gb7714-2015] + +\setlength{\bibhang}{1em} +\setlength{\bibitemindent}{-\bibhang} +\defbibenvironment{bibliography} + {\list + {} + {\setlength{\leftmargin}{\bibhang}% + \setlength{\itemindent}{\bibitemindent}% + \setlength{\itemsep}{\bibitemsep}% + \setlength{\parsep}{\bibparsep}}} + {\endlist} + {\item} +}{} +}{}{} + +% +%为排序引入endrefcontext +% +\pretocmd{\endrefsection}{ +\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}% +\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}% +{\endrefcontext}{} +}{}{} + +%因为是整个文献表，在打印文献表的时候，增加钩子代码 +%因为下面的钩子是在defbibenvironment的begincode之后，所以对于defbibenvironment相关的设置都是无效的 +\AtBeginBibliography{ + +\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}% +\ifcsdef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}% +%\ifboolexpr{ +%not test {\ifcsundef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}} +%and +%test {\ifcsequal{gb@refsecnum}{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}} +%} + { + + \DeclareDelimFormat{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + \DeclareDelimFormat[bib,biblist]{nameyeardelim}{\addcomma\space} + + \renewbibmacro*{date}{% + \iflabeldateisdate + {} + {\printdate}}% + + \renewbibmacro*{date+extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{labelyear} + {} + {\printtext{%[parens]%这里去掉括号 + \iflabeldateisdate + {\printdateextra} + {\printlabeldateextra}}}}% + + \newbibmacro*{bbx:savehash}{% + \savefield{fullhash}{\bbx@lasthash}} + + \newbibmacro*{bbx:dashcheck}[2]{} + + %注意这里当没有作者只有标题时在年份之前的标点是否需要标准并未涉及，所以未做处理。 + \renewbibmacro*{author}{%以前的date+extrayear变为date+extradate，所以对3.8以上版本重定义一下author + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseauthor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{author}} + } + {% + \usebibmacro{bbx:savehash}% + \printnames{author}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}} + {\setunit{\printdelim{authortypedelim}}}% + \iffieldundef{authortype} + {} + {\usebibmacro{authorstrg}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}} + }% + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash + \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% + \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}% + \usebibmacro{date+extradate}} + + \newbibmacro*{labeltitle}{% + \iffieldundef{label} + {\iffieldundef{shorttitle} + {\printfield{title}% + \clearfield{title}} + {\printfield[title]{shorttitle}}} + {\printfield{label}}} + +% +% 增加一个number带括号的格式，避免使用mkbibparens而引入一个不必要的空格 +% +\DeclareFieldFormat{addnumflag}{% +\nobreak\printtext{(}\nobreak #1\nobreak\printtext{)}} + +% +% 调整journal输出 +% +% 原理方法:首先判断子标题，然后再设置标点。 +% 避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在时需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格 +\renewbibmacro*{journal}{% + \iffieldundef{journaltitle}% + {}% + {\printtext[journaltitle]{% + \printfield[titlecase]{journaltitle}% + \iffieldundef{journalsubtitle}{}{\setunit{\subtitlepunct}% + \printfield[titlecase]{journalsubtitle}}}}} + + + +% +% 调整期刊卷和期的格式 +% +\renewbibmacro*{volume+number+eid}{%源来自standard.bbx +\iftoggle{bbx:gbfieldstd}{% + \printfield{volume}% + \setunit*{\adddot}% + \printfield{number}% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}{% + \printfield{volume}% + %\setunit*{\adddot}%去掉点号 + %\printfield{number}% + \iffieldundef{number}{}{\printfield[addnumflag]{number}}%区别于顺序编码制 + \iffieldundef{eid}{}{% + \setunit{\addcomma\space}% + \printfield{eid}}}} + +% +% 调整期刊年份的格式 +% +% 原理方法:原在authoryear.BBX中\bbx@opt@mergedate@compact中定义 +% 当issue存在时，才设置newunit。避免直接设置标点后，当volume不存在是需要使用\nopuct去标点进而引入不必要的空格 + \renewbibmacro*{issue+date}{% + \iffieldundef{issue}% + {}% + {\iftoggle{bbx:gbstrict}{}{\printtext[parens]{\printfield{issue}}\newunit}}} + +% +% 编者的符号修改一下 +% v1.0 2016-07-01 +% v1.0q 2019-03-01 hzz 修改editortype前的标点 +% +\renewbibmacro*{editor}{% + \ifboolexpr{ + test \ifuseeditor + and + not test {\ifnameundef{editor}} + } + {\usebibmacro{bbx:dashcheck} + {%\bibnamedash + \printnames{editor}% + } + {\printnames{editor}% + %\setunit{\printdelim{editortypedelim}}% + %\usebibmacro{bbx:savehash} + }% + \usebibmacro{editorstrg}% + %\clearname{editor}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}}% + {\global\undef\bbx@lasthash + \usebibmacro{labeltitle}% + \setunit*{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}}% + \ifboolexpr{% + test {\ifentrytype{inbook}} + or + test {\ifentrytype{incollection}} + or + test {\ifentrytype{inproceedings}} + or + test {\ifentrytype{conference}} + }% + {}% + {\usebibmacro{date+extradate}}} + + + }{} + + + +} + + + +% +%针对具体条目做处理时的特殊处理 +% +%\def\localsetrefsectionstyle{% +%} + +%\AtEveryBibitem{\localsetrefsectionstyle}% +%\AtEveryCite{\localsetchinesecode}% +%\AtEveryLositem{\localsetchinesecode}% diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx index 52ea63a1d3c..c33d610756b 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/latex/biblatex-gb7714-2015/gb7714-2015mx.cbx @@ -1,466 +1,474 @@ -%%
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the
-%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence
-%% Maintained by huzhenzhen
-%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com
-%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/01/19 v1.0w}
-\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015mx.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style]
-
-%
-% 加载标准样式
-%
-\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric
-
-
-%
-% 选项设置
-%
-\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{
- %autocite = superscript ,
- %autopunct = true ,
- %sorting = none ,
- maxcitenames=1,
- mincitenames=1,
- uniquename=init,%因为使用了名字缩写选项，所以需要设置uniquename=init而不是full避免冲突
- uniquelist=minyear,
- labeldateparts,
- sortcites,
-}
-
-
-
-%
-% 定义一个上标方括号wrapper
-%
-\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}%
-}
-
-% 修改postnote的输出格式
-\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1}
-
-%
-% 重定义cite命令
-%
-% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
-% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \printfield{postnote}}
-% v1.0p 以前用的方式
-%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
-% \usebibmacro{prenote}}
-% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
-% \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
-% {}
-% {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}%
-% \usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
-%
-% 定义upcite命令
-% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:对supercite增加[]
-\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{%
- \cite}
-
-%
-% 重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets]
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {%[
- \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-%
-% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求
-%
-% 原理方法:
-% 1.新增页码输出宏
-\newbibmacro*{postpages}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}
- {\printfield[postnote]{pages}}
- {\printfield{postnote}}}
-% 2.新增\pagescite引用命令
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \usebibmacro{postpages}}
-
-%
-% 定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite
-%
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \usebibmacro{postpages}}
-
-%
-% 定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式，
-%
-% 原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号
- \usebibmacro{prenote}%
- }
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]}
-
-%
-% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码
-% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz
-% gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite
-% 区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。
-%见numeric.CBX
-\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
- \printtext[bibhyperref]{%
- \printfield{labelprefix}%
- \printfield{labelnumber}%
- \ifbool{bbx:subentry}
- {\printfield{entrysetcount}}
- {}}}
-%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite},
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript]
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
- \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
- {\multicitedelim}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-
-%
-% 增加如下多个命令
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义
-% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}%
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
- \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}}}
- {\multicitedelim}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}}
-
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号
- {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:comp}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]%
- \printfield{postnote}}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}%
- {\textcite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}%
- {\parencite}
-
-\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}%
- {\parencite}
-
-
-%textcite标注命令中的标点设置
-%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}%
-
-%textcite标注命令中的标点设置，注意只针对textcite命令。
-\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{}%\addcomma\space
-\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\addthinspace}{\addspace}}%
-\AtEveryCitekey{%
-\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace
- {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}%
-}
-
-%
-%
-%
-\apptocmd{\refsection}{
-
-%\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}
-\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}%
-\ifcsundef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}%
-{}%
-{
-
-\renewcommand*{\iffinalcitedelim}{%
- \ifnumequal{\value{textcitecount}}{\value{textcitetotal}-1}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{cite:init}{%
- \ifnumless{\value{multicitecount}}{2}
- {\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lasthash
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}
- {\iffieldundef{prenote}
- {}
- {\global\undef\cbx@lasthash
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{cite:reinit}{%
- \global\undef\cbx@lasthash
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}
-
-\newbibmacro*{cite}{%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
- {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\printnames{labelname}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{citeyear}{%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
- {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{textcite}{%
- \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}
- {\ifnameundef{labelname}
- {\iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}%
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}}
- {\printnames{labelname}%
- \setunit{%
- \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}%
- \printdelim{nameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}%
- \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1}
- {\usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {}%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}%
- \stepcounter{textcitecount}%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}%
- \setunit{%
- \ifbool{cbx:parens}
- {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}}
- {}%
- \textcitedelim}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{%
- \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}}
-
-%
-% 重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签
-%
-% 原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)，
-% 于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格
-\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{%
- \iffieldundef{label}%
- {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}%
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{%
- \iffieldundef{labelyear}
- {}
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}}
-
-\newbibmacro*{cite:extradate}{%
- \iffieldundef{extradate}
- {}
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{extradate}}}}
-
-
-
-%
-% 重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签
-%
-% 原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)，
-% 于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格
-\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{%
- \iffieldundef{label}%
- {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}%
- {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}}
-
-%
-% 重定义cite命令
-%
-% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode}
-% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {%(
- )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens]
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {\usebibmacro{postnote}}
-
-%
-% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码
-% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 为与顺序编码制兼容，增加了命令，定义与citet相同
-\newbibmacro*{citet}{%
- \iffieldundef{shorthand}
- {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:label}%
- \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}
- {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}
- {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND
- \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)}
- {\setunit{\addcomma}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}}
- {\setunit{\compcitedelim}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}
- {\printnames{labelname}%
- %\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}%
- (\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate})%
- \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}%
- \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}%
- \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}%
- \setunit{\multicitedelim}}
-
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{citet}}
- {}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-%
-% 增加如下多个命令
-% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz
-% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义
-% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突
-
-%同\authornumcite
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}%
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- \usebibmacro{prenote}}%
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{citet}}
- {}
- {\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-%同cite
-\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}
- {\usebibmacro{cite:init}%
- \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{%
- \iffieldundef{postnote}%
- {}%
- {\thefield{postnote}}}%
- (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%)
- {\usebibmacro{citeindex}%
- \usebibmacro{cite}}
- {}
- {%(
- )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote}
- }
-
-
-}
-}{}{}
+%% +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% biblatex-gb7714-2015 --- A biblatex implementation of the +%% GBT7714-2015 citation style,numerical sequence +%% Maintained by huzhenzhen +%% E-mail: hzzmail@163.com +%% Released under the LaTeX Project Public License v1.3c or later +%% --------------------------------------------------------------- +%% +\def\versionofgbtstyle{2021/04/03 v1.0x} +\ProvidesFile{gb7714-2015mx.cbx}[\versionofgbtstyle biblatex citation style] + +% +% 加载标准样式 +% +\RequireCitationStyle{numeric-comp} %numeric + + +% +% 选项设置 +% +\ExecuteBibliographyOptions{ + %autocite = superscript , + %autopunct = true , + %sorting = none , + maxcitenames=1, + mincitenames=1, + uniquename=init,%因为使用了名字缩写选项，所以需要设置uniquename=init而不是full避免冲突 + uniquelist=minyear, + labeldateparts, + sortcites, +} + +%修改\mkbibsuperscript宏在最后加上一个空白使得xeCJK不会自动在引用标签后面加上中英文之间的空白 +%hzz,v1.0w,2021-0401 +\renewrobustcmd{\mkbibsuperscript}[1]{% + \unspace\allowhyphens\textsuperscript{% + \begingroup + \protected\long\def\mkbibsuperscript##1{% + \blx@warning{Nested superscript}% + \mkbibbrackets{##1}}% + #1\endgroup}\kern\z@} + +% +% 定义一个上标方括号wrapper +% +\newcommand*\mkbibsuperbracket[1]{% + \mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{#1}}% +} + +% 修改postnote的输出格式 +\DeclareFieldFormat{postnote}{#1} + +% +% 重定义cite命令 +% +% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode} +% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \printfield{postnote}} +% v1.0p 以前用的方式 +%\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibsuperbracket]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 +% {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% +% \usebibmacro{prenote}} +% {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% +% \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} +% {} +% {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}% +% \usebibmacro{postnote}} + +% +% 定义upcite命令 +% 20180604，v1.0l，hzz +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:对supercite增加[] +\newrobustcmd*{\upcite}{% + \cite} + +% +% 重定义parencite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}%[\mkbibbrackets] + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%] + \usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {%[ + \usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + +% +% 新定义pagescite命令，以满足标签带页码的国标要求 +% +% 原理方法: +% 1.新增页码输出宏 +\newbibmacro*{postpages}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote} + {\printfield[postnote]{pages}} + {\printfield{postnote}}} +% 2.新增\pagescite引用命令 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\pagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \usebibmacro{postpages}} + +% +% 定义yearpagescite，为与ay样式兼容，等同于\pagescite +% +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearpagescite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \usebibmacro{postpages}} + +% +% 定义\yearcite命令，为与ay样式兼容，且提供不输出页码的标签格式， +% +% 原理方法:等同于\pagescite，但不要页码 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\yearcite}[\mkbibsuperscript]%\mkbibbrackets,仍然用上标 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}%]直接添加方括号 + \usebibmacro{prenote}% + } + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]} + +% +% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码 +% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz +% gb7714样式新定义的命令都把cite放到最后，比如前面的pagescite，yearcite，这里的\authornumcite +% 区别于biblatex定义的命令都把cite放到前面，比如citeauthor等。 +%见numeric.CBX +\newbibmacro*{cite}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{% + \printfield{labelprefix}% + \printfield{labelnumber}% + \ifbool{bbx:subentry} + {\printfield{entrysetcount}} + {}}} +%见numeric.CBX，\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}, +\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}%[\mkbibsuperscript] + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% + \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + + +% +% 增加如下多个命令 +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义 +% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}% + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\iffieldequalstr{userf}{cn}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% + \printnames{labelname}\mkbibsuperscript{\mkbibbrackets{\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}}}} + {\multicitedelim} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\printfield{postnote}}} + + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep}[\mkbibsuperscript]%利用mkbibsuperbracket添加方括号 + {[\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite:comp}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{cite:dump}]% + \printfield{postnote}} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citetns}% + {\textcite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\citepns}% + {\parencite} + +\newrobustcmd*{\inlinecite}% + {\parencite} + + +%textcite标注命令中的标点设置 +%\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\addspace}% + +%textcite标注命令中的标点设置，注意只针对textcite命令。 +\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{nameyeardelim}{}%\addcomma\space +\DeclareDelimFormat[textcite]{andothersdelim}{\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\addthinspace}{\addspace}}% +\AtEveryCitekey{% +\iffieldequalstr{userf}{chinese}{\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addthinspace}}%\addthinspace + {\renewcommand*{\andothersdelim}{\addspace}}% +} + +% +% +% +\apptocmd{\refsection}{ + +%\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection} +\edef\gb@refsecnum{\number\c@refsection}% +\ifcsundef{gb@aystyle@section\gb@refsecnum}% +{}% +{ + +\renewcommand*{\iffinalcitedelim}{% + \ifnumequal{\value{textcitecount}}{\value{textcitetotal}-1}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:init}{% + \ifnumless{\value{multicitecount}}{2} + {\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}% + \global\undef\cbx@lasthash + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear} + {\iffieldundef{prenote} + {} + {\global\undef\cbx@lasthash + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:reinit}{% + \global\undef\cbx@lasthash + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear} + +\newbibmacro*{cite}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}} + {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\printnames{labelname}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}} + +\newbibmacro*{citeyear}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\iffieldundef{labelyear} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}} + {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}} + +\newbibmacro*{textcite}{% + \iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}} + {\ifnameundef{labelname} + {\iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \printdelim{nonameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}}} + {\printnames{labelname}% + \setunit{% + \global\booltrue{cbx:parens}% + \printdelim{nameyeardelim}\bibopenparen}% + \ifnumequal{\value{citecount}}{1} + {\usebibmacro{prenote}} + {}% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\iffieldundef{labelyear} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \global\undef\cbx@lastyear}}% + \stepcounter{textcitecount}% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}}% + \setunit{% + \ifbool{cbx:parens} + {\bibcloseparen\global\boolfalse{cbx:parens}} + {}% + \textcitedelim}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:shorthand}{% + \printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{shorthand}}} + +% +% 重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签 +% +% 原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)， +% 于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格 +\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{% + \iffieldundef{label}% + {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}% + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:labeldate+extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{labelyear} + {} + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printlabeldateextra}}} + +\newbibmacro*{cite:extradate}{% + \iffieldundef{extradate} + {} + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{extradate}}}} + + + +% +% 重定义cite:label，针对biblatex3.8以上版本set条目集的标注(引用)标签 +% +% 原理方法:当条目是set时，v3.8以上版本，都没有有用的信息(区别于3.7以下版本set复制第一个成员的信息)， +% 于是利用entrykey来给出标签，那么就要set的条目关键字是需要的字符串，注意字符串中间不能有空格 +\renewbibmacro*{cite:label}{% + \iffieldundef{label}% + {\iffieldundef{labeltitle}{\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{entrykey}}}%entrykey + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield[citetitle]{labeltitle}}}}% + {\printtext[bibhyperref]{\printfield{label}}}} + +% +% 重定义cite命令 +% +% 方法:\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite}[\mkbibparens]{precode}{loopcode}{sepcode}{postcode} +% v1.0p版后将cite的处理方式修改为类似pagescite，而不再使用biblatex的标准方式 +\DeclareCiteCommand{\cite} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%) + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {%( + )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\parencite}[\mkbibparens] + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}} + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {\usebibmacro{postnote}} + +% +% 定义\authornumcite命令，输出作者信息，然后在后面带上顺序编码 +% 20180427，v1.0k，增加，hzz +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 为与顺序编码制兼容，增加了命令，定义与citet相同 +\newbibmacro*{citet}{% + \iffieldundef{shorthand} + {\ifthenelse{\ifnameundef{labelname}\OR\iffieldundef{labelyear}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:label}% + \setunit{\printdelim{nonameyeardelim}}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}} + {\iffieldequals{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash} + {\ifthenelse{\iffieldequals{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}\AND + \(\value{multicitecount}=0\OR\iffieldundef{postnote}\)} + {\setunit{\addcomma}% + \usebibmacro{cite:extradate}} + {\setunit{\compcitedelim}% + \usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}} + {\printnames{labelname}% + %\setunit{\printdelim{nameyeardelim}}% + (\usebibmacro{cite:labeldate+extradate})% + \savefield{namehash}{\cbx@lasthash}% + \savefield{labelyear}{\cbx@lastyear}}}} + {\usebibmacro{cite:shorthand}% + \usebibmacro{cite:reinit}}% + \setunit{\multicitedelim}} + +\DeclareCiteCommand{\authornumcite}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citet}} + {} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + +% +% 增加如下多个命令 +% 20190409，v1.0r，hzz +% 方法:利用newcommand或newrobustcmd命令进行定义 +% 注意\citet和\citep命令之所以不用newrobustcmd，是为避免加载natbib模块后产生冲突 + +%同\authornumcite +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citet}% + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + \usebibmacro{prenote}}% + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{citet}} + {} + {\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + +%同cite +\DeclareCiteCommand{\citep} + {\usebibmacro{cite:init}% + \renewbibmacro*{postnote}{% + \iffieldundef{postnote}% + {}% + {\thefield{postnote}}}% + (\usebibmacro{prenote}}%) + {\usebibmacro{citeindex}% + \usebibmacro{cite}} + {} + {%( + )\mkbibsuperscript{\usebibmacro{postnote}}%\usebibmacro{postnote} + } + + +} +}{}{} |